Manual Noritsu Parte 2

33550
Processor Standard Setting
Pump Output Amount Setting [J]
Bringing up the display

Maintenance: 2260 → Extension → Processor Settings → Processor Standard Setting → Pump Output Amount Setting
3. Mode
M5453-00
! Explanation
! Pump Output Amount Setting (Input range: 0.1 to 200 ml)

Measure the pump output amounts by performing Pump Output Amount Measurement in Functions, and register the measured
values.
! Functions
! Pump Output Amount Measurement

Be sure to measure the output amounts when installing the system.
If correct output amounts have not been registered, water or replenishment solution will not be supplied normally.
! Initial Replenishment Operation

This menu is only shown when the service personnel password (2260) has been entered.
During the system installation, makes each replenisher pump, water supply pump and refilling water pump operate for a specified time
to exhaust air in the hoses.
To stop the initial replenishment operation, click Cancel.
IMPORTANT
• Be sure to perform the Initial Replenishment Operation when installing the system.
• If air still remains in the hoses after the Initial Replenishment Operation, perform the Pump Output Amount
Measurement for the corresponding hose in Functions, and exhaust air.
33550 1/1
33560
Operation Check [J]

Maintenance: 2260 → Extension → Processor Settings → Processor Standard Setting → Operation Check
3. Mode
M5454-00
! Explanation
You can check the operation of tablet sensors 1 and 2.
! Functions
! Dropping Tablet
Performs tablet dropping operation of the selected processing solution once.
Then, the detection status of tablet sensors 1 and 2 is shown.
IMPORTANT
• The number of dropped tablets in Dropping Tablet is not subtracted from the remaining number of tablets.
! Home Operation
If either tablet sensor 1 or 2 detects DARK, or both of them detect DARK, Home Operation of the processing solution can be
performed.
IMPORTANT
• Before performing Home Operation, be sure to remove the cartridges.
33560 1/1
33570
Manual Kit Change [J]

Maintenance → Extension → Processor Settings → Processor Standard Setting → Manual Kit Change
3. Mode
M5455-00
! Explanation
! Manual Kit Change

Performing Manual Kit Change initializes the following settings.
• Kit Correction Amount
• Kit Water Supply Amount Setting
• Kit Remains
• Drop Limit/without Replenishment Limit
• Total Cartridge Count
• Tablets Per Cartridge
• Basic Evaporation Refill Amount
NOTE
• If the setting values are changed, the new settings will be applied from when Manual Kit Change is performed, the kit is finished
or an error related to kit change is shown.
33570 1/1
33590
Dryer Lane Select Operation Setting

Maintenance: 2260 → Extension → Processor Settings → Processor Standard Setting → Dryer Lane Select Operation Setting
Display Illustration
Dryer selection solenoid 1
Dryer selection solenoid 2
3. Mode
! Explanation
! Dryer selection solenoid 1
$ Lane Select Operating Time (after Paper Front End Detected) (input range: 0.00 to 9.90 seconds)
Specify the time from when the dryer select sensor detects the paper leading edge until the Dryer selection solenoid
1 turns on.
$ Returning Operating Time (after Paper Rear End Detected) (input range: 0.00 to 9.90 seconds)
Specify the time from when the dryer select sensor finishes the detection of the paper until the Dryer selection
solenoid 1 turns off.
Model Dryer selection solenoid 2 (default value) Returning Operating Time (after Paper
Rear End Detected) (default value)
LP7500 3701/3702 5.15 seconds 8.20 seconds
LP7600 3703 4.05 seconds 6.50 seconds
! Dryer selection solenoid 2
$ Lane Select Operating Time (after Paper Front End Detected) (input range: 0.00 to 9.90 seconds)
Specify the time from when the dryer select sensor detects the paper leading edge until the Dryer selection solenoid
2 turns on.
33590 1/2
33590
$ Returning Operating Time (after Paper Rear End Detected) (input range: 0.00 to 9.90 seconds)
Specify the time from when the dryer select sensor finishes the detection of the paper until the Dryer selection
solenoid 2 turns off.
Model Dryer selection solenoid 2 (default value) Returning Operating Time (after Paper
Rear End Detected) (default value)
LP7500 3701/3702 5.80 seconds 17.0 seconds
3. Mode
33590 2/2
33600
Operator Selections
Operator Selections
Operator Selections

Maintenance: 2260 → Extension → Operator Selections
Menus that are shown only in the service mode are explained here. For details about other menus, see the Operator's Manual.
! Explanation (Printer 1)
3. Mode
M5312-00
Operator Selections (Printer 1)

Item Details Standard setting
Hide some check items This function is to not show specified items of the Start Up Checks and Close Down Without checkmark
for the startup/closedown Checks.
checks. • %: Check items for the Start Up Checks and Close Down Checks are shown.
• &: Check items for the Start Up Checks and Close Down Checks are not shown.
Setup Type*1 • TYPE 1: Processes prints with the traditional setup method and color management system (table lookup
and interpolation process).
The established CMS of TYPE 1 registers 9 ’ 9 ’ 9 = 729 points to the full color of 256 ’ 256 ’ 256 =
16777216 colors, and performs interpolating calculation to the lest of colors.The characteristic of
interpolating calculation causes uneven gradation sequence (divided into 9 gradations) when printing
gray gradation.
• TYPE 2: Processes prints using the new setup method.*2
The ICM (Image Color Matching) built on the Windows improves the gradation problems caused by
interpolating calculation. In the result, gradation on whole image is improved.
• For details about how to change Setup Type, see ☞ Necessary operations when changing Setup Type.
TYPE 1 TYPE 2
*1. Not used for FRONTIER-Printer. If the system is 37HD series, Setup Type is not shown, and it is set to TYPE 2.
33600 1/3
33600
Operator Selections
*2. To change Setup Type to TYPE 2 or to use the 37HD series, all of the following conditions must be met. If the following conditions are not met,
this may adversely affect print colors and density.
Required conditions for selecting TYPE 2 for Setup Type

1 • The version of the maintenance application is Ver. 7.00 or later.
2 • The version of the profile CD Vol. 3 installed is Ver. 2.0 or later.
3 • The version of the EZ Controller is Ver. 3.00 or later. (only if the EZ Controller is connected)
4 • The version of the QSS Printer Driver is Ver. 3.00 or later. (only if the QSS Printer Driver is connected)
5 • Noritsu Quick Access is not connected.
6 • Noritsu EZLab is not connected.
7 • If the paper type other than BA02D or BA05 has been registered in Paper Specification Registration/Setup. The paper types
BA02D and BA05 can be used only the setting is TYPE 1.
! Explanation (Processor 1/Processor 2)
3. Mode
Operator Selections : Processor 1 Operator Selections : Processor 2
Operator Selections (Processor)

Item Details Standard
setting
Drive, Dryer Manual ON Switch The processor and dryer operate continuously. ON
They operate regardless of whether the system is printing or not.
Error Occurrence Selection
Replenishment Error*1 (SP1) If set to OFF, the attention message is not shown when the ON
Replenishment Package Error (SP1) replenisher tanks run out of solution. ON
(Only for SM)
Refilling Water Error*1 (SP1) If set to OFF, the attention message is not shown when the ON
refilling water tank runs out of water.
Circulation Pump Error (SP1) If set to OFF, the error message is not shown when the circulation ON
pumps stop.
Order Classification Section Error (SP1) If set to OFF, the attention message is not shown when the print ON
full sensor detects paper.
*1. Not used for the F specification.

Switching between ON and OFF for errors related to replenishing or water refilling is not available.
33600 2/3
33600
Operator Selections
! Necessary operations when changing Setup Type

When Setup Type is changed, be sure to follow the procedure below.
Procedure
1. Change the Setup Type.
Example: Setup Type
M5312-00
If several printers are connected

If several printers are connected, select the same Setup Type for all the printers connected.
3. Mode
2. Click Enter.
3. Perform the Daily Setup for each paper type. (Perform the setup twice for each paper type.)
IMPORTANT
• If several paper types are registered, perform Daily Setup on all the registered paper types.
• Changing Setup Type causes large variation in correction values. Therefore, perform Daily Setup twice for
each paper type.
4. Perform the following operations on the EZ Controller. (Only if the EZ Controller is connected)
• For details about how to access the displays, see the EZ Controller Operator's Manual.
(1) If a custom profile is selected for Embedded Profile Setting in the Input Profile Setting tab on the Color
Management Setting display, click OK.
If the custom profile is not selected, this operation is not necessary.
(2) Click OK in the Monitor Profile Setting tab on the Color Management Setting display.
IMPORTANT
• Changing the Setup Type will change the gray gradation in the printer and this may affect the CMS
correction.
• Upgrade the NKC profile using the profile CD.
• If the custom profile for the printer has been configured in the Printer Profile Setting on the Color
Management Setting display, create the printer custom profile again.
(3) Perform Flatbed Scanner Setup.
5. Backup the setting data of the system.

This completes the operation for changing the Setup Type.
33600 3/3
35100
Maintenance
Maintenance
Colorimeter Unit Adjustment

Maintenance: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Colorimeter Unit Adjustment
3. Mode
M5372-00
! Explanation
Corrects the print stop position and error of advance rollers.
NOTE
• These settings can be configured only when the service personnel password (2260) has been entered.
! Paper Front End Advance Length Correction (Initial value: 0.0) (Input range: -5.0 to +5.0 mm)
Corrects advance error of the colorimeter unit rollers between the paper front end and the measurement positions.
! Paper Feed Error Correction (Initial value: 0.0) (Input range: -5.0 to +5.0 mm)
Corrects the advance error of the colorimeter unit rollers.
! Functions
! Test Paper Advance

When a test is executed, paper is advanced for 345 mm to the paper advance unit 1 and 2.
! Paper Test Advance

Adjusts the colorimeter unit.
! Cleaning operation
Cleans the colorimeter unit advance roller using the cleaning sheet (for the colorimeter).
! Adjustment Procedure (Paper Front End Advance Length Correction, Advance Length Correction)
1. Execute Test Paper Advance via Functions.
35100 1/4
35100
Maintenance
2. Open the printer top cover, and then remove the test paper from the paper advance unit 1 and 2.
Paper advance unit 1
Paper
3. Mode
G068474
3. Perform Paper Test Advance in Functions.

4. When the message Prepare a sheet of paper (length: 345 mm or more) and draw a line on it 5 mm
away from the leading end. Then, draw a second line at 201 mm away from the first line. is shown,
click OK.
Draw a line on the paper at 5 mm away from the edge, then draw a line at 201 mm away from the first line.
5mm
First line Second line

G085301
5. When the message Advance the paper to the first measurement point. Insert the paper into the
Colorimeter Unit. is shown, insert the test paper into the colorimeter with the first line in the lead, then
click OK.
The test paper is advanced and stops at the first line.
Adjust the paper guide to the paper width, and insert the test print straight until it reaches roller 1 of the colorimeter.
35100 2/4
35100
Maintenance
2 Paper guide
3. Mode
Test paper
Roller 1
G085302
6. Click Forward or Backward so that the first line aligns with the guide of the colorimeter.
Colorimeter guide
Colorimeter guide
First line
First line
G085303
7. Click OK to advance the test paper to the second line position.

8. Click Forward or Backward so that the second line aligns with the guide of the colorimeter.
9. Click OK to remove the test paper.
! Adjustment Procedure (Colorimeter cleaning)
1. Perform Cleaning operation in Functions.

2. Insert the cleaning sheet (for the colorimeter) into the colorimeter.
35100 3/4
35100
Maintenance
3. Insert the cleaning sheet into the colorimeter.

4. Click OK.
The cleaning sheet is fed to the colorimeter.
5. Click OK again.
The cleaning sheet is output.
3. Mode
35100 4/4
35210
Maintenance
Input Check (Printer)

Maintenance → Extension → Maintenance → Input Check → Printer
! Input Check
Item Reference
Paper Supply Unit ☞ Paper Supply 1 ☞ Paper Supply 2
☞ Magazine Code B ☞ Magazine Code C
☞ Magazine Unit A ☞ Magazine Unit A2-1
☞ Magazine Unit A2-2
Exposure Advance Unit ☞ Exposure Advance Unit
Exposure Engine Section ☞ Exposure Engine Section
3. Mode
Paper Advance Section ☞ Paper Advance Section 1 ☞ Paper Advance Section 2
Others ☞ Operation of the interlock switches
! Explanation
If the currently selected item such as sensor or limit switch detects DARK or ON, a buzzer sounds.
IMPORTANT
• Because there is a time lag of approx. 0.5 seconds, momentary operations cannot be shown on the Input Check
display.
! Paper Supply 1
No. Display Status
1 DARK/LIGHT Paper End Sensor B DARK When paper is detected.
2 DARK/LIGHT Paper End Sensor C DARK When paper is detected.
3 DARK/LIGHT Paper Loading Sensor DARK When paper is detected.
4 DARK/LIGHT Cut Home Sensor DARK Home position: When the cutter is opened.
5 DARK/LIGHT Cut End Sensor DARK When the cutter is closed.
6 DARK/LIGHT Paper Hold Sensor DARK When pressure is applied to paper.
7 DARK/LIGHT Zigzagging Correction Sensor (Left) DARK When the left arm is detected.
8 DARK/LIGHT Zigzagging Correction Sensor (Right) DARK When the right arm is detected.
9 DARK/LIGHT Paper Supply Pressure Change Sensor DARK When pressure is applied to paper.
10 ON/OFF Interlock Switch (Printer Top Cover) See ☞ Operation of the interlock switches.
11 ON/OFF Interlock Switch (Printer Doors 1, 4)
12 ON/OFF Interlock Switch (Printer Door 2)
13 ON/OFF Printer Door 3 Sensor
! Paper Supply 2
No. Display Status
1 ON/OFF DIP Switch 1-1 OFF Displays the dip switch status of the printer control
2 ON/OFF DIP Switch 1-2 OFF PCB. ☞ 66000
Turn off all.
3 ON/OFF DIP Switch 1-3 OFF
! Magazine Code B
No. Display Status
1 DARK/LIGHT Paper Magazine Code Sensor B1 (Right) DARK When the pin is detected.
35210 1/5
35210
Maintenance
No. Display Status

2 DARK/LIGHT Paper Magazine Code Sensor B2 DARK When the pin is detected.
7 DARK/LIGHT Paper Magazine Code Sensor B7 (Left) DARK When the pin is detected.
8 ### Attached Paper Magazine B Shows the attached paper magazine.
! Magazine Code C
No. Display Status
1 DARK/LIGHT Paper Magazine Code Sensor C1 (Lower) DARK When the pin is detected.
3. Mode
2 DARK/LIGHT Paper Magazine Code Sensor C2 DARK When the pin is detected.
7 DARK/LIGHT Paper Magazine Code Sensor C7 (Upper) DARK When the pin is detected.
8 ### Attached Paper Magazine C Shows the attached paper magazine.
! Magazine Unit A
No. Display Status
1 DARK/LIGHT Paper Magazine Code Sensor A1 (Upper) DARK When the pin is detected.
2 DARK/LIGHT Paper Magazine Code Sensor A2 DARK When the pin is detected.
7 DARK/LIGHT Paper Magazine Code Sensor A7 (Lower) DARK When the pin is detected.
8 ### Attached Paper Magazine A Shows the attached paper magazine.
9 DARK/LIGHT Paper End Sensor A DARK When paper is detected.
! Magazine Unit A2-1

No. Display Status
1 DARK/LIGHT Paper Magazine Code Sensor A21 (Upper) DARK When the pin is detected.
7 DARK/LIGHT Paper Magazine Code Sensor A27 (Lower) DARK When the pin is detected.
8 ### Attached Paper Magazine A2 Shows the attached paper magazine.
35210 2/5
35210
Maintenance
! Magazine Unit A2-2

No. Display Status
1 DARK/LIGHT Paper End Sensor A2 DARK When paper is detected.
2 DARK/LIGHT Pressure Change Sensor A2 DARK When paper is detected.
3 DARK/LIGHT Width Change Sensor A2 DARK When paper is detected.
! Exposure Advance Unit

No. Display Status
3. Mode
1 DARK/LIGHT Exposure Advance Pressure Change Sensor 1 DARK When pressure is applied to paper.
2 DARK/LIGHT Exposure Start Sensor DARK When paper is detected.
5 ##.#C Inner Temperature Shows the inner temperature of the printer.
6 ON/OFF Interlock Switch (Printer Door 1) See ☞ Operation of the interlock switches.
7 ON/OFF Interlock Switch (Printer Doors 1, 4)*1
Turn off all.
*1. Printer door 4 is shown only when the Quad Magazine Unit has been registered to Option Registration.
! Exposure Engine Section

No. Display Status
1 ON/OFF Interlock Switch (Printer Top ON When the cover is closed.
Cover)
2 Synchronous/A Polygon Mirror Synchronous Synchrono Normal
synchronous us When the polygon mirror rotates normally.
Asynchron Problem
ous When the polygon mirror does not rotate normally.
When you enter the Input Check, the polygon mirror operates.
The polygon mirror driver outputs the signal which indicates the stability of the polygon mirror rotation.
3 Synchronous/A Laser Synchronous Sensor Synchrono When the polygon mirror is synchronous, and either of
synchronous*1 us R/G/B lasers or all lasers is/are emitting light.
Asynchron When the status of the polygon mirror is Asynchronous.
ous When the polygon mirror is synchronous, and either of
R/G/B lasers or all lasers is/are not emitting light.
When you enter the Input Check mode, the polygon mirror and R/G/B lasers operate.
If either of R/G/B lasers is not emitting light, whether synchronous or asynchronous is shown depends on the timing of
measurement and the laser light intensity.
When checking for any problems in laser output, use the Output Check mode. ☞ 35310
35210 3/5
35210
Maintenance
No. Display Status

4 OK/No Good G Laser Light Source Status OK The laser and G laser driver are normal.
No Good The laser unit is deteriorated.
The G laser driver is not connected correctly, or it is
damaged.
The laser light intensity depends on the electric current applied to the laser diode. If the laser diode is deteriorated, the electric
current is added to acquire the specified amount of output. If the current value exceeds the limit, No Good is shown.
5 ##.#C R Laser Thermosensor Shows the R laser temperature.
For the controlled temperature of the R laser, see ☞ No. 06107.
6 ##.#C B laser temperature sensor Shows the B laser temperature.
For the controlled temperature of the B laser, see ☞ No. 06220.
7 ##.#C Laser Unit Thermosensor Shows the laser unit temperature.
For the controlled temperature of the laser unit, see ☞ No. 06177.
8 ##### Polygon Mirror Frequency 2043±7*2 When the polygon mirror rotates normally.
3. Mode
2180±7*3
- When the polygon mirror does not rotate normally.
9 ON/OFF G Laser Judgment Signal 1 OFF The combination of ON/OFF identifies the laser unit type.
10 ON/OFF G Laser Judgment Signal 2 OFF For details, see ☞ Exposure Engine Section (Details).
*1. Even though the laser unit is in normal condition, it may take five minutes or more for the Laser Synchronous Sensor to turn from
Asynchronous to Synchronous.
*2. 37 series/LP7500/LP7600/LP7700/LP7900
*3. 37HD series
! Paper Advance Section 1

No. Display Status
1 DARK/LIGHT Paper Sensor 1 DARK When paper is detected.
2 DARK/LIGHT Lane Select Sensor (Left) DARK When the arm is detected.
3 DARK/LIGHT Lane Select Sensor (Right) DARK When the arm is detected.
4 DARK/LIGHT Arm Sensor (Left) DARK When the arm is detected.
5 DARK/LIGHT Arm Sensor (Right) DARK When the arm is detected.
6 DARK/LIGHT Paper Sensor 2 (Left) DARK When paper is detected.
7 DARK/LIGHT Paper Sensor 2 (Center) DARK When paper is detected.
8 DARK/LIGHT Paper Sensor 2 (Right) DARK When paper is detected.
*1
*1. Printer door 4 is shown only when the Quad Magazine Unit has been registered to Option Registration.

No. Display Status
Turn off all.
5 DARK/LIGHT Pressure Guide Sensor DARK When the paper pressure is released.
6 DARK/LIGHT Paper Advance Pressure Change Sensor (Left) DARK When pressure is applied to paper.
7 DARK/LIGHT Paper Advance Pressure Change Sensor (Right) DARK When pressure is applied to paper.
35210 4/5
35210
Maintenance
No. Display Status

Turn off all.
! Operation of the interlock switches

If the quad magazine unit is installed
When each interlock switch Status of Input Check when each interlock switch is off
is off Interlock Switch Interlock Switch Interlock Switch Printer Door 3 Sensor
(Printer Top Cover) (Printer Doors 1, 4) (Printer Door 2)
Interlock Switch (Printer Top OFF OFF OFF ON
3. Mode
Cover)
Interlock Switch (Printer Door ON OFF OFF ON
1)
Interlock Switch (Printer Door ON ON OFF ON
2)
Printer Door 3 Sensor ON ON ON OFF
Interlock switch (printer door ON OFF OFF ON
4)
If the quad magazine unit is not installed

When each interlock switch Status of Input Check when each interlock switch is off
is off Interlock Switch Interlock Switch Interlock Switch Printer Door 3
(Printer Top Cover) (Printer Door 1) (Printer Door 2) Sensor*1
Interlock Switch (Printer Top OFF OFF OFF ON
Cover)
Interlock Switch (Printer Door ON OFF OFF ON
1)
Interlock Switch (Printer Door ON ON OFF ON
2)
Printer Door 3 Sensor*1 ON ON ON OFF
*1. Printer Door 3 Sensor is shown only when the triple magazine unit is installed.
35210 5/5
35220
Maintenance
Input Check (Processor) [F]

Maintenance → Extension → Maintenance → Input Check → Processor
Description for each specification
For the specifications other than the [F] specification, items that are different from the [F] specification are only explained. For other
specifications, see below.
Reference
☞ Input Check (Processor) [N] ☞ Input Check (Processor) [SM] ☞ Input Check (Processor) [J]
! Input Check
3. Mode
Item Specificatio Reference
n
Processor Section F ☞ 1 (for each ☞ 2 (for each ☞ 3 (for each ☞ 3 (for each
specification) specification) specification) specification)
N ☞ 1 [N] ☞ 2 [N]
SM ☞ 1 [SM] ☞ 2 [SM] ☞ 3 [SM] ☞ 4 [SM]
J ☞ 1 [J] ☞ 2 [J] ☞ Tablet Replenishment Section [J]
Dryer Section Common ☞ Dryer Section (common to all specifications)
Order Classification ☞ Order Classification Section (common to all specifications)
Section
Colorimeter Unit ☞ Colorimeter Unit (common to all specifications)
! 1 (for each specification)

No. Display Status
1 ON/OFF Processing Solution Level OFF ☞ No. 05508 occurs.
2 ON/OFF Processing Solution Safety Thermostat ON When the operation is normal.
3 ON/OFF Interlock Switch (Processor Top Cover) ON When the cover is closed.
4 ON/OFF P1 Processable Solution Level OFF ☞ No. 05916[F]occurs.*1
5 ON/OFF P2 Processable Solution Level ☞ No. 05917[F]occurs.*1
6 ON/OFF PS1 Processable Solution Level ☞ No. 05918[F]occurs.*1
10 ON/OFF P1 Effluent Float Switch ON When effluent is full.
11 ON/OFF P2 + PS Effluent Float Switch ON
12 CLOSE/OPEN Starter Jumper Setting CLOSE When the jumper of the processor relay PCB is
connected
13 ON/OFF Rack Stopper Sensor ON When the rack stopper is set.
14 ON/OFF Control strip holder detection switch*2 ON When the control strip holder is detected.
*1. If the processable level sensors for each processing solution detect OFF, the system stops printing because paper cannot be soaked in processing
solutions, and that may adversely affect the print quality.
*2. It may take one minute until the processor control PCB and control strip unit communicate.

No. Display Status
1 ON/OFF Control strip processing complete.*3 • ON: Advancing the control strip is completed.
• OFF: Advancing the control strip is not completed.
2 ### Pump Rotation Detector When an error occurs.*1
35220 1/9
35220
Maintenance
No. Display Status

3 50/60 Power Supply Frequency (Hz) Shows the frequency.
4 #.## P1 Flow Amount Displays the P1 circulation amount.*2
5 ### Drive Motor Revolution Count
*1. Displays OK if all circulation pumps are normally rotating.
If an error occurs, the problematic pump name is shown. (P1, P2, PS1, PS2, PS3, PS4)
If errors simultaneously occur in two or more pumps, the problematic pump names are shown in order starting from P1.
*2. Displays only when the digital flowmeter is registered as an option.

No. Display Status
1 ON/OFF P1R (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level OFF When the solution level is low.
3. Mode
Sensor
2 ON/OFF P1R (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level OFF
Sensor
3 ON/OFF P2RA (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level OFF
Sensor
4 ON/OFF P2RA (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level OFF
Sensor
5 ON/OFF P2RB (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level OFF
Sensor
6 ON/OFF P2RB (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level OFF
Sensor
7 ON/OFF PSR (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level OFF
Sensor
8 ON/OFF PSR (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level OFF
Sensor
9 ON/OFF Interlock Switch (Replenisher Section Door) ON When the cover is closed.
10 DARK/LIGHT Replenisher Cartridge Set Sensor DARK When the replenishment cartridge is attached.
11 DARK/LIGHT Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Upper) DARK When the replenishment cartridge is in the
upper position.
12 DARK/LIGHT Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Lower) DARK When the replenishment cartridge is in the
lower position.
13 #.# Environment Temperature Displays the temperature and humidity at the place where
14 #.# Environment Humidity the temperature and humidity sensor is installed.
See ☞ 63280 for the installation position of the
temperature and humidity sensor.
! Dryer Section (common to all specifications)

No. Display Status
1 ON/OFF Dryer Safety Thermostat OFF When the dryer safety thermostat is turned off.
2 ON/OFF Interlock Switch (Dryer Cover) ON When the cover is closed.
3 DARK/LIGHT Print Sensor (Left) DARK When paper is detected.
4 DARK/LIGHT Print Sensor (Center) DARK When paper is detected.
5 DARK/LIGHT Print Sensor (Right) DARK When paper is detected.
6 DARK/LIGHT Dryer Lane Select Sensor DARK When paper is detected.
! Order Classification Section (common to all specifications)

No. Display Status
1 DARK/LIGHT Sorter Home Sensor DARK Home position: Print receiving position
2 DARK/LIGHT Print Full Sensor DARK When paper is detected.
3 ON/OFF Manual Sorter Switch ON When the switch is pressed.
35220 2/9
35220
Maintenance
No. Display Status

4 DARK/LIGHT Conveyor Unit Sensor DARK When the conveyor unit is set.
5 DARK/LIGHT Paper Guide Open Sensor*1 DARK Home position (upper)
*1
6 DARK/LIGHT Paper Guide Close Sensor DARK When the paper guide closes (when the paper
width below 152 mm is processed)
*1. Shown only if the print sorter unit (10-inch type) is supported.
! Colorimeter Unit (common to all specifications)

No. Display Status
1 DARK/LIGHT Paper Sensor 1 DARK When paper is detected.
2 DARK/LIGHT Paper Sensor 2 DARK
3 ON/OFF Colorimeter detection ON When Colorimeter Unit is detected
3. Mode
35220 3/9
35220
Maintenance
Input Check (Processor) [N]

Reference
☞ Input Check (Processor) [SM] ☞ Input Check (Processor) [J] ☞ Input Check (Processor) [F]
! Explanation
If the currently selected item such as sensor or limit switch detects DARK or ON, a buzzer sounds.
IMPORTANT
3. Mode
• Because there is a time lag of approx. 0.5 seconds, momentary operations cannot be shown on the Input Check
display.
! 1 [N]
No. Display Status
1 ON/OFF Processing Solution Level OFF When the solution level is low.
2 ON/OFF CD Replenishment Solution Level Sensor OFF When the system runs out of replenishment
solution.
3 ON/OFF BF Replenishment Solution Level Sensor OFF When the system runs out of replenishment
solution.
4 ON/OFF STB Replenishment Solution Level Sensor OFF When the system runs out of replenishment
solution.
5 ON/OFF CD Refilling Water Level OFF When the solution level is low.
6 ON/OFF BF Refilling Water Level OFF When the solution level is low.
7 ON/OFF STB 1 Refilling Water Level OFF When the solution level is low.
11 ON/OFF Refilling Water Tank Level Sensor OFF When the solution level is low.
12 ON/OFF Processing Solution Safety Thermostat ON When the solution safety thermostat operates
normally.
! 2 [N]
No. Display Status
1 ON/OFF CD Effluent Float Switch ON When effluent is full.
2 ON/OFF BF Effluent Float Switch ON When effluent is full.
3 ON/OFF STB Effluent Float Switch ON When effluent is full.
4 CLOSE/OPEN Starter Jumper Setting CLOSE When the jumper of power PCB 2 is connected.
9 #.## CD Flow Amount Shows the CD circulation amount.*2
35220 4/9
35220
Maintenance
If an error occurs, the problematic pump name is shown. (CD, BF, STB1, STB2, STB3, STB4)
If errors simultaneously occur in two or more pumps, the problematic pump names are shown in order starting from CD.
3. Mode
35220 5/9
35220
Maintenance
Input Check (Processor) [SM]

Reference
☞ Input Check (Processor) [N] ☞ Input Check (Processor) [J] ☞ Input Check (Processor) [F]
! 1 [SM]
No. Display Status
3. Mode
2 ON/OFF CD Refilling Water Level OFF When the solution level is low.
3 ON/OFF BF Refilling Water Level OFF When the solution level is low.
! 2 [SM]
No. Display Status
*3
6 ON/OFF Control strip processing complete. • ON: Advancing the control strip is completed.

! 3 [SM]
No. Display Status
1 ON/OFF CD-A Replenisher Pump Sensor ON Home position
2 ON/OFF CD-B Replenisher Pump Sensor ON Home position
3 ON/OFF CD-C Replenisher Pump Sensor ON Home position
4 ON/OFF CD-W Water Supply Pump Sensor ON Home position
5 ON/OFF BF-A Replenisher Pump Sensor ON Home position
6 ON/OFF BF-B Replenisher Pump Sensor ON Home position
7 ON/OFF STB Replenisher Pump Sensor ON Home position
35220 6/9
35220
Maintenance
No. Display Status

8 DARK/LIGHT CD-A Replenishment Solution Sensor LIGHT When the replenishment solution level is
normal.
9 DARK/LIGHT CD-B Replenishment Solution Sensor LIGHT When the replenishment solution level is
normal.
10 DARK/LIGHT CD-C Replenishment Solution Sensor LIGHT When the replenishment solution level is
normal.
11 DARK/LIGHT BF-A Replenishment Solution Sensor LIGHT When the replenishment solution level is
normal.
12 DARK/LIGHT BF-B Replenishment Solution Sensor LIGHT When the replenishment solution level is
normal.
13 DARK/LIGHT STB Replenishment Solution Sensor LIGHT When the replenishment solution level is
normal.
3. Mode
! 4 [SM]
No. Display Status
1 ON/OFF Replenishment Package Sensor P-1 ON When the replenishment package is attached.
2 ON/OFF Replenishment Package Sensor P-2 ON When the replenishment package is attached.
3 ON/OFF Water Supply Tank Level Sensor OFF When the solution level is low.
35220 7/9
35220
Maintenance
Input Check (Processor) [J]

Reference
☞ Input Check (Processor) [N] ☞ Input Check (Processor) [SM] ☞ Input Check (Processor) [F]
! 1 [J]
No. Display Status
3. Mode
2 ON/OFF SW Tank Level Sensor OFF When the solution level is low.
3 ON/OFF SW/DW Tank Level Sensor OFF When the solution level is low.
! 2 [J]
No. Display Status

! Tablet Replenishment Section [J]

No. Display Status
1 DARK/LIGHT CD Tablet Sensor 1 DARK When the tablet is detected.
2 DARK/LIGHT CD Tablet Sensor 2 DARK When the tablet is detected.
3 DARK/LIGHT BF Tablet Sensor 1 DARK When the tablet is detected.
4 DARK/LIGHT BF Tablet Sensor 2 DARK When the tablet is detected.
5 DARK/LIGHT STB Tablet Sensor 1 DARK When the tablet is detected.
6 DARK/LIGHT STB Tablet Sensor 2 DARK When the tablet is detected.
7 DARK/LIGHT CD Cartridge Sensor LIGHT When the cartridge is detected.
8 DARK/LIGHT BF Cartridge Sensor LIGHT When the cartridge is detected.
9 DARK/LIGHT STB Cartridge Sensor LIGHT When the cartridge is detected.
10 DARK/LIGHT Elevator Upper Sensor DARK When the elevator is detected.
35220 8/9
35220
Maintenance
No. Display Status

11 DARK/LIGHT Elevator Middle Sensor DARK When the elevator is detected.
12 DARK/LIGHT Elevator Lower Sensor DARK When the elevator is detected.
13 ON/OFF Tablet Replenishment Unit Interlock Switch ON When the tablet unit is attached
3. Mode
35220 9/9
35310
Maintenance
Output Check (Printer)

Maintenance → Extension → Maintenance → Output Check → Printer
! Output Check
Item Reference
Paper Supply Unit ☞ Paper Supply Unit 1 ☞ Paper Supply Unit 2
☞ Magazine Unit (Magazine A) ☞ Magazine Unit (Magazine A2)
Exposure Advance Unit ☞ Exposure Advance Unit
Exposure Engine Section ☞ Exposure Engine Section 1 ☞ Exposure Engine Section 2
☞ Exposure Engine Section (Details)
Paper Advance Section ☞ Paper Advance Section 1 ☞ Paper Advance Section 2
3. Mode
! Explanation
Checks the operation of currently selected motor, buzzer or LED.
! Paper Supply Unit 1

No. Display Status
1 Paper Advance Motor 1 Clicking Execute activates it for the set time.
2 Paper Supply Motor B/C
3 Cut Motor Clicking Execute activates it once.
4 Paper Magazine Motor B Clicking Execute activates it for the set time.
5 Paper Magazine Motor C
6 Paper Magazine Lamp B/C Clicking Execute turns it on, and clicking Cancel turns it off.
7 Paper Supply Pressure Change Motor Clicking Execute alternately performs compressing/releasing
operation.
! Paper Supply Unit 2

No. Display Status
1 Ribbon Advance Motor Clicking Execute starts operation, and clicking Cancel stops
operation.
2 Dot Head (1st Line) Clicking Execute activates it once.
3 Dot Head (2nd Line)
4 Paper Hold Motor Clicking Execute alternately performs compressing/releasing
operation.
5 Paper Supply Arm Motor (Left / Right) Clicking Execute moves upward and downward.
6 Buzzer Clicking Execute sounds a buzzer.
Clicking Cancel stops the buzzer.
! Magazine Unit (Magazine A)

No. Display Status
1 Paper Magazine Motor A Clicking Execute activates it for the set time.
2 Paper Supply Motor A
3 Paper Magazine Lamp A Clicking Execute turns it on, and clicking Cancel turns it off.
35310 1/3
35310
Maintenance
! Magazine Unit (Magazine A2)

No. Display Status
1 Paper Magazine Motor A2 Clicking Execute activates it for the set time.
2 Paper Supply Motor A2
3 Pressure Release Motor A2 Clicking Execute activates it once.
4 Width Change Motor A2 Clicking Execute activates it once.
5 Paper Magazine Lamp A Clicking Execute turns it on, and clicking Cancel turns it off.
! Exposure Advance Unit

No. Display Status
1 Exposure Advance Motor 1 Clicking Execute activates it for the set time.
2 Exposure Advance Pressure Change Motor 1 Clicking Execute alternately performs compressing/releasing
3. Mode
operation.
3 Exposure Advance Motor 2 Clicking Execute activates it for the set time.
4 Exposure Advance Pressure Change Motor 2 Clicking Execute repeats compressing and releasing operations.
5 Exposure Advance Pressure Change Motor 3
! Exposure Engine Section 1

No. Display Status
1 Polygon Mirror OFF Clicking Execute stops the polygon mirror operation.
Clicking Cancel starts the polygon mirror operation.
2 Laser Unit Cooling Fan 1,2 ON Clicking Execute starts operation, and clicking Cancel stops
operation.
3 Laser Unit Heater ON Clicking Execute turns on the laser unit heater.
Clicking Cancel turns off the laser unit heater.
! Exposure Engine Section 2

No. Display Status
1 R Laser Output ON Clicking Execute turns on the R Laser Output.
Clicking Cancel turns off the R Laser Output.
2 G Laser Output ON*1 Clicking Execute turns on the G Laser Output.
Clicking Cancel turns off the G Laser Output.
3 B Laser Output ON Clicking Execute turns on the B Laser Output.
Clicking Cancel turns off the B Laser Output.
*1. Even though the laser unit is in normal condition, it may take five or more minutes from when G Laser Output ON is performed until the status
of Laser Synchronous Sensor changes from Asynchronous to Synchronous.
! Exposure Engine Section (Details)

Display Status
Synchronous/Asyn Polygon Mirror Synchronous Synchron When the polygon mirror rotates normally, and it is stable.
chronous ous • When entering the Output Check mode.
• When turning on the polygon mirror.
Asynchro When the polygon mirror does not rotate normally.
nous • When turning off the polygon mirror.
35310 2/3
35310
Maintenance
Display Status
Synchronous/Asyn Laser Synchronous Sensor Synchron When any of the R/G/B lasers is emitting light.
chronous ous • When the status of the polygon mirror is Synchronous,
and any of the R/G/B laser outputs is turned on.
Asynchro When no R/G/B lasers are emitting light.
nous • When entering the Output Check mode.
• When the status of the polygon mirror is Asynchronous.
• When all R/G/B laser outputs are off.
This feature checks the output condition of each R/G/B laser separately.
The synchronous check cannot be performed in the same condition as printing that all R/G/B lasers emit light.
Therefore, even if no problems are found in Output Check, problems may occur in printing.
OK/No Good G Laser Light Source Status OK The laser and G laser driver are normal.
No Good The laser unit is deteriorated.
3. Mode
The G laser driver is not connected correctly, or it is damaged.
##.#C Laser Unit Thermosensor Shows the laser unit temperature.
For the controlled temperature of the laser unit, see ☞ No. 06177.
##.#C R Laser Thermosensor Shows the R laser temperature.
For the controlled temperature of the R laser, see ☞ No. 06107.
##.#C B laser temperature sensor Shows the B laser temperature.
For the controlled temperature of the B laser, see ☞ No. 06220.
##### Polygon Mirror Frequency 2043±7*1 When Laser Synchronous Sensor detects Synchronous in
2180±7*2 Output Check.
- When Laser Synchronous Sensor detects Synchronous in
Output Check.
ON/OFF G Laser Judgment Signal 1 OFF The combination of ON/OFF identifies the laser unit type.
ON/OFF G Laser Judgment Signal 2 OFF For details, see the list below.
*1. 37 series/LP7500/LP7600/LP7700/LP7900
*2. 37HD series
Laser unit (Type # # #) G laser judgement signal

1 2
(Type HhB*1 ), (Type HhBA*2) OFF OFF
(Type IiB*1), (Type IiBA*2) ON OFF
*1. 37 series/LP7500/LP7600/LP7700/LP7900
*2. 37HD series

No. Display Status
1 Paper Advance Arm Motor (Left) Clicking Execute repeats moving forward and backward.
2 Paper Advance Arm Motor (Right)
3 Lane Select Motor (Left) Clicking Execute repeats moving to the left and right.
4 Lane Select Motor (Right)

No. Display Status
2 Pressure Guide Motor Clicking Execute alternately performs compressing/releasing.
3 Paper Advance Pressure Change Motor (Left) Clicking Execute alternately performs compressing/releasing.
4 Paper Advance Pressure Change Motor (Right)
35310 3/3
35320
Maintenance
Output Check (Processor) [F]

Reference
☞ Output Check (Processor) [N] ☞ Output Check (Processor) [SM] ☞ Output Check (Processor) [J]
! Output Check
Item Specificatio Reference
n
Processor Section F ☞ 1 (for each ☞ 2 (for each ☞ 3 (for each specification)*6
3. Mode
specification) specification)*2
N ☞ 1 [N] ☞ 2 [N]
SM ☞ 1 [SM] ☞ 2 [SM] ☞ 3 [SM]
J ☞ Processor Section ☞ Processor Section 2[J] ☞ Tablet ☞ Tablet
1[J] Replenishment Replenishment
Section 1[J] Section 2[J]
Dryer Section Common ☞ Dryer Section (common to all specifications)
Order Classification ☞ Order Classification Section (common to all specifications)
Section
Colorimeter Unit ☞ Colorimeter Unit (common to all specifications)

No. Display Status
1 Drive Motor + Drive Cooling Fan Clicking Execute starts operation, and clicking Cancel stops
2 P1 Heater operation.
3 P2 Heater
4 PS Heater
5 P1 Cooling Water Solenoid Valve
6 P2 Cooling Water Solenoid Valve
7 PS Cooling Water Solenoid Valve
8 Tank Cooling Fan
9 Exhaust Fan
10 Processor Condition Lamp (Green) Clicking Execute turns it on, and clicking Cancel turns it off.
11 Processor Condition Lamp (Red)
12 Signal Lamp Clicking Execute turns it on, and clicking Cancel turns it off.
13 Control Strip Advance Motor • Execute: The Control Strip Advance Motor starts operation.
• Cancel: The Control Strip Advance Motor does not stop
operation.
! 2 (for each specification)*2

No. Display Status
1 Replenisher Cartridge Open Motor See ☞ Replenisher Cartridge Open Motor operation.
2 P1R Replenisher Pump Clicking Execute activates the replenisher pump by one stroke
3 P2RA Replenisher Pump (maximum). *1
4 P2RB Replenisher Pump IMPORTANT
5 PSR Replenisher Pump • If a replenisher pump is activated, the initial value will be
used for the next opening.
*1. If any of the effluent float switches detects ON, the replenisher pumps do not operate.
35320 1/8
35320
Maintenance
*2. SP1: The menus marked with (SP1) can be selected only when the service personnel password (2260) has been entered.
Replenisher Cartridge Open Motor operation

Count Replenisher Cartridge Open Motor operation
First Clicking Execute moves the motor from the upper position to the lower position. *1
Second Clicking Execute moves the motor from the lower position to the upper position. *2
*1. The Replenisher Cartridge Open Motor rotates clockwise.

*2. The Replenisher Cartridge Open Motor rotates counterclockwise.
! 3 (for each specification)*6

No. Display Status
1 P1R Cartridge Cleaning Valve + Replenisher Clicking Execute activates the cartridge cleaning valve and auto
Cartridge Cleaning Pump cleaning pump. *1*2*5
3. Mode
2 P2RA Cartridge Cleaning Valve + Replenisher • The system performs the following operations.
Cartridge Cleaning Pump • 1. Turns on the auto cleaning pump.
3 P2RB Cartridge Cleaning Valve + Replenisher • 2. Waits until the water pressure is adjusted (one second).
Cartridge Cleaning Pump
• 3. Opens the cartridge cleaning valve (ten seconds at a
maximum).
• 4. Closes the cartridge cleaning valve. → Turns off the auto
cleaning pump.
IMPORTANT
• The output amount of the replenisher cartridge
cleaning pump is about 194 ml per ten seconds.
4 P1R agitation solenoid valve + Replenisher Cartridge Clicking Execute activates the P1R agitation solenoid valve +
Cleaning Pump Replenisher Cartridge Cleaning Pump. *1*3
• The system performs the following operations.
• 1. Turns on the auto cleaning pump.
• 2. Waits until the water pressure is adjusted (one second).
• 3. Opens the P1R agitation solenoid valve (three seconds at a
maximum).
• 4. Closes the P1R agitation solenoid valve. → Turns off the
auto cleaning pump.
IMPORTANT
• If the P1R agitation solenoid valve + Replenisher
Cartridge Cleaning Pump is activated, the initial value will
be used for the next opening.
• The output amount of the P1R agitation solenoid valve
+ Replenisher Cartridge Cleaning Pump is about 227
ml per three seconds.
5 P1 Auto Cleaning Valve + Replenisher Cartridge Clicking Execute activates the auto cleaning valve and auto
Cleaning Pump cleaning pump. *1*4
6 P2 Auto Cleaning Valve + Replenisher Cartridge • The system performs the following operations.
Cleaning Pump • 1. Turns on the auto cleaning pump.
7 PS Auto Cleaning Valve + Replenisher Cartridge • 2. Waits until the water pressure is adjusted (one second).
Cleaning Pump
• 3. Opens the auto cleaning valve (three seconds at a maximum).
• 4. Closes the auto cleaning valve. → Turns off the cleaning
pump.
*1. If any of the effluent float switches detects ON, the auto cleaning valve does not operate.
However, the auto cleaning pump operates regardless of the status of the effluent float switches. Therefore, if it continues operation with any of
the effluent float switches ON, it may be damaged.
*2. When Execute is clicked, the message Confirm whether to complete the air pulling out of the Cleaning Pump system piping. Operate the
Replenisher Cartridge Open Motor, prepare the cleaning water does not run into the replenishment tank from the nozzle to check. For
details, see the manual. Would you like to operate the Replenisher Cartridge Cleaning Pump? is shown.
35320 2/8
35320
Maintenance
*3. When Execute is clicked, Confirm whether to complete the air pulling out of the Cleaning Pump system piping. Cleaning water will be
run into the replenishing tank. Please refrain from draining for a long time. For details, refer to the manual. Would you like to operate
the Replenisher Cartridge Cleaning Pump? is shown.
*4. When Execute is clicked, Confirm whether to complete the air pulling out of the Cleaning Pump system piping. Cleaning water will be
run into the replenishing tank. Please refrain from draining for a long time. For details, refer to the manual. Would you like to operate
the Replenisher Cartridge Cleaning Pump? is shown.
*5. If the cleaning water gets into a tank, the amount of replenishment solution changes. Insert a hose into a cleaning nozzle and execute Output
Check without allowing any water to get in the tank.
When you insert a hose into the cleaning nozzle, we recommend you to operate Replenisher Cartridge Open Motor and move the replenishment
cartridge installation section to the lower position.
For details, see ☞ 27540.
*6. SP1: The menus marked with (SP1) can be selected only when the service personnel password (2260) has been entered.
! Dryer Section (common to all specifications)

No. Display Status
1 Dryer Fan Clicking Execute starts operation, and clicking Cancel stops
3. Mode
operation.
2 Dryer Heater 1 Clicking Execute starts operation, and clicking Cancel stops
operation.
operation.
operation.
5 Dryer selection solenoid 1 Clicking Execute activates it once.
6 Dryer selection solenoid 2 Clicking Execute activates it once.
! Order Classification Section (common to all specifications)

No. Display Status
1 Sorter Motor Clicking Execute activates it once.
2 Conveyor Motor
3 Manual Sorter Switch Lamp Clicking Execute turns it on, and clicking Cancel turns it off.
*1
4 Paper guide motor Clicking Execute activates it once.
5 Order Identification LED (Orange) Clicking Execute turns on the Order Identification LED (Orange).
6 Order Identification LED (Cyan) Clicking Execute turns on the Order Identification LED (Cyan).
*1. Shown only if the print sorter unit (10-inch type) is supported.
! Colorimeter Unit (common to all specifications)

No. Display Status
1 Paper Advance Motor Clicking Execute starts operation, and clicking Cancel stops
operation.
2 Calibration Plate Advance Motor
3 Pressure Change Solenoid
4 Colorimeter Cooling Fan
35320 3/8
35320
Maintenance
Output Check (Processor) [N]

For the specifications other than [N] specification, this section only gives description that differs from that for [N] specification. For other
Reference
☞ Output Check (Processor) [SM] ☞ Output Check (Processor) [J] ☞ Output Check (Processor) [F]
! Explanation
Checks the operation of currently selected motor, buzzer or LED.
! 1 [N]
3. Mode
No. Display Status
operation.
2 CD Heater
3 BF Heater
4 STB Heater
5 CD Cooling Water Solenoid Valve
6 BF Cooling Water Solenoid Valve
7 STB Cooling Water Solenoid Valve
8 CD Replenisher Pump
9 BF Replenisher Pump
10 STB Replenisher Pump
11 Tank Cooling Fan
12 Exhaust Fan
14 Processor Condition Lamp (Red)
15 Signal Lamp
operation.
! 2 [N]
No. Display Status
1 CD Replenisher Pump Clicking Execute starts operation, and clicking Cancel stops
operation.
2 BF Replenisher Pump
3 STB Replenisher Pump
4 CD-W Refilling Water Pump
5 BF-W Refilling Water Pump
6 STB 1-W Refilling Water Pump
10 Cleaning Pump
35320 4/8
35320
Maintenance
Output Check (Processor) [SM]

Reference
☞ Output Check (Processor) [N] ☞ Output Check (Processor) [J] ☞ Output Check (Processor) [F]
! 1 [SM]
No. Display Status
3. Mode
operation.
2 CD Heater Clicking Execute starts operation, and clicking Cancel stops
operation.
3 BF Heater Clicking Execute starts operation, and clicking Cancel stops
operation.
4 STB Heater Clicking Execute starts operation, and clicking Cancel stops
operation.
5 CD Cooling Water Solenoid Valve Clicking Execute starts operation, and clicking Cancel stops
operation.
6 BF Cooling Water Solenoid Valve Clicking Execute starts operation, and clicking Cancel stops
operation.
7 STB Cooling Water Solenoid Valve Clicking Execute starts operation, and clicking Cancel stops
operation.
8 Tank Cooling Fan Clicking Execute starts operation, and clicking Cancel stops
operation.
9 Exhaust Fan Clicking Execute starts operation, and clicking Cancel stops
operation.
11 Processor Condition Lamp (Red) Clicking Execute turns it on, and clicking Cancel turns it off.
operation.
! 2 [SM]
No. Display Status
1 CD-A Replenisher Pump Clicking Execute activates it once.
2 CD-B Replenisher Pump Clicking Execute activates it once.
3 CD-C Replenisher Pump Clicking Execute activates it once.
4 CD-W Water Supply Pump Clicking Execute activates it once.
5 BF-A Replenisher Pump Clicking Execute activates it once.
6 BF-B Replenisher Pump Clicking Execute activates it once.
7 BF-W Water Supply Pump Clicking Execute starts operation, and clicking Cancel stops
operation.
! 3 [SM]
No. Display Status
1 STB Replenisher Pump Clicking Execute activates it once.
35320 5/8
35320
Maintenance
No. Display Status

2 STB 1-W Refilling Water Pump Clicking Execute starts operation, and clicking Cancel stops
operation.
5 STB 4-W Water Supply Pump
6 Cleaning Pump
7 Circulation Pump Stand-by Clicking Execute starts operation, and clicking Cancel stops
operation.
3. Mode
35320 6/8
35320
Maintenance
Output Check (Processor) [J]

Reference
☞ Output Check (Processor) [N] ☞ Output Check (Processor) [SM] ☞ Output Check (Processor) [F]
! Processor Section 1[J]

No. Display Status
3. Mode
operation.
2 CD Heater Clicking Execute starts operation, and clicking Cancel stops
operation.
3 BF Heater Clicking Execute starts operation, and clicking Cancel stops
operation.
4 STB Heater Clicking Execute starts operation, and clicking Cancel stops
operation.
5 CD Cooling Water Solenoid Valve Clicking Execute starts operation, and clicking Cancel stops
operation.
6 BF Cooling Water Solenoid Valve Clicking Execute starts operation, and clicking Cancel stops
operation.
7 STB Cooling Water Solenoid Valve Clicking Execute starts operation, and clicking Cancel stops
operation.
8 Tank Cooling Fan Clicking Execute starts operation, and clicking Cancel stops
operation.
9 Exhaust Fan Clicking Execute starts operation, and clicking Cancel stops
operation.
11 Processor Condition Lamp (Red) Clicking Execute turns it on, and clicking Cancel turns it off.
operation.
! Processor Section 2[J]

No. Display Status
1 CD Water Supply Pump Clicking Execute starts operation, and clicking Cancel stops
operation.
2 S -> B Replenishment Pump Clicking Execute starts operation, and clicking Cancel stops
operation.
3 STB Water Supply Pump Clicking Execute starts operation, and clicking Cancel stops
operation.
4 Cleaning Pump Clicking Execute starts operation, and clicking Cancel stops
operation.
! Tablet Replenishment Section 1[J]

No. Display Status
1 CD Operation Lamp Clicking Execute starts operation, and clicking Cancel stops
operation.
35320 7/8
35320
Maintenance
No. Display Status

2 BF Operation Lamp Clicking Execute starts operation, and clicking Cancel stops
operation.
3 STB Operation Lamp Clicking Execute starts operation, and clicking Cancel stops
operation.
4 Elevator Motor (Up) Clicking Execute starts operation, and clicking Cancel stops
operation. It temporarily stops when the elevator middle sensor
detects it. After two seconds, it operates again, and stops when the
elevator upper sensor detects it.
5 Elevator Motor (Down) Clicking Execute starts operation, and clicking Cancel stops
operation. It stops operation when the elevator lower sensor detects
it.
6 STB Tablet Conveyor Motor Clicking Execute activates it once.
3. Mode
! Tablet Replenishment Section 2[J]
No. Display Status
1 CD Drum Motor (Forward) Clicking Execute activates it once.
2 CD Drum Motor (Reverse) Clicking Execute activates it once.
3 BF Drum Motor (Forward) Clicking Execute activates it once.
4 BF Drum Motor (Reverse) Clicking Execute activates it once.
5 STB Drum Motor (Forward) Clicking Execute activates it once.
6 STB Drum Motor (Reverse) Clicking Execute activates it once.
35320 8/8
35400
Maintenance
Reading and Writing Data

Maintenance: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Reading and Writing Data
Reading Data (Media -> CPU) Writing Data (CPU -> Media)
3. Mode
! Explanation
! Path Setting
Specify the media path to load or save data.
! Read all data./Write all data. (ALL)

Loaded or saved data are listed in the table below.
! Read INITIAL DATA 2./Write INITIAL DATA 2. (DATA2)

! Read INITIAL DATA 3./Write INITIAL DATA 3. (DATA3)

! Read individual data./Write individual data.

You can load or save data separately.
Backup data File name Remarks A D D

Item L A A
L T T
A A
2 3
Main*3 • PrinterIF.Izh*1 Printer I/F main PCB data # # -
• PrinterIF1.Izh*2 • Machine Specification information, Option setting information,
Setup data
Printer Printer.lzh Printer control PCB data # # -
• Mechanical Adjustment, Function and Option Registration
(Printer-related), Operator Selections (Printer-related), Setup data
Processor Proc.lzh Processor control PCB data # - #
• Processor adjustment data, Function and Option Registration
(Processor-related), Operator Selections (Processor-related), Timer
setting data
Colorimeter unit Color.lzh Colorimeter unit adjustment data # - #
35400 1/2
35400
Maintenance
Backup data File name Remarks A D D

Item L A A
L T T
A A
2 3
LASER*3 • Laser.Izh*1 Laser control PCB data # # -
• Laser1.Izh*2
The correction data for • LsrSHD_X.Izh*1 Correction data for brightness of the edge of image field of the laser # # -
light intensity of the • LsrSHD_X1.Izh*2 engine
surrounding area*3
*1. Backup file names for 37 series/LP7500/LP7600/LP7700/LP7900.
*2. Backup file names for 37HD series.
*3. Data obtained from 37 series models cannot be loaded on the 37HD series models.
Data obtained from 37HD series models cannot be loaded on the 37 series models.
Backup data of the printer, processor and colorimeter unit is compatible between the 37HD series models and 37 series models.
3. Mode
• ALL: Data to be saved or loaded when Writing All Data or Reading All Data is selected
• DATA2: Service data to be saved or loaded when INITIAL DATA2 is selected
• DATA3: Service data that is saved or loaded in INITIAL DATA3
! Data that will not be replaced by backup data

Basically, almost all data are replaced by backup data.
However, data below are not replaced.
Data that are not replaced

Data of total counter, daily totals counter, daily sales totals, remaining amount of paper, order number, archive number, total counter 2,
laser operation record*1, exposure adjustment, and serial number of colorimeter calibration plate
Machine Type Registration, Language, IP Address, Subnet mask, Default gateway, Serial Number (Printer/Processor), Date of
shipment, Communication Speed Setting, and MTU Size*2 of Machine Specification
Reservoir Count, Water Supply Reservoir Amount and Kit Remains (J specification only) of Counter
*1. The laser unit main body holds the Laser Operation Record data. Therefore, the data will not be replaced even when Read all data or Write all
data is selected.
*2. MTU Size is shown for 37HD series only.
! Data that cannot be saved

The following data cannot be saved using Reading and Writing Data. If replacing the HDD or PC main unit, be sure to back up the
following data beforehand.
Data name
Output Device Name in Output Device Registration
! Restrictions of usable storage media

" Use the storage media for available removable disks.
" CD-R/RW
Not available.
35400 2/2
35500
Maintenance
System Version Check

Maintenance: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → System Version Check
Accessories Profile Data
3. Mode
! Explanation
! Accessories
No. Display Explanation
1 2 3 4
5
*2
1 CPU Shows each control PCB (CPU) name.
2 Version (CPU) Shows the system program version held on each control PCB.
3 Version (PC)*1 Shows the system program version held on the HDD.
4 BOOT*1 Shows the CPU version of each control PCB.
5 F Shows the connecting conditions of the capacity booster.
• #.# # # F: When the Capacity booster PCB F is installed
• #.# # # FG: When the Capacity booster PCBs F and G are installed
• #.# # # H: When the Capacity booster PCB H is installed
• #.# # # I: When the Capacity booster PCB I is installed
• #.# # # J: When the Capacity booster PCB J is installed*3
• #.# # # FJ: When the Capacity booster PCBs F and J are installed*3
• #.# # # JG: When the Capacity booster PCBs J and G are installed*3
• #.# # # FJG: When the Capacity booster PCBs F, J and G are installed*3
• #.# # # : The capacity booster PCB is not installed.
*1. The menus marked with (SP1) are only shown when the service personnel password (2260) has been entered.
*2. Main shows the version of the maintenance application on the PC.
*3. Displayed only if the system is a stand-alone printer. (PRO specification models are sold outside Japan.)
35500 1/3
35500
Maintenance
$ Version (LASER)
You can confirm the type of the laser unit by checking the version name of LASER.
1 2 3 4 5
LASER 1.009 X1 HhB1 N OK

1 B
Hh B
3 I i
1 1.089 Shows the software version of the laser control PCB.

2 1 Shows the laser unit type.
• 1 : 300dpi*1
3. Mode
• 3 : 640dpi*2
3 H Shows the G laser driver type.
• H: G laser driver (J391231)
• I: G laser driver (J391160)
4 h Shows the laser unit type.
• h: Laser unit (Type HhB*1 ), (Type HhBA*2)
• i: Laser unit (Type IiB*1), (Type IiBA*2)
• #: Laser codes on the laser operation record PCB (inside the laser unit) have not been entered.
☞ 35700
5 B Shows that the R-AOM and B-AOM driver functions are installed in the laser unit.
• Example:
B: Laser unit (Type HhB) or Laser unit (Type IiB)
• #: Laser codes on the laser operation record PCB (inside the laser unit) have not been entered.
☞ 35700
*1. 37 series/LP7500/LP7600/LP7700/LP7900
*2. 37HD series
35500 2/3
35500
Maintenance
$ Communication
If the communication status of each control PCB is not normal, the versions of Version (CPU) and BOOT are not
shown normally.
• Depending on the ARCNET communication feature, Version (CPU) and BOOT on the System Version Check display may not be
able to decide if the ARCNET communication is working or not.
• In that case, the ARCNET communication status can be checked more correctly by using ARCNET Self-Diagnosis.
For details, see ☞ 35940.
Enter the System Version Check mode again to update the versions of Version (CPU) and BOOT.
3. Mode
! Profile Data (SP1)
The profile data version is shown.
35500 3/3
35600
Maintenance
System upgrade for each control PCB (CPU)

Maintenance: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Software Upgrade
3. Mode
M5330-00
IMPORTANT
• This section explains the procedure for updating the software of each control PCB.
• If an external PC supporting the Consumer Terminals or Printer Driver is connected, do not receive orders just before or
during software upgrading. Upgrading may not be performed normally.
! Explanation
! Software Upgrade
• Upgrades each control PCB (CPU) using system program data saved in the directory for software upgrade.
• You can upgrade each control PCB (CPU) separately.
1 2 3 4 5
1 Normal Termination Shown when the upgrade is completed normally.

Abnormal Termination Shown when the upgrade is not completed normally.
2 & Select the check box(es) to upgrade.
% Clear the check box(es) to not upgrade.
3 Printer I/F Main Shows each control PCB (CPU) name.
4 1.00*1 Shows the system program version held on each control PCB.
5 2.00*1 Shows the system program version held on the HDD.
*1. The whole system version may not be shown here.

Confirm the system version on the System Version Check display.
35600 1/2
35600
Maintenance
! Reference
! Control PCB (CPU), system file name, and software to be upgraded

When replacing each control PCB, select the check box of the corresponding software, then upgrade it.
Control PCB Software to be upgraded System file name Remarks

Processor control PCB Processor proc0_1.sys proc1_1.sys
Printer control PCB Printer supply0.sys supply1.sys
Laser control PCB LASER laser0.sys laser1.sys
Printer I/F main PCB Printer I/F main PCB printerif0.sys printerif1.sys
! The location of the system program

Software Upgrade (HD)
3. Mode
C:\Noritsukoki\QSS-32_33\Data\Sys
! Procedure for installing the system program
1. Exit the system program.
2. Insert the system program CD into the DVD drive and start Setup.exe in the CD-ROM.
3. When the InstallShield Wizard display is shown, click Next.
4. Installation starts.
5. Operations after installing the system program

LP7400, LP7500, LP7600
1. Select Select All on the Software Upgrade display, and upgrade each control PCB.
2. Perform Daily Setup from the Maintenance Application.
QSS-37
NOTE
• Because upgrading the printer is automatically performed, it is not necessary to upgrade on the Software Upgrade
display.
• If upgrading profile, perform the Daily Setup from the Maintenance Application. Otherwise, the message
☞ No. 01756 Printer profile versions are inconsistent. is shown.
35600 2/2
35700
Maintenance
Operation Information

Maintenance: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Operation Information
Operation Information Laser Operation Record
3. Mode
! Explanation
Operation Information
Item Explanation
Error Record For details, see the EZ Controller Service Manual.
Daily Setup History Shows the daily setup history from the latest one.
Data of the past seven setups are shown. If the number of data exceeds seven, the oldest one will be
deleted.
Laser Operation Record

Item Explanation
Laser Operation Record Allows you to confirm operation records of laser-related parts.
IMPORTANT
• The laser operation record PCB holds the data of the Serial Number, Laser Generation
Accumulated Time, Laser Generation Count, Polygon Mirror Total Operation Time and
Polygon Mirror Operation Count.
The data listed above are not replaced even when All Data is loaded to the system
using the Reading and Writing Data mode.
• The data listed above can be held up to five.
Laser Unit Serial Number Shows the serial number of the laser unit.
Laser component information Shows the laser code held on the laser operation record PCB (in the laser unit).
Do not change the laser code, or an error may occur.
Serial Number Shows the serial number of the system in which the laser unit is installed.
NOTE
• The serial number registered in the Machine Specification is shown here.
The laser unit holds the serial number data.
Laser Generation Accumulated Shows the total lighting time of the R, G and B lasers.
Time
Laser Generation Count Shows the operation counts of the R, G and B lasers.
Polygon Mirror Total Operation Shows the polygon mirror operation time.
Time
Polygon Mirror Operation Count Shows the polygon mirror operation count.
35700 1/1
35800
Maintenance
Machine Specification
! Display
Maintenance: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Machine Specification
Machine Specification (1) Machine Specification (2)
3. Mode
! Explanation
Item Explanation
Software information Shows the Software information obtained from the output device.
Machine Type Registration Shows the printer model name to register.
• Follow the procedure below to perform Machine Type Registration.
1. On the System Version Check display, check the type of capacity booster attached.
☞ 35500
2. Check ☞ Machine type registration list, and register.
IP Address Shows the IP Address of the printer.
Subnet mask Shows the Subnet mask of the printer (printer I/F main PCB).
Default gateway Shows the Default gateway obtained from the output device.
Serial Number (Printer Section) The Serial Number of the printer can be registered or checked.
At the installation, enter the production number.
Serial Number (Paper Processor The Serial Number of the processor can be registered or checked.
Section) At the installation, enter the production number.
Process Specification (Input Select the process specification for the system.
range: 0 to 80)
Processing Solution Display Select the processing solutions corresponding to the process specification.
Installation Date The installation date of the system can be configured or confirmed.
Date of operation Shows the operating day of the system obtained from the output device. You can also change the
settings.
Power Supply Specification Allows you to confirm the power supply specification of the system.
Language Select a language to be used for software screens.
35800 1/3
35800
Maintenance
Item Explanation
Unit Language Allows you to select a language other than Japanese and English to be used for the display module.
However, this is not shown if the message file is not installed on the PC.
• Save the language file to the following folder.
QSS-37
• C:\NoritsuKoki\Printer\QSS-Printer\data
LP7500/LP7600/LP7700/LP7900
• D:\Noritsukoki\Printer\FRONTIER-Printer\data
Type Shows the display module type.
QSS-37
• TYPE1
LP7500/LP7600/LP7700/LP7900
• TYPE2
3. Mode
Date of shipment Shows the shipping date of the output device obtained from the output device.
Communication Speed Setting Allows you to select the communication speed from the following.
Usually, select AUTO.
1. AUTO
2. Fixed to 100 Mbps HALF
3. Fixed to 100 Mbps FULL
Current communication speed*1 Shows the current communication speed.
MTU Size*2 The value that stands for the maximum value of a data transferred in one time over communication
network can be configured.
If the sending host has MTU that is larger than that of the receiving host, the sending host divides data
to send in accordance with the MTU on the receiving host. On the stable connection environment with
less control signal, the larger the MTU value is, the more the transfer speed increases.
• If the PC (prepared by the customer) is equivalent to the super high capacity PC (PC-NRT-RS20),
select 8000.
If the HUB is connected, the HUB should support 1000Base and jumbo frame 8kbyte or more.
• If the PC (prepared by the customer) is equivalent to the generic PC (PC-NRT-RS13) or high-spec
PC (PC-NRT-RS14), select 1500.
If the HUB is connected, it should support 1000Base.
Decide MTU Size following the procedure below.
1. Select the value from 1500 to 8000 for MTU Size of Machine Specification.
2. In Data path check of Network Self-Diagnostic, click Execute. Take note of # # Mbps shown for
Communication speed. ☞ 35955
NOTE
• Change CRC check from & → % when performing Data path check. The time required for
calculating Communication speed will be reduced.
3. Select the value between 1500 to 8000 for the MTU Size setting following the same procedure. Set
MTU Size with which the Communication speed becomes maximum when Data path check is
performed.
NOTE
• If using the super high capacity PC (PC-NRT-RS20), the value around 200 Mbps is shown if
Data Path Check is performed.
• If using the generic PC (PC-NRT-RS13) or high-spec PC (PC-NRT-RS14), the value around
120 Mbps is shown if Data Path Check is performed.
Circulation Pump Stand-by Allows you to configure settings of the Circulation Pump Stand-by function.
Function (only for SM)
SM Replenishment Setting Allows you to select whether to perform forced replenishment.
(only for SM)
35800 2/3
35800
Maintenance
*1. If the current communication speed does not apply to any of the following, nothing is shown.
Current communication speed

100 Mbps HALF 100 Mbps FULL 100 Mbps FULL (Auto negotiation failed)
100 Mbps HALF (AutoNego) 100 Mbps FULL (AutoNego) 10 Mbps HALF (AutoNego)
10 Mbps FULL (AutoNego) 1000 Mbps Full(AutoNego)
*2. This is displayed only for 37HD series [640dpi].

MTU Size can be selected from the table below.
MTU Size
1500 4000 5000 6000 7000 8000
! Machine type registration list
3. Mode
Capacity booster Model Machine Type Machine Type
Registration(QSS) Registration(FRO
NTIER)
− With no capacity booster QSS-3701 QSS-3701 −
QSS-3701 HD QSS-3701 HD
Only capacity booster F QSS-3702 QSS-3702
F QSS-3702HD QSS-3702HD
LP7500 − LP7500
Capacity boosters F and G QSS-3703 QSS-3703 −
QSS-3703 HD QSS-3703 HD
F G
LP7600 − LP7600
Capacity booster J only QSS-3702 PRO QSS-3702 PRO −
J QSS-3702 PRO HD QSS-3702 PRO HD
Capacity boosters F and J QSS-3702 QSS-3702
F J QSS-3702HD QSS-3702HD
Capacity boosters J and G QSS-3703 PRO QSS-3703 PRO

J G QSS-3703 PRO HD QSS-3703 PRO HD
Capacity boosters F, J and G QSS-3703 QSS-3703

F J G QSS-3703 HD QSS-3703 HD
Capacity booster H only QSS-3704 QSS-3704

H QSS-3704HD QSS-3704HD
LP7700 − LP7700
Capacity booster I only QSS-3705 QSS-3705 −
I QSS-3705 HD QSS-3705 HD
LP7900 − LP7900
! Functions
! Program Timer Setting

The Program Timer Setting display is shown.
At the installation, configure the date/time and program timer settings.
35800 3/3
35810
Maintenance
Laser parts replacement check mode
! Display
Maintenance: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Laser parts replacement check mode
Replacement part
3. Mode
M5417-00
37 series/LP7500/LP7600/LP7700/LP7900 37HD series
NOTE
• Laser parts replacement check mode is supported by FRONTIER-Printer Ver. 2.20 or later, and QSS-Printer Ver. 7.00 or later.
! Explanation
• After replacing the Laser unit, Laser Control PCB or AOM driver, check the boxes for the replaced parts on the Laser parts
replacement check mode display and click Next. Each adjustment mode necessary after replacing the parts is shown.
Perform the adjustments in order shown on the display. Clicking each adjustment item shifts to the adjustment mode. After
performing the adjustment, click Cancel to return to the Laser parts replacement check mode display.
• # shows that the part is replaced. − is not supported.

• " shows adjustment items that are necessary after the replacement. − is not supported.
35810 1/2
35810
Maintenance
Replacement part/adjustment item Combination table (37 Combination table (37HD series)
series/LP7500/LP7600/LP7700/LP79
00)
Laser unit # # # # - - - # # # # - - -
Laser Control PCB # # - - # # - # # - - # # -
AOM driver # - # - # - # # - # - # - #
1 Software Upgrade " " - - " " - " " - - " " -
*1
2 Exposure Offset Adjustment - - - - - - - " " " " " " -
3 Exposure Magnification Correction " " " " - - - " " " " - - -
4 Exposure Position Adjustment " " " " - - - " " " " - - -
5 Exposure Magnification Fine Adjustment " " " " - - - " " " " - - -
6 Exposure Position Adjustment " " " " - - - " " " " - - -
7 Exposure Center Correction " " " " - - - " " " " - - -
3. Mode
8 Exposure Advance Adjustment " " " " - - - " " " " - - -
9 Initial Setup " " " " - - - " " " " - - -
10 Paper Specification Registration/Setup " " " " - - - " " " " - - -
11 Magazine Registration/Setup " " " " - - - " " " " - - -
12 Exposure Adjustment*2 " " " " - - - - - - - - - -
13 Daily Setup - - - - " " " - - - - " " "
14 Black Balance Adjustment - - - - " " " - - - - " " "
15 Writing Data (CPU -> Media) " " " " " " " " " " " " " "
*1. This is shown only for 37HD series [640dpi].

*2. This is shown for 37 series/LP7500/LP7600/LP7700/LP7900[300dpi] only.
NOTE
• After the adjustment is completed and the Laser parts replacement check mode display is shown again by clicking Cancel, the
completed adjustment item is shown in white.
M5417-02
35810 2/2
35920
Self-diagnostic
Self-diagnostic
Image Path Check

Maintenance: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Self-diagnostic → Image Path Check
Display Display
3. Mode
Failure parts are shown here.
! Explanation
Item Explanation
Image Path Check Transfers data in each data path to determine failure parts by the CRC check or data comparison.
NOTE
• For details about Film Series Image Path, see the Scanner Service Manual.
Test Print Confirm this item if scanned images are normally saved to media, but abnormal prints are made.
NOTE
• Also check this in the following conditions.
• Lines and noises appear on prints.
• Color of prints is not good. (Black or white color is not reproduced well, etc.)
• Color of prints becomes worse after the setup is performed.
• Color of prints is not improved after the setup is performed.
Test Print Image selection Select For Laser Confirmation or the required image file.
NOTE
• Available files are 24-bit BMP and 32-bit BMP files only.
Paper Magazine for Test Print Select a magazine to make a test print.
Test Print Advance Length Specify the paper advance length to make a test print.
Execution Time Shows the expected time for the diagnostics.
Start testing Clicking Start Test shows a dialog box for the Image Path Check. Click YES to start the
diagnostics.
Test Print Check Result Check the test print quality, and select Good or No Good. Then, the result is shown.
Save Result Allows you to save the result of Image Path Check as a file.
IMPORTANT
• The test result file, C:\NoritsuKoki\QSS-##\LogData\DiagLogImgPass.Log is saved
in the location below.
QSS-37
• C:\NoritsuKoki\Printer\QSS-Printer\ [Serial number folder of the output system] \Log
LP7500/LP7600/LP7700/LP7900
• D:\NoritsuKoki\Printer\FRONTIER-Printer\ [Serial number folder of the output system]
\Log
• Only one result file can be held in the folder.
35920 1/2
35920
Self-diagnostic
Item Explanation
Clear Result Deletes the result of Image Path Check.
Result Shows the result of the Image Path Check.
! Checking procedure
1. Select an image to produce a test print in the Test Print Image selection field.
2. Clicking Start Test shows a dialog box for the Image Path Check. Then, click YES.
3. The message Select the appropriate result of the Test Print. is shown. select Good or No Good to
display the diagnostic outcome.
NOTE
• The symbol, ← indicates it is the same as the left column.
• The symbol, − means it is unused.
3. Mode
Diagnostic Contents
Printer I/F main PCB
Laser control PCB
35920 2/2
35930
Self-diagnostic
Printer I/F Main PCB Self-Diagnostic

Maintenance: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Self-diagnostic → Printer I/F Main PCB Self-Diagnostic
Display Display
3. Mode
NOTE
• Printer I/F Main PCB Self-Diagnostic is supported by FRONTIER-Printer Ver. 2.0 or later, and QSS-Printer Ver. 3.0 or later.
! Explanation
Printer I/F Main PCB Self-Diagnostic is a function that the system self-diagnoses each IC mounted on the Printer I/F Main PCB and
checks whether Printer I/F Main PCB has problems.
• Printer I/F Main PCB Self-Diagnostic does not function normally in the conditions below.
1. The PC and Printer I/F Main PCB cannot communicate over the LAN.
2. +5 V is not supplied to the Printer I/F Main PCB. (The Printer I/F Main PCB does not operate normally.)
NOTE
• If the Printer I/F Main PCB is normal, and connection failure occurs in the LVPECL connectors of the Printer I/F Main PCB and
laser control PCB, OK is shown.
1. Click Execute.
2. The system diagnoses the Printer I/F Main PCB condition, and the result is shown a few minutes later.
If the Printer I/F Main PCB is normal If the Printer I/F Main PCB has problems
(1) (1) (2)
3. Diagnosis result is shown.

Diagnosis 1
• If the Printer I/F Main PCB is normal, OK is shown.
• If the Printer I/F Main PCB has problems, No Good is shown.
If No Good is shown, replace the Printer I/F Main PCB.
Diagnosis 2
35930 1/2
35930
Self-diagnostic
• If the Printer I/F Main PCB has problems, 1 or a number from 3 to 255 is shown in the right of No Good.
IMPORTANT
• Regardless of the number shown in the right of No Good, replace the Printer I/F Main PCB.
3. Mode
35930 2/2
35940
Self-diagnostic
ARCNET Self-Diagnostic (details of modes)
See the following additional references for diagnosis.
Model Reference Model Reference

ARCNET Self-Diagnostic (diagnosis) ☞ 35941 ARCNET Self-Diagnostic (results) ☞ 35942
Maintenance: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Self-diagnostic → ARCNET Self-Diagnostic
Display
3. Mode
NOTE
• ARCNET Self-Diagnostic is supported by FRONTIER-Printer Ver. 2.0 or later, and QSS-Printer Ver. 3.0 or later.
! Explanation
" Confirming connection of each ARCNET PCB
The self-diagnosis program checks the communication state of each ARCNET PCB, and displays the diagnosis on the ARCNET
Self-Diagnostic screen if it detects any ARCNET PCBs that may have a communication error.
• ARCNET Self-Diagnostic may not function normally in the conditions below.
1. The PC and Printer I/F Main PCB cannot communicate over the LAN.
2. A communication error occurred on a PCB equipped with the HUB function.
! Screen explanation 1
G085407
Explanation
Execute Press this to start ARCNET Self-Diagnostic.
Cancel Press this to stop ARCNET Self-Diagnostic.
NOTE
• While the system is performing ARCNET Self-Diagnostic, the Execute button changes to Cancel.
Cancel Press this to end ARCNET Self-Diagnostic.
35940 1/3
35940
Self-diagnostic
Explanation
Dev. Name Displays the name of the ARCNET PCB.
NID Displays the node ID of the ARCNET PCB.
• Node ID: Node means an ARCNET PCB. A Node ID is an ID assigned to each PCB.
Connect Indicates the state of connection.
• ∗( 0): communication status of the ARCNET PCB is normal
• Blank, ∗ ( not 0): communication status of the ARCNET PCB is abnormal
NOTE
• If a node ID is detected even once by ARCNET Self-Diagnostic, a ∗ is displayed.
• The number within the parentheses () indicates the number of times that the detected node ID later turned
undetected.
TX Err Displays the number of transmission errors that occurred during communication with the ARCNET PCB by ARCNET
Self-Diagnostic.
3. Mode
• 0: communication status of the ARCNET PCB is normal
• not 0: communication status of the ARCNET PCB is abnormal
• N/A: communication status of the ARCNET PCB is abnormal (has never succeeded in communicating with other
PCBs)
NOTE
• For Printer I/F Main PCB only, N/A is displayed regardless of the communication status of the ARCNET
PCB (whether it is normal or abnormal).
Error/Count Displays the number of error detections/total checks by ARCNET Self-Diagnostic
1 3
1. OK: communication status of the ARCNET PCB is normal

2. −: communication status of the ARCNET PCB is abnormal
3. When ARCNET communication is normal: the value of the number increases by 10.
When ARCNET communication is abnormal: the value of the number decreases by 1.
IMPORTANT
• Due to a characteristic of ARCNET, if − (abnormal) is displayed, it does not necessarily mean that
the ARCNET PCB itself is abnormal.
• Confirm ARCNET cable connection, cable cutting, and cleaning of inside the connector.
See ☞ 68100.
RCN Displays the number of reconfig detections by ARCNET Self-Diagnostic.
PCBs)
NOTE
• reconfig: other ARCNET PCB is connected/disconnected
MYRCN Displays the number of myreconfig detections by ARCNET Self-Diagnostic.
PCBs)
NOTE
• myreconfig: the target ARCNET PCB is connected/disconnected
35940 2/3
35940
Self-diagnostic
Explanation
Exist Displays the status of the ARCNET PCB detection.
• ∗: communication status of the ARCNET PCB is normal
• Blank: communication status of the ARCNET PCB is abnormal
! Screen explanation 2
Item Explanation
Unknown Background color that indicates detection of a nonexistent ARCNET PCB.
3. Mode
Node*1
Node Change Background color that indicates a change in the state of connection of the ARCNET PCB.
NOTE
• The background color turns yellow when the ARCNET PCB communication state that is detected at Exist
changes.
Error Dev. Indicates the ARCNET PCB that is causing the errors in each ARCNET PCB.
Error Cause Indicates cause of error occured in each ARCNET PCB.
Endless Selecting this will continue performing ARCNET Self-Diagnostic without time restriction.
Minute Specifies diagnosis period (minutes).
• If Endless is selected, this setting cannot be configured.
*1. Unknown Node is supported by FRONTIER-Printer with Ver. 2.10 or later, and QSS-Printer with Ver. 5.0 or later.
35940 3/3
35941
Self-diagnostic
ARCNET Self-Diagnostic (diagnosis)

ARCNET Self-Diagnostic (details of modes) ☞ 35940 ARCNET Self-Diagnostic (results) ☞ 35942
Display
3. Mode
1. Select the ARCNET Self-Diagnostic mode.

Maintenance: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Self-diagnostic → ARCNET Self-Diagnostic
IMPORTANT
• If you select the ARCNET Self-Diagnostic mode while communication status of the ARCNET PCB is not
normal or during an occurrence of ☞ No. 06901ARCNET communication error., the following may occur.
1. After you click a mode button, nothing may be shown, as in ☞ Screen 1, for approximately ten seconds. Wait until
the screen is displayed.
2. After you click a mode button, the selected mode button may remain gray for approximately ten seconds, as in
☞ Screen 2. Wait until the next screen is displayed.
Screen 1 Screen 2
35941 1/5
35941
Self-diagnostic
2. Click Execute on the ARCNET Self-Diagnostic display.

NOTE
• Set Minute to the default value of 1 on the ARCNET Self-Diagnostic program then click Execute to confirm the system's
communication status.
3. The ARCNET Self-Diagnostic program diagnoses the failed part then shows the result.
Confirm the displayed message and the ARCNET Self-Diagnostic display to diagnose the following.
Diagnosis
☞ If an error occurred in one PCB ☞ If an error occurred in more than one PCB (1)
☞ If an error occurred in more than one PCB (2) ☞ Narrowing down the failure location if the failure location
cannot be determined
If an error occurred in one PCB

Display
3. Mode
Confirm the connections.
Processor Printer control PCB Laser control

control PCB J/P222 PCB
J/P224 J/P221
J/P219
J/P223 J/P220 J/P1516 J/P1517
J/P518 J/P517
ARCNET ARCNET
J/P1208 J/P1207

Cables connecting Processor control PCB ⇔ Printer control PCB
Diagnosis example
1. It can be assumed that the cause of the error lies between the PCB in which an error has occurred (Processor control PCB) and the
PCB that transmits signal to that PCB (Printer control PCB).
2. Confirm the state of connection of cables connecting the printer control PCB to the processor control PCB.
IMPORTANT
• Confirm ARCNET cable connection, cable cutting and cleaning of inside the connector on both the printer control
PCB and the processor control PCB sides.
• For details about ARCNET cable cutting and cleaning of inside the ARCNET connector, see ☞ 68100.
3. Perform ARCNET Self-Diagnostic again.

4. Confirm the connection status of the connector between the printer control PCB and the processor control PCB, then, if no
problem is found, replace the processor control PCB.
35941 2/5
35941
Self-diagnostic
If an error occurred in more than one PCB (1)

Display

J/P224 J/P221
J/P219
J/P223 J/P220 J/P1516 J/P1517
J/P518 J/P517
ARCNET ARCNET
J/P1208 J/P1207
3. Mode
Disconnect two cables that are connecting Processor control PCB ⇔
Printer control PCB
Diagnosis example (If an error occurred in more than one PCB (1)
1. Disconnect two cables that are connecting between the processor control PCB and the printer control PCB.

If an error only occurs in the processor control PCB but not in others
1. It can be assumed that the cause lies in the connection status of the cables between the processor control PCB and the printer
control PCB.
2. Confirm the connection status of cables connecting the printer control PCB to the processor control PCB. ☞ 68100
3. Confirm the connection status of the connector between the printer control PCB and the processor control PCB, then, if no
problem is found, replace the processor control PCB.
If an error occurs not only in the processor control PCB but also in others
1. Disconnect the two cables connecting the printer control PCB and laser control PCB.
3. If an error occurs only in the printer control PCB and the laser control PCB, it can be assumed that the cause lies in the
connection status of the cables between the printer control PCB and the laser control PCB.
4. Confirm the connection status of the connector between the printer control PCB and the laser control PCB, then, if no
problem is found, replace the laser control PCB. ☞ 68100
If an error occurs not only in the processor control PCB or laser control PCB but also in others
1. It can be assumed that the cause lies in the connection status of the cables between the printer control PCB and the Printer I/F
Main PCB.
2. Confirm the connection status of the connector between the printer control PCB and the Printer I/F Main PCB, then, if no
problem is found, replace the printer control PCB or the Printer I/F Main PCB.
IMPORTANT
35941 3/5
35941
Self-diagnostic
If an error occurred in more than one PCB (2)

Communication errors occur. Additionally prepared ARCNET cables are connected.
3. Mode
Connection of normal ARCNET cables Connection of additionally prepared ARCNET cables
Connect additionally prepared cables.
Processor Printer control PCB Laser control Processor Printer control PCB Laser control
control PCB J/P222 PCB control PCB J/P222
J/P224 J/P221 J/P224 J/P221 PCB
J/P219 J/P219
J/P223 J/P220 J/P1516 J/P1517 J/P223
J/P518 J/P517 J/P518 J/P517 J/P220 J/P1516 J/P1517
ARCNET ARCNET ARCNET Disconnect the

J/P1208 J/P1207 J/P1208 J/P1207
Disconnect the cable.
Disconnect the cables. cable.
Printer I/F main PCB Printer I/F main PCB
Diagnosis example: (Determining the failure location using the ARCNET cable)
1. Connect an additional ARCNET cable to the Printer I/F Main PCB to connect it directly to the processor control PCB, then
execute the ARCNET Self-Diagnostic program again.
If an error does not occur either in the processor control PCB or Printer I/F Main PCB
It can be judged that both the processor control PCB and the Printer I/F Main PCB are normal.
NOTE
• An error occurs in the laser control PCB and in the printer control PCB.
• Use the same method to confirm the laser control PCB or the printer control PCB to narrow down the failure location.
If an error occurs in the processor control PCB and Printer I/F Main PCB
It can be judged that the cause of failure lies in the processor control PCB or in the Printer I/F Main PCB.
1. Connect an additional ARCNET cable to the Printer I/F Main PCB to connect it directly to the printer control PCB, then
execute the ARCNET Self-Diagnostic program again.
If an error does not occur either in the printer control PCB or in the Printer I/F Main PCB
It can be judged that the cause of failure lies in the printer control PCB.
Confirm the connection status of the connector of the printer control PCB, then, if no problem is found, replace the printer
control PCB. ☞ 68100
If an error occurs in the printer control PCB and the Printer I/F Main PCB
It can be judged that the cause of failure lies in the Printer I/F Main PCB.
Confirm the connection status of the connector of the Printer I/F Main PCB, then, if no problem is found, replace the Printer
I/F Main PCB.
IMPORTANT
35941 4/5
35941
Self-diagnostic
Narrowing down the failure location if the failure location cannot be determined
Communication errors occur. Processor control PCB cables are disconnected.
3. Mode
J/P224 J/P221
J/P219
J/P223 J/P220 J/P1516 J/P1517
J/P518 J/P517
ARCNET ARCNET
J/P1208 J/P1207

Disconnect two cables that are connecting Processor control PCB ⇔ Printer control PCB
Diagnosis example (values of RCN and MYRCN on the Printer I/F Main PCB increase)
1. Disconnect two cables that are connecting between the processor control PCB and the printer control PCB.
2. Perform ARCNET Self-Diagnostic again to confirm that the values of RCN and MYRCN increase.
If the values of RCN and MYRCN do not increase
1. It can be assumed that the cause lies in the connection status of the cables between the processor control PCB and the printer
control PCB.
2. Confirm the connection status of the connector between the processor control PCB and the printer control PCB, then, if no
problem is found, replace the processor control PCB. ☞ 68100
If the values of RCN and MYRCN increase
1. With the two cables between the processor control PCB and the printer control PCB disconnected, disconnect also the two
cables between the laser control PCB and the printer control PCB.
If the values of RCN and MYRCN do not increase
1. It can be assumed that the cause lies in the connection status of the cables between the printer control PCB and the laser
control PCB.
2. Confirm the connection status of the connector between the printer control PCB and the laser control PCB, then, if no
problem is found, replace the laser control PCB. ☞ 68100
If the values of RCN and MYRCN increase
1. It can be assumed that the cause lies in the connection status of the cables between the printer control PCB and the Printer I/F
Main PCB.
2. Confirm the connection status of the connector between the printer control PCB and the Printer I/F Main PCB, then, if no
problem is found, replace the printer control PCB or the Printer I/F Main PCB.
IMPORTANT
35941 5/5
35942
Self-diagnostic
ARCNET Self-Diagnostic (results)

ARCNET Self-Diagnostic (diagnosis) ☞ 35941 ARCNET Self-Diagnostic (details of modes) ☞ 35940
The diagnosis list shows the results of disconnecting ARCNET cables one by one and performing ARCNET Self-Diagnostic for 1 minute.
After performing ARCNET Self-Diagnostic, find an ARCNET Self-Diagnostic display of the same pattern, then determine the faulty
part.
IMPORTANT
• The state of the ARCNET Self-Diagnostic display shown in the manual may vary depending on the system's
communication state.
! ARCNET cable connection
3. Mode
Order of the ARCNET communication
1 Processor control PCB ARCNET (Connector emission side)
2 Printer control PCB ARCNET (Connector detection side)
3 Laser control PCB
Processor control PCB Printer control PCB Laser control PCB
J/P224 J/P221 J/P222

J/P219
J/P223 J/P220 J/P1516 J/P1517
J/P518 J/P517
ARCNET
J/P1208 J/P1207
ARCNET
ATX MOTHER
Printer I/F main PCB LAN BORD
G085411
ARCNET Self-Diagnostic result list

• ☞ Printer control PCB - Printer I/F main PCB
• ☞ Printer control PCB - Processor control PCB
• ☞ Printer control PCB - Laser control PCB
! Printer control PCB - Printer I/F main PCB

Printer control PCB (black) ⇔ Printer I/F main PCB (white) Printer control PCB (white) ⇔ Printer I/F main PCB (black)
35942 1/2
35942
Self-diagnostic
! Printer control PCB - Processor control PCB

Printer control PCB (black) ⇔ Processor control PCB (white) Printer control PCB (white) ⇔ Processor control PCB (black)
3. Mode
! Printer control PCB - Laser control PCB
Printer control PCB (black) ⇔ Laser control PCB (white) Printer control PCB (white) ⇔ Laser control PCB (black)
35942 2/2
35950
Self-diagnostic
Laser Self-Diagnostic (details of modes)

Laser Self-Diagnostic (AUTO) ☞ 35951 Laser Self-Diagnostic (diagnosis: MANUAL) ☞ 35952
Laser Self-Diagnostic (starting/exiting) ☞ 35953
Maintenance: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Self-diagnostic → Laser Self-Diagnostic
! FRONTIER-Printer: Ver. 2.01 or earlier, QSS-Printer: Ver. 4.01 or earlier

Laser Self-Diagnostic (AUTO) Laser Self-Diagnostic (MANUAL)*1
3. Mode
! FRONTIER-Printer: Ver. 2.10 or later, QSS-Printer: Ver. 5.0 or later
Laser Self-Diagnostic (AUTO) Laser Self-Diagnostic (MANUAL)*1
*1. The Laser Self-Diagnostic (MANUAL) display is the same regardless of the program version.
NOTE
• Laser Self-Diagnostic is supported by FRONTIER-Printer Ver. 2.0 or later, and QSS-Printer Ver. 3.0 or later.
• The Laser Self-Diagnostic of FRONTIER-Printer Ver. 2.01 or earlier, and QSS-Printer Ver. 4.01 or earlier has the problems
shown below.
The problems have been resolved in FRONTIER-Printer Ver. 2.10 or later, and QSS-Printer Ver. 5.0 or later.
• If Laser Self-Diagnostic is performed while the lasers are asynchronous, the message Failed. is shown.
35950 1/4
35950
Self-diagnostic
• The diagnosis result is not shown normally.
! Explanation (Laser Self-Diagnostic)

" Even though there are various types of laser-related problems, Laser Self-Diagnostic is not effective for all problems.
The following are the problems for which Laser Self-Diagnostic is and is not effective.
Problems for which Laser Self-Diagnostic is effective
• ☞ No. 06073: Synchronous Sensor error. occurs.
• ☞ No. 06076: Polygon Mirror control error. occurs.
• ☞ No. 06106: G Laser light source status error. occurs.
Problems for which Laser Self-Diagnostic is ineffective
• Color of prints fluctuates (light intensity fluctuation).
• Prints are made with noise.
3. Mode
• Laser temperatures are not adjusted normally.
IMPORTANT
• The Laser Self-Diagnostic can perform the same synchronous detection as for printing.
To use this function, the laser unit is required to be in the ready condition for printing. Therefore, the temperature of
the laser unit must be adjusted.
If replacing the laser unit and checking it using Laser Self-Diagnostic, a waiting time is required until the laser
temperature is adjusted.
! AUTO
Explanation
Light Source Status (R) Checks the light source status of the R and B lasers, and shows the result, OK or No Good.
Light Source Status (B) • OK: The laser is operating normally.
• No Good: The laser is not operating normally.
Graph (R) Shows the measured values of PD voltage and LD current for the R and B lasers as graphs.
Graph (B) • For details, see ☞ Direct modulation of the R and B lasers 35950.
Synchronization The Laser Self-Diagnostic program automatically calculates and shows a value for stable detection of laser
detection value (power) lights R, G and B.
Asynchronous point If lasers R, G and B are output with the maximum light intensity but the synchronous sensor does not detect
Synchronous Detection lasers, No Good is shown.
Setting Value
35950 2/4
35950
Self-diagnostic
Explanation
Synchronization Shows the synchronization frequency 20 seconds after the polygon mirror is turned on.
frequency If the value of the Synchronization frequency is out of the following range because the synchronous sensor
could not detect laser lights R, G or B, the value of the frequency is judged to be abnormal.
• 37 series/LP7500/LP7600/LP7700/LP7900 [300dpi]: 2043±7Hz
• 37HD series [640dpi]: 2180±7Hz
• QSS-35 PLUS series/LP7100/LP7200/LP7000: 1380±7Hz
NOTE
• If ☞ No. 06076-00002 Polygon Mirror control error. occurs, the light intensity has decreased.
• If the B and R lasers have any problem, No Good is shown for Synchronous Detection Setting Value
(R), Synchronous Detection Setting Value (B), Light Source Status (R) and Light Source Status (B).
Polygon mirror (Locked) Confirms if the polygon mirror lock signal is detected within 20 seconds after the polygon mirror is turned on.
If the rotation of the polygon mirror is stabilized but the signal transmitted from the polygon mirror driver
PCB (lock signal) does not reach the laser control PCB, No Good is shown for Polygon mirror (Locked).
3. Mode
NOTE
• If ☞ No. 06076-00001 Polygon Mirror control error. occurs, the rotation of the polygon mirror is
unstable or it stops.
• If the rotation of the polygon mirror stops, No Good is also shown for the following: Synchronous
Detection Setting Value (R), Synchronous Detection Setting Value (G), Synchronous Detection
Setting Value (B), Light Source Status (R) and Light Source Status (B).
• OK: The polygon mirror rotation is stable.
• No Good: The polygon mirror rotation is unstable.
! MANUAL
Explanation
Number of synchronous Configure how many times the synchronous detection check is performed for each R, G and B.
detection supervisory • Input range: 1000 to 60000 (initial value: 1000)
• Time required: 60 seconds to 60 minutes
IMPORTANT
• Entering larger value increases the number of synchronous detections. Then, longer time is
required.
For example, if synchronicity is detected less frequently, increase the value to check for a long
time.
If the symptom appears before the diagnosis is performed, 1000 times is enough.
Synchronous detection Allows you to specify the laser power (light intensity) at synchronous detection for each R, G and B.
power • Input range: from 1 to 100 (initial value: 100)
• Start diagnosing with the value set to 100.
• If no problem is detected, gradually reduce the R, G and B values to detect problems.
IMPORTANT
• Normal synchronous detection, such as when printing, is performed with the power at 100%.
Decreasing this value reduces the light intensity, and no laser light is output with the lowest
value, 1%.
Therefore, there is a point between 100 and 1% at which the synchronicity cannot be detected
(asynchronous point). Asynchronous point tends to become larger with less light intensity and
smaller with more light intensity.
For example, the asynchronous point is at 100% for a system with little laser light output and
with high occurrence frequency of No. 6073: Synchronous Sensor error., 70% for a system
with lower laser light and with low occurrence frequency of No. 6073: Synchronous Sensor
error., 20% for a system with correct laser light intensity.
Number of failed Shows the number of failed synchronous detections for each of R, G and B.
synchronous detection The number of failed synchronous detections is updated when the synchronous detection finishes.
35950 3/4
35950
Self-diagnostic
! Common to AUTO and MANUAL

Explanation
Diagnosis Click this to start Laser Self-Diagnostic.
Cancel Click this to exit Laser Self-Diagnostic.
$ Light Source Status (G)
Number of light source Searches the error record, and shows the number of times ☞ No. 06106 G Laser light source status error.
error occurred.
Error record Shows the error record of ☞ No. 06106 G Laser light source status error..
$ Temperature sensor
Laser Thermosensor Shows the R and B laser temperatures.
Laser Unit Thermosensor Shows the laser unit temperature.
! Direct modulation of the R and B lasers
3. Mode
LD control PCB
LD current
Half mirror
LD Input signal
PD
PD PCB PD voltage
G085178
$ LD stands for laser diode, which is a device to output laser.

The LD control PCB adjusts the current magnitude supplied to the LD according to the input signal size (from 0 V to
1 V), then the LD changes the laser intensity according to the current magnitude.
The LD control PCB changes the laser intensity according to the LD current magnitude of the input signal (0 V to 1
V).
$ PD stands for photo diode, which is a device to convert light intensity into an electrical signal.
A part of the laser emitted by the LD is reflected by the half mirror to the PD, then the LD control PCB detects the
output signal of the PD PCB to check the light intensity.
The output signal of the PD PCB is called PD voltage.
$ The graphs show the values of the PD voltage and LD current measured when the input signal from the
LD control PCB is increased by 0.1 V from 0.1 V to 1.0 V.
In general, increasing the LD current increases laser intensity and PD voltage. Therefore, if both graphs are almost
proportional, there is no problem.
Graphs of the LD current may change even when there is no problem.
This is because the characteristics of the LD slightly change according to temperature and time.
Changes in the LD characteristics cause laser intensity fluctuations. The LD current magnitude is changed to correct
the fluctuation.
Therefore, even when the LD current is normal, the slope of the graph may be changed or distorted slightly.
• For normal graphs, see ☞ AUTO in 35950 or Step 3 in 35951.
• For graphs with problems, see Step 4 in 35951.
35950 4/4
35951
Self-diagnostic
Laser Self-Diagnostic (AUTO)

Laser Self-Diagnostic (details of modes) ☞ 35950 Laser Self-Diagnostic (diagnosis: MANUAL) ☞ 35952
• For problems for which Laser Self-Diagnostic is and is not effective, see 35950 ☞ Explanation (Laser Self-Diagnostic).
! Diagnosis (AUTO)
1. Click Diagnosis on the Laser Self-Diagnostic display.
3. Mode
NOTE
• It takes approximately two minutes until Laser Self-Diagnostic is complete.
2. The Laser Self-Diagnostic program diagnoses Light Source Status (R), Light Source Status (B),
Synchronous Detection Setting Value, Synchronization frequency and Polygon mirror (Locked)
of the laser unit.
NOTE
• In addition, it searches the error records and number of occurrences for ☞ No. 06106 G Laser light source status
error.
3. The diagnosis result is shown.

NOTE
• It takes ten minutes at a maximum until the diagnosis result is shown.
Example: If Laser Self-Diagnostic is normal (FRONTIER-Printer: Ver. 2.01 or earlier, QSS-Printer:
Ver. 4.01 or earlier)
Laser Self-Diagnostic Laser Self-Diagnostic (graph (R)
35951 1/4
35951
Self-diagnostic
Example: If Laser Self-Diagnostic is normal (FRONTIER-Printer: Ver. 2.10 or later, QSS-Printer: Ver.
5.0 or later)
Laser Self-Diagnostic Laser Self-Diagnostic (graph (R)
3. Mode
4. If No Good is shown for Right Source Status (R) and Right Source Status (B)
Confirm graph (R) and graph (B).
LD current graph (normal) LD current graph (abnormal)

Graph (1) Graph (2) Graph (3)
Diagnosis example
• ☞ Graph (1), ☞ Graph (2)
If the current is shown in a polygonal line and it touches the upper-limit line, or the line overlaps the upper-limit line, it is assumed
that the laser unit LD is deteriorated.
Countermeasure: Replace the laser unit.
• ☞ Graph (3)
If the current is shown in a horizontal line near the 0 mV level, possible problems are connection failure in the laser control PCB
connector (coaxial cable (R)) and failure in the laser control PCB.
Diagnosis example (If the G laser has problems)
5. If No Good is shown for G of Synchronous Detection Setting Value

• Check whether a connection failure has occurred in wiring between the laser control PCB and the laser unit.
• Check whether a connection failure has occurred in wiring between the laser control PCB and the G-AOM driver.
6. Perform Laser Self-Diagnostic (AUTO) again, and if the problem recurs, replace the G-AOM driver.
1. Perform Laser Self-Diagnostic (AUTO) again.
If No Good is shown for G of Synchronous Detection Setting Value
• There is a possibility of failure in the laser unit.
1. Countermeasure 1: Reattach the G-AOM driver, and replace the laser unit.
2. Countermeasure 2: Perform Laser Self-Diagnostic (AUTO) again.
35951 2/4
35951
Self-diagnostic
If Synchronous Detection Setting Value of G is normal

• Failure in the G-AOM driver
NOTE
• If No Good is shown for R or B of Synchronous Detection Setting Value, and the problem is not resolved even when
no connection failure is found between the laser control PCB and the laser unit, there is a possibility of failure in the laser
unit or in the laser control PCB.
7. If Synchronization frequency is abnormal

• Failure in the G-AOM driver
• Failure in the laser control PCB
3. Mode
• Failure in the laser unit
8. If No Good is shown for Polygon mirror (Locked)

• Check whether power (24 V) is supplied to the laser control PCB.
• Check whether a connection failure has occurred in wiring between the laser control PCB (J/P1515) and the laser unit.
• Failure in the laser control PCB
• Failure in the laser unit
! Wiring connection failure (37 series/LP7500/LP7600/LP7700/LP7900 [300dpi])

The figure below shows the errors that frequently occur when connection failure occurs between the laser control PCB and laser unit.
Utilize this in addition to the above diagnosis for better diagnosing.
J/P1501
(BNC)
No.6073
G-AOM DRIVER
J/P1502 J/P1636
(BNC)
No.6073
LASER CONTROL PCB
J/P1508 J/P1639
(MiniCT-18P)
6 1
LASER UNIT
No.6073
10 5
J/P1543 J/P1638
(VH-7P) J/P1637
1 1 (BNC)
2 2
3 3
No.6073
No.6073 4 4
6 6
7 7
J/P1503
(BNC)
No.6073
J/P1515
1
No.6073
10
J/P1663
J/P1519
No.6073 1
J/P1664
10
1 1
No.6075 (1T)
12 12 P1666
1
J/P1665 NOT USED
No.6106 1
10
2
G LASER DRIVER
Power supply PCB (+5 V)
G085179
35951 3/4
35951
Self-diagnostic
! Wiring connection failure (37HD series[640dpi])

The figure below shows the errors that frequently occur when connection failure occurs between the laser control PCB and laser unit.
Utilize this in addition to the above diagnosis for better diagnosing.
J/P1501
(BNC)
No.6237
G-AOM DRIVER
J/P1502 J/P1636
(BNC)
No.6236
LASER CONTROL PCB
J/P1508 J/P1639
(MiniCT-18P)
6 1
LASER UNIT
No.6236
10 5
J/P1543 J/P1638
(VH-7P) J/P1637
3. Mode
1 1 (BNC)
2 2
3 3
No.6236
No.6236 4 4
6 6
7 7
J/P1503
(BNC)
No.6237
J/P1515
1
No.6076
10
J/P1504
1
No.6237
14
J/P1505
1
No.6237
11
J/P1663
J/P1519
No.6236 1
J/P1664
10
1 1
No.6179 (1T)
12 12 P1666
1
J/P1665 NOT USED
No.6106 1
10
2
G LASER DRIVER
Power supply PCB (+5 V)
G085599
35951 4/4
35952
Self-diagnostic
Laser Self-Diagnostic (MANUAL)

Laser Self-Diagnostic (details of modes) ☞ 35950 Laser Self-Diagnostic (AUTO) ☞ 35951
• For problems for which Laser Self-Diagnostic is and is not effective, see 35950 ☞ Explanation (Laser Self-Diagnostic).
• Use Laser Self-Diagnostic (MANUAL) only to diagnose the G laser.
For the R and B lasers, Right Source Status (R) and Right Source Status (B) of Laser Self-Diagnostic (AUTO) can diagnose
them more correctly.
! Diagnosis (MANUAL)
3. Mode
M5414-05
1. Enter 1000 in Number of synchronous detection supervisory on the Laser Self-Diagnostic

(MANUAL) display.
2. Configure the Synchronous detection power settings on the Laser Self-Diagnostic (MANUAL)
display, and perform diagnosis.
Narrowing down the asynchronous point

To find the asynchronous point in a short time, narrow down the point by changing the value as shown below.
1. If asynchronicity is not detected with the value set to 100, decrease the value by 1/2, and perform the diagnosis
again.(100%→50%)
2. If asynchronicity is detected with the value set to 50, increase the value by 1/4, and perform the diagnosis
again.(50%→75%)
3. If asynchronicity is not detected with the value set to 50, decrease the value by 1/4, and perform the diagnosis
again.(50%→25%)
IMPORTANT
• Use the following values as standards for diagnosis of the laser unit or the G-AOM driver.
G Diagnosis
30% or less Light intensity has not deteriorated (adequate light intensity).
From 31 to 60% Light intensity is deteriorating. (Even though the urgency is not high, attention should be paid.)
From 61 to 100% Light intensity has deteriorated. (The closer to 100% the value is, the greater the urgency is.)
• The light intensity is maximum when Synchronous detection power is set to 100. Decreasing this value
reduces the light intensity, and no laser light is output with the lowest value, 1%.
35952 1/2
35952
Self-diagnostic
Therefore, the point at which synchronous cannot be detected (asynchronous point) exists between 100 and
1%. Asynchronous point tends to become larger with less light intensity and smaller with more light intensity.
For example, asynchronous point is at 100% for a system with little laser light and high occurrence frequency
of asynchronous detection, 70% for a system with low laser light and low occurrence frequency of
asynchronous detection, 20% for a system with appropriate laser light intensity.
3. If asynchronicity is detected for the G laser with Synchronous detection power set to a value
between 61 and 100 before replacing parts
4. Perform Laser Self-Diagnostic (Manual) again, and if no change is seen, replace the G-AOM driver.
3. Mode
5. If no change is seen after the G-AOM driver is replaced, replace the laser unit.
35952 2/2
35953
Self-diagnostic
Laser Self-Diagnostic (starting/exiting)

Laser Self-Diagnostic (details of modes) ☞ 35950 Laser Self-Diagnostic (AUTO) ☞ 35951
Laser Self-Diagnostic (diagnosis: MANUAL) ☞ 35952
! Start procedure
1. In the Self-diagnostic mode, click Laser Self-Diagnostic.
2. Clicking Execute performs Upgrade then the Laser Self-Diagnostic display is shown.
3. Mode
Click Execute. Software Upgrade
3. If the EZ Conrtoller is started, ☞ No. 01804 The printer version is incorrect. Upgrade the printer
software. is shown. Click YES.
For the FRONTIER-Printer, if Laser Self-Diagnostic is performed while the printer's application is running, the same
message as above is shown.
35953 1/2
35953
Self-diagnostic
4. The Laser Self-Diagnostic display is shown.
FRONTIER-Printer: Ver. 2.01 or earlier, QSS-Printer: Ver. FRONTIER-Printer: Ver. 2.10 or later, QSS-Printer: Ver. 5.0
4.01 or earlier or later
3. Mode
! End procedure
1. Click Cancel on the Laser Self-Diagnostic display.
2. Clicking Execute updates the laser then the display returns to the Self-diagnostic mode.
Click Execute. Software Upgrade
3. Completion
35953 2/2
35955
Self-diagnostic
Network Self-Diagnostic

Maintenance: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Self-diagnostic → Network Self-Diagnostic
Ping Data path check
3. Mode
NOTE
• Network Self-Diagnostic is supported by FRONTIER-Printer Ver. 2.10 or later, and QSS-Printer Ver. 5.0 or later.
! Explanation (Network Self-Diagnostic)

• Network Self-Diagnostic has the functions below.
1. Checks the connection of the LAN cable connecting the PC and printer I/F main PCB using Ping.
2. Tests the image data transmission between the HDD and printer I/F main PCB using data path check.
! Ping
The connection of the LAN cable connecting the PC and printer I/F main PCB can be checked.
Explanation
Number of transmission Specifies the number of Ping transmission. (default: 4) (input range: 1 to 300)
Transmission size Specifies the data size to transmit using Ping. (default: 32 bytes) (input range: 1 to 65500 bytes)
Ping Click Ping, then the specified size of data is send to and received from the selected output device for the
specified times using Ping.
Transmission Shows the number of Ping transmission.
Receipt Shows the number of Ping reception.
Failed Shows the number that Ping transmission and reception failed.
(0% loss): The failure rate is shown on the right side of Failed.
Minimum time Shows the shortest response time of Ping.
Maximum time Shows the longest response time of Ping.
Average time Shows the average response time of Ping.
No. Shows the number of the diagnosis result.
Result The diagnosis result of Ping is shown.
1. If the data transmission and reception was normally performed, Reply from 192.168.1.11 is
shown.*2
2. If no replay was received for one second, Request timed out is shown.
3. If data transmission failed, No Good(Transmission) is shown.
4. If data reception failed, No Good(Receipt) is shown.
5. If data transmission and reception failed due to a cause other than those above, No Good is shown.
Size*1 Shows the transmitted data size by byte.
35955 1/3
35955
Self-diagnostic
Explanation
*1
Time Shows the time needed for the data transmission and reception by msec.
TTL*1 Shows the number of packets that passed the router.
Ver.2,0,0,1 (example) Shows the version information of the network self-diagnostic software.
*1. If no reply was received for one second, Size, Time and TTL are not shown.
*2. 192.168.1.11 is an IP address, and it varies depending on the IP Address setting on the Machine Specification display.
! Data path check

Image data transmission between the HDD and printer I/F main PCB can be tested.
NOTE
• If checking Communication speed only, remove a checkmark (&) from CRC check to efficiently perform the operation, then
click Execute.
3. Mode
M5350-01
Explanation
Number of checks Specifies the number to perform Data path check.
(default: 1) (Input range: 1 to 99999)
CRC check*1 Select whether to perform CRC check in addition to Data path check.
Number of checks so far Shows the number of Data path check and CRC check that are currently performed.
Communication speed Shows the communication speed calculated from the time needed for the data transmission and its size.
Diagnostic Result Shows the diagnosis result of CRC check.
• If data transmission and reception were performed normally: Good
• If data transmission and reception failed: No good
Execute Performs Data path checkCRC check.
• If only Data path check is performed, about seven seconds are required for each check.
• If Data path check and CRC check are performed at the same time, about 15 seconds are required
for each check.
*1. CRC check performs the following checks on the PC and printer I/F main PCB.
1. The PC calculates the image data to use for the CRC check by the bit.
2. The same data as the calculated one is transmitted to the printer I/F main PCB, and the PCB performs the same calculation.
3. The calculation results of the PC and printer I/F main PCB are compared, and image data damage is checked.
35955 2/3
35955
Self-diagnostic
! Setting
Specify the IP address and language to use.
M5350-02
NOTE
• If Network Self-Diagnostic is accessed from Extension→Maintenance, the IP Address and Language settings configured on
the Machine Specification display are applied. Therefore, they need not to be reconfigured.
3. Mode
! Checking procedure of Network Self-Diagnostic
1. Select Ping or Data path check, then configure each setting.

2. Click Ping or Execute.
3. Check the diagnosis result, and specify the failure part.
NOTE
• If communication failure of the LAN cable occurs while Data path check is performed, the following display is shown
and Data path check may be abnormally terminated.
G085492
! Startup procedure of Network Self-Diagnostic and destination of the log data

Network Self-Diagnostic can be started from Maintenance, and also from drive C directly.
Destination of the log data
Execution file of Network Self-Diagnostic
Destination of the log data
G085490
NOTE
• If Network Self-Diagnostic is accessed from drive C directly, the settings configured on the Machine Specification display are
not applied. Therefore, the IP Address and Language settings need to be reconfigured.
35955 3/3
36000
Printer Mechanical Adjustment
Paper sensor adjustment

Maintenance: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Printer Mechanical Adjustment → Paper Sensor Adjustment
3. Mode
M5374-00
NOTE
• The LED light intensity value of each sensor can be checked and checked only when the service personnel password (2260) has been
entered.
! Explanation
! Paper Sensor Adjustment (standard value: 5) (input range: 0 to 255)

This is the standard value to adjust the LED light intensity of each sensor.
NOTE
• The normal range of the LED light intensity value of each sensor is from 1 to 169.
• When the paper sensor LED light intensity adjustment was finished abnormally, the numeric value input section becomes 0 and
the status section becomes -.
! Functions
! Paper Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment

Adjusts the LED light intensity of each sensor.
NOTE
• This function adjusts the sensors below.
Sensors for Sensor LED Light Intensity Value Adjustment

Paper end sensors A, A2, B, and C
Paper loading sensor
Zigzag correction sensors (left and right)
Exposure start sensor
Paper sensor 1
Paper sensors 2 (left, center, and right)
• Paper end sensor A is shown when the triple magazine unit or the quad magazine unit has been attached.
• Paper end sensor A2 is shown when the quad magazine unit has been attached.
36000 1/2
36000
! Adjustment procedure
! Paper Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment
1. Check that each printer cover of the printer section and printer doors are closed.
2. Perform Paper Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment.
NOTE
• The LED light intensity value of each sensor is not shown if the service personnel password has not been entered.
• If Paper Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment is normally completed, OK is shown.
OK: When the LED light intensity of each sensor is from 1 to 169
• If Paper Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment is not normally completed, − is shown.
−: When the LED light intensity of each sensor is 0 or 170 or more
3. Mode
36000 2/2
36005
Paper Guide Width Correction

Maintenance: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustments → Printer Mechanical Adjustment → Paper Guide Width
Correction
Display 1 Display 2
3. Mode
NOTE
• Display 2 is supported by FRONTIER-Printer Ver. 2.20 or later, and QSS-Printer Ver. 7.00 or later.
• Enter the service personnel password (2260) to access this display.
• This display is shown if you register the Quad Magazine Unit in Option Registration.
! Explanation
Adjust the paper guide width of paper supply unit A2 so that the width is the same as the loading paper width.
This adjustment is required when replacing paper supply unit A2 or the guide width sensor.
! Paper Guide Width Measurement Value (initial value: 130.0) (input range: 127.0 to 133.0 mm)
Carry out Move to 130.0 mm Width via Functions and input measured value.
! Functions
! Move to 130.0 mm Width

The paper guide is moved to the home position. Then the correction value is canceled and it moves to the standard position (width
130.0 mm).
! 130.0 mm Width Operation Confirmation

The paper guide is moved to the home position. Then the correction value is activated and it moves to the standard position (width
130.0 mm).
! Paper Guide Width Correction
1. Perform Move to 130.0 mm Width via Functions.

2. Open the printer door to pull out the pre-exposure advance unit.
36005 1/2
36005
3. Measure the dimension between outsides of the paper guides.

Paper guides Outside of paper guide
3. Mode
Outside of paper guide
Measured
value
G086490
4. Enter the measured value into Paper Guide Width Measurement Value.
5. Perform 130.0 mm Width Operation Confirmation via Functions and confirm that the dimension
between outsides of the paper guides is 130.0 mm.
NOTE
• The acceptable value of the dimension between the paper guides is from 129.8 mm to 130.0 mm.
36005 2/2
36010
Paper Advance Unit Correction

Maintenance: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Printer Mechanical Adjustment → Paper Advance Unit
Correction
Display 1 Display 2
3. Mode
NOTE
! Explanation
Correct the receive/release stop position of the paper advance unit.
IMPORTANT
• Perform Paper Advance Unit Correction with any of paper magazine A, A2, B or C.
! Arm Unit 2 (Left) Receive Stop Position Correction (Initial value: 0.0) (Input range: from −2.0 to +2.0)
The paper receive position of arm unit 2 (left) is corrected.
! Arm Unit 2 (Right) Receive Stop Position Correction (Initial value: 0.0) (Input range: from −2.0 to +2.0)
The paper receive position of arm unit 2 (right) is corrected.
! Paper Stop Position Correction (Initial value: 0.0) (Input range: from −5.0 to +5.0)
The stop position of paper which is advanced to arm unit 2 is corrected.
! Functions
! Arm Unit 2 (Left) Receive Stop Position Correction Test Operation

The input correction value is invalidated and the arm unit 2 is moved to the arm unit 2 (left) receive stop position.
! Arm Unit 2 (Left) Receive Stop Position Correction Test Operation Confirmation
The input correction value is validated and the arm unit 2 is moved to the arm unit 2 (left) receive stop position.
! Arm Unit 2 (Right) Receive Stop Position Correction Test Operation

The input correction value is invalidated and the arm unit 2 is moved to the arm unit 2 (right) receive stop position.
36010 1/3
36010
! Arm Unit 2 (Right) Receive Stop Position Correction Test Operation Confirmation
The input correction value is validated and the arm unit 2 is moved to the arm unit 2 (right) receive stop position.
! Test Operation for the Paper Stop Position Correction

The input correction value is invalidated and the paper is advanced to the arm unit 2.
! Paper Stop Position Correction Test Operation Confirmation

The input correction value is validated and the paper is advanced to the arm unit 2.
1. Execute Arm Unit 2 (Left) Receive Stop Position Correction Test Operation via F: Functions.
2. Open the printer top cover and check the condition of arm unit 2.
3. Mode
3. Input the correction value so that the distance between the upper end of paper guide in paper advance
unit 1 and front end of arm unit 2 becomes 55.3±0.5 mm.
55.3±0.5 mm
Arm unit 2 (upper)
Upper paper guide
G068451
NOTE
• Positive correction makes the arm unit move away from paper advance unit 1 and negative correction makes it move close.
4. After inputting the correction value, execute Arm Unit 2 (Left) Receive Stop Position Correction Test
Operation via F: Functions, then check that the value is 55.3±0.5 mm.
5. Correct the arm unit 2 (right) receive stop position in the same way.
6. Execute Test Operation for the Paper Stop Position Correction via F: Functions.
7. Open the printer top cover and check the condition of arm unit 2 and paper.
36010 2/3
36010
8. Input the correction value so that the dimension between the front ends of arm unit 2 and paper
becomes 3.0±0.5 mm.
Paper
3. Mode
Arm unit 2
3.0±0.5 mm
G068452
NOTE
• Positive correction moves the paper arm unit 2 away from the front end of paper and negative correction moves to close.
9. After inputting the correction value, execute Paper Stop Position Correction Test Operation
Confirmation via F: Functions, then check that the value is 3.0±0.5 mm.
36010 3/3
36015
Exposure Offset Adjustment (37HD series)

Maintenance: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Laser parts replacement check mode → Exposure Offset Adjustment
3. Mode
M5416-00
NOTE
• This is shown only for 37HD series [640dpi].
#).
This is shown if Laser unit or Laser Control PCB of Replacement Parts in Laser parts replacement check mode is selected (#
! Explanation
• If uneven prints as shown below are output after replacing the laser unit, pressing Execute on the Exposure Offset Adjustment
display automatically perform the adjustment.
Example: Before performing Exposure Adjustment Example: After performing Exposure Adjustment
Exposure Adjustment is effective. Exposure Adjustment is ineffective. Exposure Adjustment is effective. Exposure Adjustment is ineffective.
NOTE
• The Exposure Offset Adjustment function automatically performs the same adjustment that is performed in Exposure
Adjustment after the replacement of the laser.
If uneven prints are still output after performing Exposure Offset Adjustment, even though it is rare, perform the adjustment
again in Exposure Adjustment.
☞ 32515
• Exposure Offset Adjustment can be performed only if the laser unit temperature adjustment is completed and the printer door is
closed.
36015 1/1
36020
Exposure Magnification Correction

Maintenance: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Printer Mechanical Adjustment → Exposure Magnification
Correction
Display 1 Display 2
A B A B
3. Mode
NOTE
! Explanation
The image to be exposed can be expanded or reduced in the paper width direction.
IMPORTANT
• Perform Exposure Magnification Correction with any of paper magazine A, A2, B or C.
• If you do not have 178 mm-width or wider paper, make a test print with the widest paper you have, then measure the
length between the outer lines.
! Cyan Line Exposure Size (Initial value: 160.0 mm) (Input range: 65.0 to 295.0 mm)
The length of the test print image is measured, and then the actual measurement value can be entered.
! Functions
! Test Print (Paper Magazine A/A2/B/C)

A test print is made without any correction.
NOTE
• A piece of paper with the advance length 100 mm is printed.
• The paper width, [A ####(#)] is printed as the CVP imprinting.
! Test print confirmation (Paper Magazine A/A2/B/C)

A test print is made using correction values.
NOTE
• A magenta arrow is shown on the Test Print Confirmation print.
Test print Test Print (Confirmation)
G066121
36020 1/2
36020

• The print pattern of the test print made with Test Print (Confirmation) is as same as that made with Test Print but of which
color of the center line on the test prints differ. (Red)
• The paper width, 〈A ####(#)〉 is printed as the CVP imprinting.
1. Perform Test Print of F: Functions.

IMPORTANT
• Make a test print with the maximum paper size which you use.
2. Measure length A on the test print.
3. Mode
G068453
3. Select the length of the measured line in A on the display, and enter the measured value in part B.
IMPORTANT
• Measure the length of 160 line usually.
• If you do not have 178 mm-width or wider paper, measure the length between the outer lines.
4. Perform Test Print Confirmation of Functions.
5. Confirm that Part A on the test print is within ±0.1 mm of the specified length.
6. Perform Exposure Position Adjustment.
☞ 36030
7. Perform Exposure Center Correction.
☞ 36070
36020 2/2
36030
Exposure Position Adjustment

Maintenance: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Printer Mechanical Adjustment → Exposure Position
Adjustment
Display 1 Display 2
3. Mode
NOTE
! Explanation
Perform correction so that the exposure position in the laser unit is at the center of the test print. Correct the positions of the R, G, B
laser main and sub scanning.
IMPORTANT
• Perform Exposure Position Adjustment with any of paper magazine A, A2, B or C.
• If you do not have paper of 178 mm or wider, make a test print with the widest paper you have, then measure the
length between the most outside lines.
! BLOCK-B Check Image Selection 1 for Main Scan Cyan Line = Magenta Line
Enter the number and letter of the image where the cyan line aligns with the magenta line on the test print BLOCK-B.
! BLOCK-B Check Image Selection 2 for Main Scan Cyan Line = Yellow Line
Enter the number and letter of the image where the cyan line aligns with the yellow line on the test print BLOCK-B.
! BLOCK-B Magenta Offset Value of Main Scanning

If there is no image where the cyan line aligns with the magenta line on the test print BLOCK-B, measure the distance between the
cyan and magenta lines on BLOCK-C 0i and enter the measured value.
! BLOCK-B Yellow Offset Value of Main Scanning

If there is no image where the cyan line aligns with the yellow line on the test print BLOCK-B, measure the distance between the cyan
and yellow lines on BLOCK-C 0i and enter the measured value.
! BLOCK-D1 Check Image Selection 1 for Sub Scan Cyan Line = Magenta Line
Enter the number of the image where the cyan line aligns with the magenta line on the test print BLOCK-D1.
! BLOCK-D2 Check Image Selection 2 for Sub Scan Cyan Line = Magenta Line
Enter the number of the image where the cyan line aligns with the magenta line on the test print BLOCK-D2.
36030 1/5
36030
! Functions

NOTE
• A piece of paper with the advance length 355.6 mm is printed.

NOTE
3. Mode
G066121
1. Confirm that Exposure Magnification Correction has been completed.

☞ 36020
IMPORTANT
3. On the test print BLOCK-B, check the numbers of the image where the cyan line aligns with the
magenta line, and where it aligns with the yellow line.
Magenta line
Cyan line Yellow line
G068454
IMPORTANT
• Check the line using the loupe.
• The loupe is a service personnel tool. See Service personnel tool list.
☞ 80310
36030 2/5
36030
4. If there is no part where the cyan line aligns with the magenta/ yellow line on the test print BLOCK-B,
check BLOCK-C 0i and enter the offset value of main scanning and make a Test Print again.
Minus correction
Positive correction
3. Mode
G068455
5. Enter each number.

6. Check the number of the image where the cyan line aligns with the magenta line on the test print
BLOCK-D1, and where it aligns with the yellow line on the test print BLOCK-D2.
Magenta line
Yellow line
Cyan lines
G068456
7. Enter each number.

36030 3/5
36030
9. Confirm that the lines (cyan, magenta and yellow) of the column 0a to 0h in BLOCK-B are straighter
than any of the other columns.
Check area
3. Mode
G068457
10. Confirm that the lines (cyan, magenta and yellow) of rows 0 and -1 in BLOCK-D1 and D2 are straighter
than any of the other rows.
IMPORTANT
• On prints made via Test Print Confirmation, rows 0 and -1 of BLOCK-D1 and D2 are exposed in the same
position.
Check area
G068458
11. Confirm that the lines (cyan, magenta and yellow) make a straight line in BLOCK-E. If it is not a straight
line, perform Exposure Magnification Fine Adjustment.
☞ 36040
IMPORTANT
• Check line 160 usually.
• If you do not have paper of 178 mm or wider, make a test print with the widest paper you have, then measure
the length between the most outside lines.
36030 4/5
36030
Y
G068459
3. Mode
36030 5/5
36040
Exposure Magnification Fine Adjustment

Maintenance: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Printer Mechanical Adjustment → Exposure Magnification
Fine Adjustment
Display 1 Display 2
3. Mode
NOTE
! Explanation
This mode is used to correct dot displacement for each laser of B, G and R on both sides of a print.
IMPORTANT
• Perform Exposure Position Adjustment with any of paper magazine A, A2, B or C.
• If you do not have paper of 178 mm or wider, make a test print with the widest paper you have, then measure the
length between the most outside lines.
! Magenta Line (Main Scanning) (Initial value: 0.0 dot) (Input range: from −9.9 to +9.9 dot)
G laser expansion and contraction can be corrected against the paper width direction.
! Yellow Line (Main Scanning) (Initial value: 0.0 dot) (Input range: from −9.9 to +9.9 dot)
B laser expansion and contraction can be corrected against the paper width direction.
! Functions

NOTE

36040 1/3
36040
NOTE
G066121
1. Confirm that Exposure Magnification Correction and Exposure Position Adjustment have been
completed.
3. Mode
☞ 36020
☞ 36030
IMPORTANT
1 dot
+correction −correction
G068460
IMPORTANT
• Check the line using the loupe.
• The loupe is a service personnel tool. See Service personnel tool list.
☞ 80310
36040 2/3
36040
3. Perform the correction so that the magenta and yellow lines make a straight line with cyan line in the
vertical direction at 0 on the test print.
IMPORTANT
• If there is no image where magenta and cyan lines make one line, perform the fine adjustment by 0.1 dot.
• Check the line with the most outside chart of the test print.
NOTE
• When correcting the magenta line to the right, input minus correction value.
• When correcting the magenta line to the left, input + correction value.
4. Enter the correction value.
3. Mode
6. Check if the magenta and yellow lines make a straight line with cyan line in the vertical direction at 0 on
the test print again.
7. Carry out the Exposure Position Adjustment again.
☞ 36030
36040 3/3
36050
Paper Advance Length Correction

Maintenance: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Printer Mechanical Adjustment → Paper Advance Length
Correction
3. Mode
M5379-00
NOTE
! Explanation
Correct the paper advance length and the advance roller feed error.
IMPORTANT
• It is necessary to carry out paper advance length correction for each paper magazine A, A2, B, and C.
! Test Paper Measurement Value (1st) (Initial value: 150.0 mm) (Input range: from 145.0 to 155.0 mm)
The first test paper is for the correction of the paper which has just been fed out from the paper magazine (distance between the paper
loading sensor and the paper cutter) and the advance feed error.
! Test Paper Measurement Value (2nd) (Initial value: 200.0 mm) (Input range: from 180.0 to 220.0 mm)
The second test paper is for the correction of the advance roller feed error.
! Functions
! Test Paper Advance

Two test prints of 150.0 mm and 200.0 mm are made without any correction.
IMPORTANT
• Be sure to enter the measurement dimensions of the first and second test papers at the same time.
NOTE
! Test Paper Advance Confirmation

Two test prints of 150.0 mm and 200.0 mm are made using correction values.
NOTE
! Loading (Paper Magazine A/A2/B/C)

The paper is loaded.
36050 1/2
36050
! Rewind
The paper is rewound.
1. Attach the paper magazine to carry out the paper advance length correction on the magazine mount
A/A2/B/C.
2. Select paper magazine A/A2/B/C.
3. Perform Test Paper Advance via Functions.
4. Open the printer top cover and remove the paper from paper advance unit 1 and 2.
3. Mode
Paper Paper advance unit 2
G068461
5. Measure each test paper length of the first and second paper which are removed.
6. Enter each measurement dimension.
7. After the correction, perform Test Paper Advance Confirmation via F: Functions and be sure to make
a print and check if the advance length is correct.
8. If the advance length is incorrect, adjust it in the following procedure.
If the advance length of the first print after loading is incorrect
If the advance length is longer Increase the correction value of Test Paper Measurement Value (1st).
If the advance length is shorter Decrease the correction value of Test Paper Measurement Value (1st).
If the advance length of the second or later print after loading is incorrect
Reset the measurement lengths of Test Paper Measurement Valued (1st, 2nd) to the initial values and adjust them again.
36050 2/2
36060
Arm Unit 1 Zigzagging Correction

Maintenance → Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Printer Mechanical Adjustment → Arm Unit 1 Zigzagging
Correction
Display 1 Display 2
3. Mode
NOTE
! Explanation
Correct if the image is exposed diagonally toward the paper because of the paper zigzagging.
IMPORTANT
• Perform arm unit 1 zigzagging correction for each paper magazine A, A2, B, and C.
• Perform the adjustments of all magazines to use for magazine mounts A, A2, B and C.
! A − C (Initial value: 0.0 mm) (Input range: −2.0 to +2.0 mm)

Correction is necessary for each magazine (paper width and surface).
! Magazine A, Magazine A2, Magazine B, Magazine C

Paper magazine A/A2/B/C can be selected.
! Functions
Functions Explanation
F Test Print 1 (Paper Magazine A/A2/B/C)*2 The correction is invalid and two test prints are output.
F Test Print Confirmation 1 (Paper Magazine The correction is valid and two test prints are output.
A/A2/B/C)*1*2
F Test Print 2 (Paper Magazine A/A2/B/C)*3 The correction is invalid and two test prints are output.
F Test Print Confirmation 2 (Paper Magazine The correction is valid and two test prints are output.
A/A2/B/C)*1*3
F Loading (Paper Magazine A/A2/B/C) The paper is loaded.
F Rewind (Paper Magazine A/A2/B/C) The paper which has been loaded is rewound.
36060 1/5
36060
Functions Explanation
*4
F Correction Value Copy (Paper Magazine A/A2/B/C) • When using paper of which paper width or surface are different is
used on the same magazine, Arm Unit 1 Zigzagging Correction
can be performed by copying the correction value for other paper.
• Copying the correction value reduces the time required for the
adjustment.
• For details about the procedure, see ☞ Performing Arm Unit 1
Zigzagging Correction by copying the correction values.
*1. A magenta arrow is shown on the Test Print Confirmation print.
The paper width, 〈A ###(#)〉 is printed in the CVP imprinting.
3. Mode
G066121
*2. The advance length of the test print is 457.0 mm.
*3. If the paper width is between 82.5 mm and 120 mm, two test prints whose advance length is 457.0 mm are output.
If the paper width is between 127 mm and 305 mm, two test prints whose advance length is 914.0 mm are output.
*4. Correction Value Copy is supported by FRONTIER-Printer Ver. 2.20 or later, and QSS-Printer Ver. 7.00 or later.
! Adjustment (Arm Unit 1 Zigzagging Correction)
1. Check that the zigzagging adjustment of the exposure advance unit has been completed.
☞ 36080
2. Check that the zigzagging adjustment of the magazine mount has been completed.
☞ 22100
3. Check that the right angle adjustment of the cutter unit has finished.
See ☞ The right angle adjustment of the cutter unit in 25620.
4. Clean pressure pins of arm unit 1 with cotton swab. (two positions)
Insert cotton swab into the space of arm unit 1 to clean the pins.
Arm unit 1
Clean the space.
Pressure pins
G089218
5. Attach the paper magazine to be carry out arm unit 1 zigzagging correction to magazine mount
A/A2/B/C.
7. Execute Test Print 1 or Test Print 2 of F: Functions.
8. Measure the difference of lines A and C on the second test print. And input the value to (A−C).
IMPORTANT
• Input the correction value in millimeter (mm).
• Use a scale to measure the dimensions of lines A and C on the test print.
36060 2/5
36060
NOTE
• When the measured values of the test print are line A: 121 mm and C: 120 mm, for example, see the below.
• Line A (121 mm) − Line C (120 mm) = Correction value A − C (1 mm)
Line A
3. Mode
B
C
Line C
G085491
9. After the correction, make test prints in Test Print (Confirmation) of Functions. And then check that
the difference of dimensions of lines A and C (on the second test print) is within the allowable range in
the following table.
Test print Tolerance range
Test print 1 (457.0 mm) A − C is within ±0.5 mm
IMPORTANT
• If the difference of dimensions of lines A and C (on the second test print) is out of the tolerance level, input the
correction value to A−C.
A is longer than Positive correction
C
C is longer than Negative correction
A
NOTE
• When correcting 1.0 mm in (A-C), the zigzagging of approx. 1.0 mm can be corrected on the test print.
10. Make test prints in Test Print (Confirmation) of Functions. And then check that the difference of
dimensions of lines A and C (on the second test print) and the difference of dimensions of lines A and C
(on the first test print) are within the allowable range in the following table.
IMPORTANT
• If the difference between lines A and C is not within the allowable range, check the zigzagging adjustment of
the magazine deck. ☞ 22100
• If the differences of lines A and C both on the first and second test prints are out of the allowable range
specified in the following table, confirm the exposure center correction. ☞ 36070

Test print 1 (457.0 mm) A and C are within 1/2±0.5 mm of the actual paper width
Test print 2 (914.0 mm) A and C are within 1/2±1.0 mm of the actual paper width
36060 3/5
36060
11. For details about how to copy correction values of Arm Unit 1 Zigzagging Correction to Width and
Paper Surface, see the procedure below.
See ☞ Performing Arm Unit 1 Zigzagging Correction by copying the correction values.
! Performing Arm Unit 1 Zigzagging Correction by copying the correction values
1. Click the tab of the magazine of which correction value is to be copied on the Arm Unit 1 Zigzagging
Correction display.
For example, copy the correction values of paper magazine B.

Example: Arm Unit 1 Zigzagging Correction display
3. Mode
S5380-00-UM01
2. Click Functions.
3. Click Copy correction value (Magazine B).
4. Select Width and Paper Surface of the Copy from field.

The correction values of Arm Unit 1 Zigzagging Correction for the selected paper are shown.
S5380-01-UM00
5. Click each check box of Paper Width and Surface to which the correction values are copied.
NOTE
• Several paper types can be selected at the same time when copying correction values.
36060 4/5
36060
Clicking Select All selects all the paper types.

Example: When copying the correction values to the paper of which Paper Width is 127 mm and
Surface is (1)
3. Mode
S5380-01-UM01
6. Click Enter.
The correction values of Arm Unit 1 Zigzagging Correction for the selected paper in the Copy from field are registered as
the correction values for each paper selected in Step 5.
7. Click Cancel.
The Arm Unit 1 Zigzagging Correction display is shown again.
8. Perform Arm Unit 1 Zigzagging Correction using each paper to which correction values were
copied.
In this example, the correction values for paper magazine B was copied. Attach paper magazine B, and perform Arm Unit 1
Zigzagging Correction.
• For details about Arm Unit 1 Zigzagging Correction, see ☞ Adjustment (Arm Unit 1 Zigzagging Correction).
IMPORTANT
• Be sure to check if each test print is within the tolerance level by performing Arm Unit 1 Zigzagging
Correction with each paper after copying correction values.
This completes the operation of Arm Unit 1 Zigzagging Correction performed by copying correction values.
36060 5/5
36065
Paper Guide Width Correction (for each Paper Width)

Maintenance → Maintenance → Various Adjustments → Printer Mechanical Adjustment → Paper Guide Width Correction (for each Paper
Width)
Display 1 Display 2
3. Mode
NOTE
! Explanation
When the paper width or paper surface of paper magazine A2 is changed, adjust the paper guide width of paper supply unit A2 to the
paper width to be used.
See Adjusting the paper guide width [Paper Guide Width Adjustment (for each Paper Width)] in the Operator's Manual.
36065 1/1
36070
Exposure Center Correction

Maintenance: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Printer Mechanical Adjustment → Exposure Center
Correction
Display 1 Display 2
3. Mode
NOTE
! Explanation
The exposure center correction can be performed for each paper width and surface.
IMPORTANT
• Carry out the Master (Exposure Center Correction Value) and Exposure Center Correction (for each Paper Magazine)
for each paper magazine A/A2/B/C.
! Exposure Center Correction (for each Paper Magazine) (Initial value: 0.0 mm) (Input range: from −2.0
to +2.0 mm)
The reference line is corrected to be in the center on the test paper for each paper magazine (for each paper width and surface).
! Master (Exposure Center Correction 1) Paper Left End − Center (Initial value: 127.0 mm) (Input range:
from 31.3 mm to 162.4 mm)
Enter the length from the left end to the center line on the leading end of the test print.
! Master (Exposure Center Correction 2) Center − Paper Right End (Initial value: 0.0 mm) (Input range:
from 31.3 mm to 162.4 mm)
Enter the length from the center line to the right end on the leading end of the test print.
! Master (Exposure Center Correction Value)

The exposure center correction value which is calculated from the entered values of Master (Exposure Center Correction Value 1) and
Master (Exposure Center Correction Value 2) is displayed.
NOTE
• When the correction value is over ±9.9 mm, the correction value display part turns red and it cannot be registered.
! Exposure Center Correction 1/Exposure Center Correction 2/Exposure Center Correction Value (user
level)
If the system is FRONTIER-Printer (Ver. 2.20 or later) or QSS-Printer (Ver. 7.00 or later), the above correction modes vary between
user mode and service mode.
36070 1/4
36070
In the user mode, process a test print using desired paper, and enter the exposure center correction value calculated from entered values
in Exposure Center Correction Value1 and Exposure Center Correction Value2 to Surface of the desired paper width.
For details, see Adjusting when unexposed area appears on the left or right side of the print [Exposure Center Correction] in
the Operator's Manual.
! Functions
! Test print (Paper Magazine A/A2/B/C) without Correction Value

Invalidate the correction values of Master (Exposure Center Correction Value) and Exposure Center Correction (for each Paper
Magazine) to make a test print.
! Test print confirmation (Paper Magazine A/A2/B/C) with Master Value

Validate Master (Exposure Center Correction Value) and make a test print.
3. Mode
! Test Print Confirmation (Paper Magazine A/A2/B/C) with Master and Paper Magazine Values
Validate the correction values of Master (Exposure Center Correction Value) and Exposure Center Correction (for each Paper
Magazine) to make a test print.
NOTE
G066121
• When making test prints in Functions, a print with the advance length of 100 mm is made and the paper width 〈A ####(#)〉 is
printed as the CVP imprinting.

! Rewind
The paper which is being loaded is rewound.
Exposure Center Correction (Master)

☞ 36080
☞ 22100
3. Check that Arm Unit 1 Zigzagging Correction has been completed.
☞ 36060
4. Check that Exposure Magnification Correction has been completed.
☞ 36020
5. Attach the paper magazine to carry out Master (Exposure Center Correction Value) to magazine mount
A/A2/B/C.
7. Carry out Test Print without Correction Value of F: Functions.
IMPORTANT
36070 2/4
36070
8. Measure the length from the left end to the center line and the length from the center line to the right end
on the leading end of the test print.
Left end of the paper Right end of the paper
Center line
3. Mode
G068463
9. Enter each measurement dimension.

10. After correcting carry out Test Print Confirmation with Master Value of F: Functions and be sure to
make a print and check if the exposure center is correct.
Exposure Center Correction (for each Paper Magazine)

☞ 36080
☞ 22100
3. Attach the paper magazine for Exposure Center Correction to the magazine mount A/A2/B/C.
5. Carry out Test Print Confirmation with Master value of F: Functions.
36070 3/4
36070
6. Measure dimension B from the left end to the center line on the test print.
IMPORTANT
• When measuring the test print, use the front end of the test print.
Center line
Front end of the test print
3. Mode
G068464
7. Perform the correction so that dimension B is half of the paper width.

B is longer than a half of the Negative correction
paper width
A half of the paper width is Positive correction
longer than B
8. After correcting, carry out Test Print Confirmation with Master and Paper Magazine Values of F:
Functions and be sure to make a print to check if the exposure center is correct.
36070 4/4
36080
Exposure Advance Adjustment

Maintenance: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Printer Mechanical Adjustment → Exposure Advance
Adjustment
Display 1 Display 2
3. Mode
NOTE
• This display is only shown if the service personnel password (2260) has been entered.
! Explanation
Exposure Start Position Correction and Exposure Advance Motor Speed Correction are carried out.
Zigzagging due to the pressure of the inlet roller and exit roller of exposure advance unit is corrected.
IMPORTANT
• If the exposure advance adjustment is performed for any one of magazine A, A2, B, or C, the correction is complete.
! Paper Front End - 0 mm-line Test Paper Measurement Value (Initial value: 25.4 mm) (Input range: 22.4
to 28.4 mm)
The Exposure Start Position is corrected.
Measure the length between the test paper front end and 0 mm-line, then input measured value.
! 0 mm-line - 254 mm-line Test Paper Measurement Value (Initial value: 254.0 mm) (Input range: 244.4 to
264.4 mm)
The Exposure Advance Motor Speed is corrected.
Measure the length between 0 mm-line and 254 mm-line of the test paper and input measured value.
! Functions

Invalidate the correction value that is entered for Exposure Start Position Correction and Exposure Advance Motor Speed Correction
and then make a test print.
A test print with the advance length of 305 mm is printed.
NOTE

Validate the correction value that is entered for Exposure Start Position Correction and Exposure Advance Motor Speed Correction
and then make a test print.
36080 1/10
36080
A test print with the advance length of 305 mm is printed.

NOTE
G066121
! Exposure Advance Pressure Inlet Roller Test Print (Paper Magazine A/A2/B/C)
Paper is advanced by the exposure advance unit inlet roller, and then a test print is made.
NOTE
3. Mode
! Exposure Advance Pressure Exit Roller Test Print (Paper Magazine A/A2/B/C)
Paper is advanced by the exposure advance unit exit roller, and then a test print is made.
NOTE

! Rewind
The paper which is being loaded is rewound.
Exposure Advance Adjustment

1. Make a test print by selecting Test Print (Paper Magazine A, A2, B or C) in F:Functions.
2. Measure the length between the paper front end and 0 mm-line of the test print, then input the
measured value in Paper Front End - 0 mm-line Test Paper Measurement Value.
36080 2/10
36080
3. Measure the length between 0 mm-line and 254 mm line of the test print, then input the value in 0 mm-
line - 254 mm-line Test Paper Measurement Value.
Paper Front End - 0 mm-line Test Paper Measurement Value
Paper advance direction
3. Mode
0 mm-line - 254 mm-line Test Paper Measurement Value
G068465
4. Make a test print by selecting Test Print (Paper Magazine A, A2, B or C) in F:Functions.
5. For confirmation of the test print results, see each value shown below.
Length between the paper front end and 0 mm-line 25.4 mm
Length between 0 mm-line and 254 mm-line 254.0 mm

A
Rear end
G068466
Adjusting the paper zigzagging in the exposure advance unit

1. Make a test by selecting Exposure Advance Pressure Inlet Roller Test Print (Paper Magazine A,
A2, B or C) in F:Functions.
IMPORTANT
• Print the test print with the maximum paper width which has been used.
36080 3/10
36080
2. Measure the lengths between 0 mm-line and 254 mm-line of right and left edges of the test print and
check that the difference is within 0.2 mm.
Left Right
3. Mode
Rear end G068467
IMPORTANT
• If the difference between the right and left measured values is ±0.2 mm or more, carry out the following
adjustment.
NOTE
• There is another method to check the difference. Cut the paper at the center and put them together to check the difference
between lines A and B.
3. Lift up paper advance units 1 and 2.
4. Remove the pressure guide. (two locks)
Locks
Pressure guide Paper advance unit 2
G068468
36080 4/10
36080
5. Check that the dimension of inlet roller adjusting screw of exposure advance unit is between 2.0 and 2.5
mm. If an adjustment is necessary, loosen the nut of the inlet roller and adjust the screw. (Loosen one
nut, adjust one screw.)
Exit roller adjusting screw
Exit roller nut
2.0 to 2.5 mm
3. Mode
Scales
Inlet roller nut
Inlet roller adjusting screw

2.0 to 2.5 mm
G072395
IMPORTANT
• Make a test print again. Measure the lengths between 0 mm-line and 254 mm-line on right and left edges of the
test print. If the difference is not within 0.2 mm, carry out the following adjustment.
• Adjust the zigzagging by turning the adjusting screw between 2.0 and 2.5 mm. If adjustment is performed out of
the range between 2.0 and 2.5 mm, the banding appears on the area 32 mm from the paper front end.
6. Loosen the fixing screw of the exposure advance unit inlet roller. (Loosen one fixing screw.)
7. Loosen the nut of the exposure advance unit inlet roller. (Loosen one nut.)
8. Adjust the adjusting screw of the exposure advance unit inlet roller. (one adjusting screw)
Exit roller adjusting screw
Exit roller nut
Exit roller fixing

screw
Pressure guide Inlet roller

fixing screw
Inlet roller Inlet roller nut

adjusting screw
G072393
Carry out adjustment for the advance error that is measured in ☞ 2 of Exposure Advance Unit Zigzagging Adjustment
referring to the following table.
36080 5/10
36080
When the measurement value on the LEFT is longer

Paper advance Rotation direction of the Rotation amount
error screw of the screw
(mm)
0.2 to 0.3 Counterclockwise Approximately 45°
0.4 Counterclockwise Approximately 60°
When the measurement value on the RIGHT is longer

Paper advance Rotation direction of the Rotation amount of the
error screw screw
(mm)
3. Mode
0.1 to 0.2 Clockwise Approximately 45°
0.3 Clockwise Approximately 60°
IMPORTANT
• Tighten the fixing screw of the exposure advance roller while the angle bracket of the pressure roller unit is
pressed in the direction indicated by the arrow.
Screwdriver
Pressure guide
G072394
9. Attach the pressure guide to the exposure advance unit.

10. Check the pressure of the pressure rollers at the exit and inlet sides in the exposure advance unit.
See ☞ Checking (pressure roller at the exit side).
See ☞ Checking (pressure roller at the inlet side).
11. Make a test print again by selecting Exposure Advance Pressure Inlet Roller Test Print (Paper
Magazine A, A2, B or C) in F:Functions.
36080 6/10
36080
12. Measure the lengths between 0 mm-line and 254 mm-line of right and left edges of the test print and
check that the difference is within 0.2 mm.
Left Right
3. Mode
Rear end G068467
IMPORTANT
• If the difference between the right and left measured values is ±0.2 mm or more, readjust from ☞ 6 of
Exposure Advance Unit Zigzagging Adjustment.
13. Adjust the exposure advance unit exit roller following the same procedure.
14. Check the Arm Unit 1 Zigzagging Correction.
☞ 36060
Checking (pressure roller at the exit side)
IMPORTANT
• When adjusting the pressure roller at the exit side in the exposure advance unit, check the followings since the
banding may be found at the area 32 mm from the paper leading end.
1. Turn the cam in the exposure advance unit to release the pressure of the pressure roller at the exit side
and set the paper.
36080 7/10
36080
2. Make fine adjustments of the cam in the exposure advance unit so that the pressure release amount of
the pressure roller at the exit side is the thickness of about one sheet of paper. Use the paper to check
that the pressure of the pressure roller at the exit side is equable at the right and left.
3. Mode
Pressure roller at the exit side
Cam
G072398
IMPORTANT
• If the pressure adjustment is required, perform ☞ 6 to ☞ 8 of Exposure Advance Unit Zigzagging
Adjustment.
3. Make some gray prints in the Print mode to see if the banding occurs at the area 32 mm from the paper
leading end.
32 mm
Front
Rear end
end
G074601
NOTE
• Any paper size is acceptable.
Checking (pressure roller at the inlet side)

IMPORTANT
• When adjusting the pressure roller at the inlet side in the exposure advance unit, check the followings since the
banding may be occurred at the area 24 to 27 mm from the paper rear end.
36080 8/10
36080
1. Turn the cam on the exposure advance unit to release the pressure of the pressure roller at the exit
side.
3. Mode
Pressure roller at the exit side
Cam
G072399
2. Release the pressure of the pressure roller at the exit side and set the paper. Make fine adjustments of
the cam in the exposure advance unit so that the pressure release amount of the pressure roller at the
inlet side is the thickness of about one sheet of paper.
36080 9/10
36080
3. Use the paper to check that the pressure of the pressure roller at the inlet side is equable at the right
and left.
3. Mode
Pressure roller at the inlet side
Cam
G072397
IMPORTANT
• If the pressure adjustment is required, perform ☞ 6 to ☞ 8 of Exposure Advance Unit Zigzagging
Adjustment.
4. Make some gray prints in the Print mode to see if the banding occurs at the area 24 to 27 mm from the
paper rear end.
Front
end Rear end
24 to 27 mm
G074602
NOTE
• Any paper size is acceptable.
36080 10/10
36090
Paper pressure operation correction

Maintenance → Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Printer Mechanical Adjustment → Paper Pressure Operation
Correction
3. Mode
M5384-00
! Explanation
The banding can be adjusted for eacy magazine type by adjusting the space between the pressure roller of the exposure advance unit
and the paper.
IMPORTANT
• Perform Paper Pressure Operation Correction for each paper type.
• Copy the paper width correction value of which correction is finished to the same paper type paper magazine.
! Paper Pressure Operation Correction (Initial value: 1) (input range: from 1 to 13)
Correct the pressure release of the pressure roller.
! Functions

Prints the gray test prints (13 patterns).
Test prints with the advance length of 152 mm to 164 mm is printed.
NOTE

Validate the Paper Pressure Operation Correction to make a test print.
A test print of which number is registered to the paper pressure operation correction is made.
NOTE
G066121

36090 1/2
36090
! Rewind
The paper which has been loaded is rewound.
1. Select and execute Test Print via F:Functions.

NOTE
• 13 patterns of the test prints are made as shown in the list below.
• When the CVP (optional) has been installed, the print No. and the revolution pulse count are printed on the back print.
Print No. Revolution pulse count Test print advance
(pps) length (mm)
1 1733 152
2 1600 153
3. Mode
3 1545 154
4 1502 155
5 1466 156
6 1434 157
7 1405 158
8 1378 159
9 1353 160
10 1329 161
11 1307 162
12 1285 163
13 1265 164
2. Banding appears around 17 mm or 26 mm from the rear end on the test print. Check the table below
and enter the correction pattern No. as the correction value.
Banding position Correction Banding position Correction
Around 26 mm from the paper rear +2 Around 17 mm from the paper rear −2
end end
Example: Around 26 mm at the rear end Example: Around 17 mm at the rear end
Banding (26 mm at the rear end) −2 Banding (17 mm at the rear end)
+2
10 11 12 13
Test print with no
banding
Test print with no Print No.

banding
Print No.
Paper advance direction Paper advance direction
3. Perform steps 1 and 2 for each paper magazine type.
36090 2/2
36100
White Border Width Correction

Maintenance → Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Printer Mechanical Adjustment → White Border Width Correction
3. Mode
M5385-00
! Explanation
The margin can be corrected for each paper width and surface.
IMPORTANT
• Perform the correction with any of paper magazine A, A2, B or C.
• This correction affects the exposure position both of prints with border and without border, because the image
exposure position is corrected.
! Paper Magazine (Input range: from 82.5 to 305 mm)

Specify the paper magazine to be corrected.
! Left Margin Correction (Initial value: 5.0 mm) (Input range: from 0.0 to 10.0 mm)
Correct the left margin of the test print so that it becomes 5.0 mm.
! Right Margin Correction (Initial value: 5.0 mm) (Input range: from 0.0 to 10.0 mm)
Correct the right margin of the test print so that it becomes 5.0 mm.
! Functions

Invalidate the correction value to make a test print.
NOTE
• A piece of paper with the advance length of 216 mm and the margin of 5.0 mm is printed.

Validate the correction value to make a test print.
36100 1/2
36100
NOTE
G066121
• A piece of paper with the advance length of 216 mm and the margin of 5.0 mm is printed.
! White Border Width Correction
IMPORTANT
• If the margin on the test print is 0.5 mm, the correction is not necessary.
3. Mode
☞ 22100
2. Check that the exposure center correction has been completed.
☞ 36070
4. Measure the right and left margins on the test print.
G068472
5. Enter the measured value in each item.

6. Perform Test Print Confirmation of F: Functions and make sure that the margin is 5.0 mm.
36100 2/2
38000
Software
Software
Installing the system program
1. Insert the system program CD into the CD drive and start Setup.exe in the CD-ROM.
Follow the instructions on the display to install it.
2. When the InstallShield Wizard display is shown, click Next.
3. If the Operation Selection display is shown, confirm that Update is selected, then click Next.
The Operation Selection display is shown only when the upgrade had been performed before.
Item Details
If Update is selected The system program will be upgraded to the version of the inserted CD.
3. Mode
If Go back to the previous version is selected The system program will be downgraded to the previous version.
• Example: If the version of the inserted CD is 4.0, the currently-used version is
3.0 and the previous version is 2.0, the system program will be downgraded to
Ver. 2.0.
4. If the Log Option display is shown, confirm that Create log files with this PC is selected, then click Next.
This display is shown only when the maintenance application is installed to the PC for the first time.
IMPORTANT
• If two or more PCs on which the maintenance application is installed are connected to a single printer, configure
this setting as shown below.
• Select Create log files with this PC on a PC.
• Select Not create log files with this PC on other PC.
• In the case above, the detailed log data is saved only to the PC whose checkbox of Create log files with this PC
is selected.
5. When the Windows Installer start confirmation display is shown, click Next. (only for
LP7500/LP7600/LP7700/LP7900)
This display is shown only when the maintenance application is installed to the PC for the first time.
1. If License Agreement is shown, select I Agree ( ), then click Next.
2. If the message Completing Windows Installer 3.1 (KB893803) Installation Wizard is shown, select Do not restart now
( ), then click Finish.
3. If the Microsoft Visual C++ 2005 Redistributable Package display is shown, click Yes.
6. Installation starts.
7. When the InstallShield Wizard Complete display is shown, select Yes, I want to restart my computer
now., and click Finish.
8. The computer restarts automatically.
38000 1/2
38000
Software
3. Mode
This page is intentionally blank.
38000 2/2
4000
4. Troubleshooting
Error and attention message regulation ................................................................................ 4001

Classification of errors and attention messages ...................................................................................................4001
Suffix number ......................................................................................................................................................4002
Diagnosis appendix for the failures: Symptom due to poor wiring connections .................... 4202
Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring (printer section) ....................................................................4202
Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring (processor) ............................................................................4203
Diagnosis appendix: Symptoms result from blowout of fuse ................................................. 4252
Symptoms result from blowout of fuse (printer section/processor section) ........................................................4252
Diagnosis appendix: Checking the connection between the PC and printer ......................... 4260
Checking the connection between the PC and printer .........................................................................................4260
Diagnosis appendix: Diagnosis flowchart .............................................................................. 4302
Laser temperature control status of Status Display does not change from Temperature control started to
Temperature control completed. [LASER] .........................................................................................................4302
4 Troubleshooting
Diagnosis appendix: [F] ......................................................................................................... 4600
Replenishment cartridge installation section troubleshooting flow ....................................................................4600
Recovery procedure 1 from the replenishment error ...........................................................................................4610
Taking countermeasures after the errors No.05916 to No.05921 occur ..............................................................4630
Attention message: Processor ............................................................................................. 40500
No. 00500[N] Add water to the Refilling Water Tank. ...................................................................................40500
No. 00501[N] The replenisher switch is turned on. ........................................................................................40500
No. 00502[N] Add replenishment solution to the replenishment tank. ...........................................................40500
No. 00503[N] [SM] Empty the Effluent Tank. ...............................................................................................40500
No. 00505 Remove the prints from the Print Sorter Unit. ...............................................................................40500
No. 00506 Close the Dryer Cover. ..................................................................................................................40500
No. 00507 Close the Processor Top Cover. .....................................................................................................40500
No. 00508 Paper remains in the processor. Are you sure you want to turn the drive off? ..............................40500
No. 00510 Attach the Print Conveyor Unit. ....................................................................................................40500
No. 00515 Set the Rack Stopper. .....................................................................................................................40500
No. 00520 Sensors may be dirty. .....................................................................................................................40500
No. 00521 Remove the prints from the sorter tray (large) ..............................................................................40500
Attention message: Tablet Replenishment .......................................................................... 40600
No. 00600[J] The Tablet Cartridge is empty. CD ...........................................................................................40600
No. 00601[J] The Tablet Cartridge is empty.BF .............................................................................................40600
No. 00602[J] The Tablet Cartridge is empty. STB ..........................................................................................40600
No. 00603[J] Add water to the Water Supply Tank. .......................................................................................40600
No. 00604[J] Add water to the SW/DW Tank. ...............................................................................................40600
No. 00605[J] Attach the Tablet Cartridge. CD ................................................................................................40600
No. 00606[J] Attach the Tablet Cartridge.BF .................................................................................................40600
No. 00607[J] Attach the Tablet Cartridge. STB ..............................................................................................40600
No. 00608[J] Attach the Tablet Replenishment Unit. .....................................................................................40600
No. 00609[J] The Tablet kit is empty. .............................................................................................................40600
No. 00610[J] Empty the Effluent Tank.### ....................................................................................................40600
4000 1/9
4000
Attention message: SM replenishment ................................................................................ 40700

No. 00700[SM] Replace the Replenishment Package with a new one.P-# .....................................................40700
No. 00701[SM] Attach the Replenishment Package.P-# ................................................................................40700
No. 00702[SM] Add water to the Water Supply Tank. ...................................................................................40700
No. 00703[SM] Would you like to initialize the remaining amount of the Replenishment Package? ...........40700
No. 00704[SM] Press the [YES: Execute] to initialize the remaining amount of the Replenishment Package. .......
40700
No. 00705[SM] Replace the Replenishment Package with a new one.P-# .....................................................40700
Attention message: F replenishment ................................................................................... 40900
No. 00902[F] Install the replenisher cartridge. ................................................................................................40900
No. 00903[F] Close the replenisher section door. ...........................................................................................40900
No. 00905[F] Install the new replenisher cartridge. ........................................................................................40900
No. 00906[F] It is ready to replace the replenisher cartridge. .........................................................................40900
No. 00907[F] Collect the waste solution. ........................................................................................................40900
No. 00908[F] Open operation was not completed correctly. Replenishment solution preparation will resume. ....
40900
4 Troubleshooting
No. 00909[F] Replenishment tank is empty. Cannot start the operation. ......................................................40900
No. 00910[F] Preparing the replenishment solution. One moment please . . . ..............................................40900
No. 00912[F] Replenishment solution was created. Initialize replenishment data and restart replenishment. ........
40900
No. 00913[F] Mixing Replenisher cannot be started. .....................................................................................40900
No. 00914[F] PSR is running out. ...................................................................................................................40900
No. 00916[F] PSR is empty. ............................................................................................................................40900
No. 00918[F] Replenish PSR. .........................................................................................................................40900
Attention message: Printer .................................................................................................. 41000
No. 01026 Close the Printer Top Cover. .........................................................................................................41000
No. 01029 The measurement failed. Measure it again. ...................................................................................41000
No. 01047 Close printer door. .........................................................................................................................41000
No. 01074 Sensors may be dirty. .....................................................................................................................41000
No. 01000-01132 Attention messages not explained in the Service Manual ..................................................41000
Attention message: Scanner/ Film Carrier ........................................................................... 41300
Attention message: Disk/Media ........................................................................................... 41500
No. 01501-01549 See the EZ Controller Troubleshooting Manual for Corrective action of Attention message. ....
41500
Attention message: Colorimeter .......................................................................................... 41550
No. 01552 The paper in the Colorimeter is too short. It cannot be measured. ................................................41550
No. 01555 The calibration plate data is out of range. ......................................................................................41550
No. 01556 The Colorimeter Unit is not set. ....................................................................................................41550
4000 2/9
4000
Attention message: NMC/Printers in common ..................................................................... 41620

No. 01750 Communication with the printer failed. The printer may not be active, or the LAN cable may not be
connected. ..........................................................................................................................................................41620
No. 01751 There was a time difference of more than 2 minutes between the clocks of printer and PC. The printer
clock was adjusted to match the PC clock. ........................................................................................................41620
No. 01753 Printer is not ready. Start the printer. ...........................................................................................41620
No. 01754 Profile data registered to the printer is not compatible with that of the application. .....................41620
No. 01756 Printer profile versions are inconsistent. .......................................................................................41620
No. 01757 Execute the startup checks. ............................................................................................................41620
No. 01758 Maintenance is proceeding. Close the Maintenance screen. .......................................................41620
No. 01759 Adjusting the temperature. One moment please. .........................................................................41620
No. 01760 Installation is proceeding. One moment please. ..........................................................................41620
No. 01761 Printer is offline. Confirm that the circuit breaker of the printer is ON and that the printer is
connected correctly. ...........................................................................................................................................41620
41620
Attention message: Software upgrade ................................................................................ 41800
4 Troubleshooting
No. 01801 Execute software upgrade. .............................................................................................................41800
No. 01804 The printer version is incorrect. Upgrade the printer software. ....................................................41800
No. 01805 The printer program is corrupted. Run the recovery software. ....................................................41800
Attention message: External system ................................................................................... 41821
No. 1821 For corrective action of the attention message, see the d-Storage/ CD-R external writing system Service
Manual. ..............................................................................................................................................................41821
Attention message: Main ..................................................................................................... 41900
No. 01920 Capacity Booster Key was not detected. Confirm the connection status. ....................................41900
No. 01998 Capacity Booster Key was not detected. Confirm the connection status. ....................................41900
Attention message: Edit ....................................................................................................... 43370
43370
Attention message: External system ................................................................................... 44200
No. 4200-4231 For corrective action of the attention message, see the d-Storage/ CD-R external writing system
Service Manual. .................................................................................................................................................44200
Attention message: Bravo II ................................................................................................ 44350
No. 4350-4358 See the Bravo II Service Manual for Corrective action of Attention message. .....................44350
4000 3/9
4000
Error message: Processor 1 ................................................................................................ 45500

No. 05500 The processing solution temperature is above the safety range. P1 ..............................................45500
No. 05501 The processing solution temperature is above the safety range. P2 ..............................................45500
No. 05502 The processing solution temperature is above the safety range. PS ..............................................45500
No. 05503 The dryer temperature is above the safety range. ..........................................................................45500
No. 05504 The processing solution temperature is below the processing range. P1 ......................................45500
No. 05507 The dryer temperature is below the processing range. ..................................................................45500
No. 05508 The processing solution level is too low. .......................................................................................45500
No. 05509 The circulation amount has decreased. ..........................................................................................45500
No. 05510 Processor A/D conversion error. ....................................................................................................45500
No. 05511 The circulation pump has stopped. CD ..........................................................................................45500
No. 05512 The circulation pump has stopped. CD2 ........................................................................................45500
No. 05513 The circulation pump has stopped. BF ..........................................................................................45500
No. 05514 The circulation pump has stopped. BF2 ........................................................................................45500
4 Troubleshooting
No. 05515 The circulation pump has stopped. STB1 ......................................................................................45500
No. 05519 Thermosensor error. P1 .................................................................................................................45500
No. 05522 Dryer Thermosensor error. ............................................................................................................45500
No. 05524 Refilling water operation error. CD-W ..........................................................................................45500
No. 05525 Refilling water operation error. BF-W ..........................................................................................45500
No. 05526 Refilling water operation error. STB1-W ......................................................................................45500
Error: Processor 2 ............................................................................................................... 45530
No. 05530 The Processor Top Cover is open. .................................................................................................45530
No. 05531 The dryer cover is open. ................................................................................................................45530
No. 05532 The Processing Solution Safety Thermostat has activated. ...........................................................45530
No. 05533 The Dryer Safety Thermostat has activated. ..................................................................................45530
No. 05534 Print Sorter Unit operation error. ...................................................................................................45530
No. 05535 Paper has jammed in the processor section. ..................................................................................45530
No. 05537 The Rack Stopper is not set. ..........................................................................................................45530
No. 05538 Backup data error. Processor ........................................................................................................45530
No. 05539 Print Conveyor Unit was removed. ...............................................................................................45530
No. 05545 Print Sensor (Left) error. ................................................................................................................45530
No. 05547 Print Sensor (Right) error. .............................................................................................................45530
No. 05548 Dryer Lane Select Sensor error. .....................................................................................................45530
No. 05553 Print sensor (center) error ..............................................................................................................45530
No. 05549 Drive Motor Revolution Count Auto Adjustment error. ...............................................................45530
No. 05550 Drive Motor has stopped. ..............................................................................................................45530
No. 05551 Paper Guide operation error. ..........................................................................................................45530
No. 05552 Dryer Lane Select Guide operation error. ......................................................................................45530
4000 4/9
4000
Error message: Tablet replenishment ................................................................................. 45600

No. 05600[J] Tablet Drum operation error. CD ..............................................................................................45600
No. 05601[J] Tablet Drum operation error. BF ...............................................................................................45600
No. 05602[J] Tablet Drum operation error. STB ............................................................................................45600
No. 05603[J] A tablet has jammed. .................................................................................................................45600
No. 05604[J] A tablet has jammed. BF ...........................................................................................................45600
No. 05605[J] A tablet has jammed. .................................................................................................................45600
No. 05609[J] Printing cannot continue without replenishment. CD ...............................................................45600
No. 05610[J] Printing cannot continue without replenishment. BF ................................................................45600
No. 05611[J] Printing cannot continue without replenishment. STB ..............................................................45600
No. 05612[J] Tablet Replenishment Elevator operation error. .......................................................................45600
No. 05613[J] The processing solution level is too low. STB1 ......................................................................45600
Error message: SM replenishment ...................................................................................... 45700
No. 05700[SM] Replenishment pump operation error. CD-A ........................................................................45700
No. 05701[SM] Replenishment pump operation error. CD-B ........................................................................45700
No. 05702[SM] Replenishment pump operation error. CD-C ........................................................................45700
4 Troubleshooting
No. 05703[SM] Replenishment pump operation error. CD-W .......................................................................45700
No. 05704[SM] Replenishment pump operation error. BF-A .........................................................................45700
No. 05705[SM] Replenishment pump operation error. BF-B .........................................................................45700
No. 05706[SM] Replenishment pump operation error. STB ...........................................................................45700
No. 05708[SM] Replenishment Package solution remaining error. ................................................................45700
No. 05709[SM] Replenishment Package solution remaining error. ................................................................45700
No. 05710[SM] Refilling water operation error. CD-W .................................................................................45700
No. 05711[SM] Refilling water operation error. BF-W ..................................................................................45700
No. 05712[SM] Refilling water operation error. STB1-W .............................................................................45700
4000 5/9
4000
Error message: F replenishment ......................................................................................... 45900

No. 05900[F] Replenisher cartridge open motor operation error. ...................................................................45900
No. 05901[F] Replenishment solution level sensor error. P1R .......................................................................45900
No. 05902[F] Replenishment solution level sensor error. P2RA ....................................................................45900
No. 05903[F] Replenishment solution level sensor error. P2RB ....................................................................45900
No. 05904[F] Replenishment solution level sensor error. PSR .......................................................................45900
No. 05905[F] P1R replenishment solution output amount/replenishment solution level management is abnormal.
45900
No. 05906[F] P2RA replenishment solution output amount/replenishment solution level management is abnormal.
45900
No. 05907[F] P2RB replenishment solution output amount/replenishment solution level management is abnormal.
45900
No. 05908[F] Failed to open the replenisher cartridge. ...................................................................................45900
No. 05909[F] Cartridge cleaning valve/Agitation solenoid valve is abnormal. P1R ......................................45900
No. 05910[F] Cartridge cleaning valve is abnormal. P2RA ............................................................................45900
No. 05911[F] Cartridge cleaning valve is abnormal. P2RB ............................................................................45900
No. 05912[F] Predetermined process amount was exceeded. .........................................................................45900
4 Troubleshooting
No. 05913[F] An error occurred in the replenisher section. ............................................................................45900
No. 05914[F] Temperature and humidity sensor error. ...................................................................................45900
No. 05916[F] Solution level of the processing tank goes below the processable level. P1 ............................45900
No. 05917[F] Solution level of the processing tank goes below the processable level. P2 ............................45900
No. 05918[F] Solution level of the processing tank goes below the processable level. PS1 ..........................45900
No. 05922[F] Replenisher section door is open. .............................................................................................45900
No. 05923[F] Solution remains in the replenishment tank. .............................................................................45900
Error message: Printer 1 ..................................................................................................... 46000
No. 06012 Paper did not load. Paper Magazine A .........................................................................................46000
No. 06013 Paper did not load. Paper Magazine B ..........................................................................................46000
No. 06014 Paper did not rewind. Paper Magazine A .....................................................................................46000
No. 06015 Paper did not rewind. Paper Magazine B .....................................................................................46000
No. 06016 Paper Cutter operation error. .........................................................................................................46000
No. 06049 Pressure Guide operation error. .....................................................................................................46000
No. 06069 The printer top cover is open. ........................................................................................................46000
No. 06073 Synchronous Sensor error. .............................................................................................................46000
No. 06075 G Laser control error. ....................................................................................................................46000
No. 06076 Polygon Mirror control error. ........................................................................................................46000
No. 06077 Interlock error. ...............................................................................................................................46000
No. 06081 Backup data error. Printer .............................................................................................................46000
No. 06082 Setup error. ....................................................................................................................................46000
No. 06087 Laser Control PCB system error. ...................................................................................................46000
4000 6/9
4000

No. 06101 Paper Hold Motor operation error. ................................................................................................46100
No. 06104 Printer Door is open. ......................................................................................................................46100
No. 06106 G Laser light source status error. ...................................................................................................46100
No. 06107 R Laser temperature is out of range. ..............................................................................................46100
No. 06112 Could not load the paper. Paper Magazine C ...............................................................................46100
No. 06113 Paper did not rewind. Paper Magazine C .....................................................................................46100
No. 06134 Paper Supply Pressure Change Motor operation error. .................................................................46100
No. 06135 Arm Unit 1 operation error. ...........................................................................................................46100
No. 06136 Exposure Advance Pressure Change Motor 1 operation error. .....................................................46100
No. 06138 Paper Advance Arm Motor (Left) operation error. .......................................................................46100
No. 06139 Paper Advance Arm Motor (Right) operation error. .....................................................................46100
No. 06140 Lane Select Motor (Left) operation error. .....................................................................................46100
No. 06141 Lane Select Motor (Right) operation error. ...................................................................................46100
No. 06142 Paper Advance Pressure Change Motor (Left) operation error. ....................................................46100
4 Troubleshooting
No. 06143 Paper Advance Pressure Change Motor (Right) operation error. ..................................................46100
No. 06148 Paper End Sensor A error. .............................................................................................................46100
No. 06149 Paper End Sensor B error. .............................................................................................................46100
No. 06150 Paper End Sensor C error. .............................................................................................................46100
No. 06151 Paper Loading Sensor error. ..........................................................................................................46100
No. 06152 Zigzagging Correction Sensor (Left) error. ...................................................................................46100
No. 06153 Zigzagging Correction Sensor (Right) error. .................................................................................46100
No. 06155 Exposure Start Sensor error. ..........................................................................................................46100
No. 06157 Paper Sensor 1 error. ......................................................................................................................46100
No. 06158 Paper Sensor 2 (Left) error. ...........................................................................................................46100
No. 06159 Paper Sensor 2 (Center) error. .......................................................................................................46100
No. 06160 Paper Sensor 2 (Right) error. .........................................................................................................46100
No. 06173 Printer Door 3 is open. It may be adversely affect print quality. ..................................................46100
No. 06177 Laser Unit temperature is out of range. .........................................................................................46100
No. 06179 B/G Laser Output Unit error. .........................................................................................................46100
No. 06187 Setup calculation error. ..................................................................................................................46100
No. 06194 Laser Control PCB control error. ...................................................................................................46100
No. 06195 Paper did not load. Paper Magazine A2 .......................................................................................46100
No. 06196 Paper did not rewind. Paper Magazine A2 ...................................................................................46100
No. 06197 Paper End Sensor A2 error. ...........................................................................................................46100
No. 06198 Laser Unit EE-PROM control error. ..............................................................................................46100
No. 06199 Pressure Release Motor A2 operation error. ..................................................................................46100
No. 06200 Width Change Motor A2 operation error. .....................................................................................46100
No. 06202 Paper did not rewind. Paper Magazine A .....................................................................................46100
4000 7/9
4000

No. 06203 Setup error. ....................................................................................................................................46200
No. 06204 Setup error. ....................................................................................................................................46200
No. 06205 Setup error. ....................................................................................................................................46200
No. 06208 Paper has jammed in the Paper Supply Unit. ................................................................................46200
No. 06209 Paper has jammed in the Exposure Advance Unit. ........................................................................46200
No. 06210 Paper remains in the Paper Supply Unit. .......................................................................................46200
No. 06211 Paper remains in the Exposure Advance Unit. ..............................................................................46200
No. 06220 B Laser temperature is out of range. ..............................................................................................46200
No. 06221 Paper has jammed in the Paper Advance Unit. ..............................................................................46200
No. 06222 Paper has jammed in the Processor loading unit. ..........................................................................46200
No. 06223 Paper remains in the Paper Advance Unit. ....................................................................................46200
No. 06224 Paper remains in the Processor loading unit. .................................................................................46200
No. 06228 Paper did not load. Paper Magazine B ..........................................................................................46200
No. 06229 Could not load the paper. Paper Magazine C ...............................................................................46200
4 Troubleshooting
No. 06230 Paper did not load. Paper Magazine A2 .......................................................................................46200
No. 06234 Paper Loading Sensor error. ..........................................................................................................46200
No. 06235 Exposure Start Sensor error. ..........................................................................................................46200
No. 06236 Synchronization detection error .....................................................................................................46200
No. 06237 LD light source status error ...........................................................................................................46200
No. 06238 Exposure offset adjustment error ...................................................................................................46200
No. 06239 Laser unit error ..............................................................................................................................46200
Error message: Scanner/ Film Carrier ................................................................................. 46300
Error message: Colorimeter ................................................................................................ 46550
No. 06551 Paper has jammed in the Colorimeter Unit. ...................................................................................46550
No. 06554 Calibration Plate advance error. ....................................................................................................46550
No. 06555 Set the Colorimeter Unit. ...............................................................................................................46550
Error message: NMC/Software upgrade/Image Processing ................................................ 46620
No. 06621-06833 For corrective actions, see EZ Controller Service Manual ................................................46620
No. 06680 Network communication error. ......................................................................................................46620
No. 06681 Network communication error. ......................................................................................................46620
Error message: Main ........................................................................................................... 46900
No. 06901 ARCNET communication error. ....................................................................................................46900
No. 06902 LVDS communication error. .........................................................................................................46900
No. 06903 Serial communication error. ..........................................................................................................46900
No. 06909 CPU was reset. Abort the process. ................................................................................................46900
No. 06921 PCB error. ......................................................................................................................................46900
No. 06931 Backup data error. Printer I/F Main PCB .....................................................................................46900
Error message: Edit ............................................................................................................. 49000
Error message: Bravo I/CD-R external writing system (directly connecting to Rimage) ...... 49350
No. 9350-9381 For corrective action of the error message, see the Bravo II Service Manual and the d-Storage/
CD-R external writing system Service Manual. ................................................................................................49350
4000 8/9
4000
Attention message: Main controller/ Setting module ........................................................... 49450

No. 10000-15551 Refer to the Troubleshooting Manual for Corrective action of Attention message. ..........49450
Failure diagnosis of laser-related parts ............................................................................... 49500
Failure diagnosis of laser-related parts (+24 V power supply) [37HD series/37
series/LP7500/LP7600/LP7700/LP7900] ..........................................................................................................49500
Failure diagnosis of laser-related parts (-12 V, -5 V, +5 V and +24 V) [37 series/LP7500/LP7600/LP7700/LP7900]
49501
Failure diagnosis of laser-related parts (-12 V, -5 V, +5 V and +24 V) [37HD series] ....................................49502
Failure diagnosis of laser-related parts (+5 V source) [37 series/LP7500/LP7600/LP7700/LP7900] ..............49510
Failure diagnosis of laser-related parts (+5 V source) [37HD series] ...............................................................49511
Failure diagnosis of laser-related parts (analog source, digital source) [37 series/LP7500/LP7600/LP7700/LP7900]
49520
Failure diagnosis of laser-related parts (analog source, digital source) [37HD series] .....................................49521
Error/attention messages with no number ........................................................................... 49531
No. - Output device is not available. ...............................................................................................................49531
4 Troubleshooting
4000 9/9
4001
Error and attention message regulation
Classification of errors and attention messages
! Attention message
Messages shown to provide information in normal processing are attention messages.
• If replacing consumable parts is necessary
• If the judgment of operator is necessary
• If a simple operation mistake has been made
! Error
Messages shown in abnormal conditions are error messages.
• If there is something wrong with the system
• If a serious operation mistake has been made, performing the operation not allowed to be performed
! Error/Attention message number

Error/Attention message number consists of main and suffix numbers. For 01234-00001, 01234 is the main number and 00001 is the
suffix number.
4. Troubleshooting
Main number
It identifies the content of Error/Attention message.
Operator takes a corrective action judging with the content and the countermeasure represented by the main number.
Suffix number
It identifies error occurring place and condition.
Service personnel figures out the error occurrence condition judging with the content of the suffix number and performs the diagnosis.
IMPORTANT
• The digit number of suffix number for the Error/Attention message varies depending on the model. However, the suffix
number in five digits are described in the Service Manual.
• Example: Service Manual (suffix number)

• No.05900 Replenisher cartridge open motor operation error.
Suffix Condition
number
00001 When the replenisher cartridge setting part is moved to the lower position for opening the replenisher cartridge, the
Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Upper) does not turn LIGHT even after a specified time has passed.
Model Display
LP7500/LP7600/LP7700/LP7900 No.05900-1 Replenisher cartridge open motor operation error.
QSS-37 No.05900-00001 Replenisher cartridge open motor operation error.
NOTE
• For the content of suffix number, see Suffix number.
☞ 4002
4001 1/1
4002
Suffix number
! Types of suffix number

Suffix numbers can be classified to the following three types.
• No suffix numbers
• Displays the condition
• Displays the total of bit operation
! No suffix numbers
If the occurrence condition is single
Example 1
Suffix number Condition
00000 The cover is opened.
! Displays the condition

If the occurrence condition is multiple and only one of them is the object of the occurring cause, its suffix number is shown in five
4. Troubleshooting
digits.
Example 2
00001 The sensor does not detect DARK.
00002 The sensor does not detect LIGHT.
! Displays the total of bit operation

If the occurrence condition is multiple and some of them are possible to be the objects of the occurring cause at the same time, the total
of the target suffix numbers (bit) is shown.
NOTE
• The bit operation value is shown by decimal digit.
Example 3
Suffix number (bit) Condition
00001 Sensor 1 does not detect.
NOTE
• If the sensors 1 and 3 of example 3 are the objects, 00005 is shown. If all the sensors are the objects, 00031 is shown.
4002 1/1
4202
Diagnosis appendix for the failures: Symptom due to poor wiring connections
Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring (printer section)
Reference
☞ Printer I/F main PCB (37 ☞ Printer I/F main PCB (37HD series) ☞ Capacity booster PCB*1*1
series/LP7500/LP7600/LP7700/LP7900)
☞ Printer control PCB ☞ Laser control PCB (37 ☞ Laser control PCB (37HD series)
☞ G laser driver (37 ☞ G Laser driver (37HD series) ☞ G-AOM driver (37
series/LP7500/LP7600LP7700/LP7900) series/LP7500/LP7600LP7700/LP7900)
☞ G-AOM driver (37HD series) ☞ Printer I/O PCB 1 ☞ Printer I/O PCB 2
☞ Printer I/O PCB 3 ☞ Triple magazine PCB ☞ Quad magazine PCB
☞ CVP PCB ☞ Printer power supply 1 (PS1) ☞ Printer power supply 2 (PS2)
☞ Printer power supply 3 (PS3) ☞ Printer power supply 4 (PS6) ☞ Printer power supply 5 (PS4)
☞ Laser power supply (PS5) ☞ Checking condition of wiring connection
failure
! Printer I/F main PCB (37 series/LP7500/LP7600/LP7700/LP7900)
4. Troubleshooting
Connector No. Symptom
J/P1206 Connects to the control The processor drive starts but the printer program does not start.
power supply (+5 V) The message Output device is not available. One moment please. . . is shown when the
Maintenance Application is started
J/P1207 Connects to the printer I/F No.06901-00008 ARCNET communication error. Processor occurs.
J/P1208 main PCB (ARCNET) No.06901-00009 ARCNET communication error. Printer Processor occurs.
J/P1211 Connects to the capacity No.01920-# # # # # Capacity Booster Key was not detected. Confirm the connection
booster*1 status. occurs.
J/P1213 Connects to the display Nothing is shown on the display module.
J/P1214 module (keyboard PCB) No key on the display module responds.
J/P455 Connects to the laser control No.06194-00008 Laser Control PCB control error. occurs.
PCB (LVPECL)
P1200 Connects to the ATX No.01750-00000 Communication with the printer failed. The printer may not be
motherboard (LAN) active, or the LAN cable may not be connected. occurs.
*1. Used only for LP7500/LP7600/LP7700/LP7900, 3702/3703/3704/3705

The suffix number of error message varies depending on the capacity booster PCB installed.
! Printer I/F main PCB (37HD series)

J/P1204 Unused −
J/P1205 Unused −
J/P1206 Connects to the control The processor drive starts but the printer program does not start.
power supply (+5 V) The message Output device is not available. One moment please. . . is shown when the
Maintenance Application is started
J/P1207 Connects to the printer I/F No.06901-00008 ARCNET communication error. Processor occurs.
J/P1208 main PCB (ARCNET) No.06901-00009 ARCNET communication error. Printer Processor occurs.
J/P1210 Unused −
J/P1211 Connects to the capacity No.01920-# # # # # Capacity Booster Key was not detected. Confirm the connection
booster*1 status. occurs.
J/P1212 Unused −
J/P1213 Connects to the display Nothing is shown on the display module.
J/P1214 module (keyboard PCB) No key on the display module responds.
J/P1215 Connects to the laser control No.06194-00008 Laser Control PCB control error. occurs.
PCB (LVPECL)
J/P1216 Connects to the laser control When printing has started, the error No.06902-00004 LVDS communication error. occurs,
PCB (LVPECL) and then No.06087-00003 Laser Control PCB system error. occurs.
4202 1/11
4202

P1200 Connects to the ATX No.01750-00000 Communication with the printer failed. The printer may not be
motherboard (LAN) active, or the LAN cable may not be connected. occurs.
*1. Used for 3702HD/3703HD/3704HD/3705HD only.
The suffix number of error message varies depending on the capacity booster PCB installed.
! Capacity booster PCB*1*1

J/P860 Connects to the printer I/F No.01920-# # # # # Capacity Booster Key was not detected. Confirm the connection
main PCB. status. occurs.
J/P861 Connects capacity booster No.01920-00064 Capacity Booster Key was not detected. Confirm the connection
J/P862 PCBs F and G. status. occurs.
CN1 Unused -
! Printer control PCB

4. Troubleshooting
J/P200 Connects to printer I/O PCB Printing is not started.
1. On the Input Check display, Interlock Switch 1 (Printer Top Cover)Interlock Switch
(Printer Door 1, 2) shows OFF.
J/P201 Connects to printer I/O PCB Printing is not started.
2.
J/P202 Connects to printer I/O PCB No.06224-00003 Paper remains in the Processor loading unit. occurs.
3.
3.
J/P204 Connects to the quad When the status of Magazine Unit A/Magazine Unit A2-1 is confirmed in Input Checks, all
magazine PCB. the paper magazine code sensors are DARK.
Connects to the triple No.01047-00002 Close printer door. occurs when printing is started.
magazine PCB.
J/P206 Connects to printer I/O PCB No.06210-00005 Paper remains in the Paper Supply Unit. occurs.
2.
J/P207 Connects to printer I/O PCB No.06211-00001 Paper remains in the Exposure Advance Unit. occurs.
3.
J/P208 Connects to the triple No.06227-00001 Paper did not load. Paper Magazine A occurs when printing is started.
magazine PCB.
3.
J/P210 Connects to the CVP PCB. Correction value is not printed.
J/P211 Connects to paper magazine The magazine is not detected. (All magazine code sensors B/C are DARK.)
code sensor B/C.
J/P212 Connects to the laser control No.06087-00022 Laser Control PCB system error. occurs when printing is started.
PCB.
J/P213 Connects to the quad No.06196-00002 Paper did not rewind. Paper Magazine A2 or No.06210-00004 Paper
magazine PCB. remains in the Paper Supply Unit. occurs.
J/P214 Connects to printer I/O PCB No.06137-00001 Exposure Advance Pressure Change Motor 2 operation error. occurs.
1. No.06186-00001 Exposure Advance Pressure Change Motor 3 operation error. occurs.
J/P215 Unused −
J/P218 Connects to printer power No.06901-00512 ARCNET communication error. Printer Processor LASER occurs.
supply 5 (5 V-2)
J/P219 Connects to the laser control No.06901-00521 ARCNET communication error. Printer ProcessorLASER occurs.
J/P220 PCB
(37
series/LP7500/LP7600/LP77
00/LP7900)
4202 2/11
4202

J/P219 Connects the printer control No.06901-00512 ARCNET communication error. Printer LASER occurs.
J/P220 PCB (ARCNET). No.06901-00513 ARCNET communication error. LASER occurs.
(37HD series)
J/P221 Connects to the printer I/F No.06901-00009 ARCNET communication error. Printer Processor occurs.
J/P222 main PCB (ARCNET) No.06901-00008 ARCNET communication error. Processor occurs.
J/P223 Connects to the processor No.06901-00513 ARCNET communication error. Printer LASER occurs.
J/P224 control PCB (ARCNET) No.06901-00512 ARCNET communication error. LASER occurs.
J/P225 Inputs the power supply No.06136-00001 Exposure Advance Pressure Change Motor 1 operation error. occurs.
(+24 V, GND) from laser
power supply 3.
J/P226 Connects to the buzzer. The buzzer does not sound.
! Laser control PCB (37 series/LP7500/LP7600/LP7700/LP7900)

J/P1501 Connects to the laser unit. No.06073-00003 Synchronous Sensor error. occurs when printing is started.
J/P1502 Connects to the G-AOM No.06073-00002 Synchronous Sensor error. occurs when printing is started.
4. Troubleshooting
driver.
J/P1504 Connects to the laser unit. • When confirmed in Printer Information on Status Display, Laser temperature
control status does not change from Temperature control started for five minutes or
more.
J/P1506 Inputs the power supply (+5 The following symptom occurs when printing is started.
V) from printer power • No.06901-00512 ARCNET communication error. LASER occurs.
supply 5.
J/P1508 Connects to the G-AOM The following symptom occurs when printing is started.
driver. • No.06073-00002 Synchronous Sensor error. occurs.
• Unexposured prints are output.
J/P1509 Connects to the laser • No information is shown for Laser component information of Laser Operation
operation record PCB in the Record.
laser unit. • All of Laser Generation Accumulated Time, Laser Generation Count, Polygon
Mirror Total Operation Time, and Polygon Mirror Operation Count show 0.
J/P1510 Unused −
J/P1513 Connects to the printer I/F No.06194-00008 Laser Control PCB control error. occurs.
main PCB (LVPECL)
J/P1515 Connects to the laser unit. The following symptom occurs when printing is started.
• No.06076-00001 Polygon Mirror control error. occurs.
J/P1516 Connects the printer control No.06901-00521 ARCNET communication error. Printer ProcessorLASER occurs.
J/P1517 PCB (ARCNET).
J/P1519 Connects to the G laser No.06075-00007 G Laser control error. occurs.
driver.
J/P1520 Connects to the printer No.06087-00022 Laser Control PCB system error. occurs when printing is started.
control PCB.
J/P1521 Connects to the printer Printing is not started.
control PCB.
J/P1522 Connects to the laser unit The display keeps showing Temperature control started and does not change.
and connects the inner Via input check, Laser Unit Thermosensor and Inner Temperature is 0.0.
thermosensor.
J/P1532 Connects to the laser unit. • When confirmed in Printer Information on Status Display, Laser temperature
control status does not change from Temperature control started for five minutes or
more.
4202 3/11
4202

J/P1533 Interlock switch (printer top • When confirmed by Input Check, the interlock switch (printer doors 1 and 2) of the
cover) printer supply section turns on but the interlock switch (printer doors 1 and 2) of the
engine section turns off.
J/P1534 Unused −
J/P1535 Connects to printer I/O PCB • When confirmed by input check, the interlock switch (for printer doors 1 and 2) and
1 (24 V-3). interlock switch (printer top cover) turns off.
J/P1541 Inputs the power supply • When confirmed in Printer Information on Status Display, Laser temperature
(+24 V) from laser power control status does not change from Temperature control started for five minutes or
supply. more.
J/P1543 Connects to the G-AOM No.06073-00002 Synchronous Sensor error. occurs when printing is started.
driver.
J/P1551 Connects laser unit cooling Laser unit cooling fans 1 and 2, laser control box cooling fan, and the laser unit heater do not
fans 1 and 2, laser control operate.
box cooling fan 1 and the No malfunctions in the operations will occur on this condition.
laser unit heater.
! Laser control PCB (37HD series)
4. Troubleshooting
J/P1501 Connects to the laser unit. When the power supply is turned on, No.06237-00005 LD light source status error occurs.
J/P1502*1 Connects to the G-AOM No.06236-00012 Synchronization detection error occurs.
driver.
J/P1506 Inputs the power supply (+5 No.06901-00512 ARCNET communication error. LASER occurs.
V) from printer power
supply 5.
J/P1507 Unused −
*1
J/P1508 Connects to the G-AOM No.06236-00012 Synchronization detection error occurs.
driver.
J/P1509 Connects to the laser • No information is shown for Laser component information of Laser Operation
operation record PCB in the Record.
laser unit. • All of Laser Generation Accumulated Time, Laser Generation Count, Polygon
Mirror Total Operation Time, and Polygon Mirror Operation Count show 0.
J/P1510 Unused −
J/P1513 Connects to the printer I/F No.06194-00008 Laser Control PCB control error. occurs.
main PCB (LVPECL)
J/P1514 Connects to the printer I/F When printing has started, the error No.06902-00004 LVDS communication error. occurs,
main PCB (LVPECL) and then No.06087-00003 Laser Control PCB system error. occurs.
J/P1515 Connects to the laser unit. When the power supply is turned on, No.06076-00001 Polygon Mirror control error.
occurs.
J/P1516 Connects the printer control No.06901-00512 ARCNET communication error. LASER occurs.
J/P1517 PCB (ARCNET). No.06901-00513 ARCNET communication error. Printer LASER occurs.
J/P1519 Connects to the G laser No.06179-00005 B/G Laser Output Unit error. occurs.
driver.
J/P1520 Connects to the printer No.06087-00022 Laser Control PCB system error. occurs when printing is started.
control PCB.
J/P1521 Connects to the printer When the power supply is turned on, No.06087-00022 Laser Control PCB system error.
control PCB. occurs.
J/P1522 Connects to the laser unit The message Temperature control started is shown and the display does not change.
and connects the inner Via input check, Laser Unit Thermosensor and Inner Temperature is 0.0.
thermosensor.
4202 4/11
4202

J/P1532 Connects to the laser unit. • In Printer Information on Status Display, Laser temperature control status does not
change from Temperature control started for five minutes or more.
• When printing has started, the print stops at the inlet roller of the exposure advance unit
and paper exposure does not start.
J/P1533 Interlock switch (printer top • If Input Check is performed, Interlock Switch (Printer Top Cover) and Interlock
cover) Switch (Printer Door 2) of Paper Supply Unit turn off and Interlock Switch (Printer
Top Cover) of Exposure engine section turns off.
J/P1534 Unused −
J/P1535 Connects to printer I/O PCB • If Input Check is performed, Interlock Switch (Printer Top Cover) and Interlock
1 (24 V-3). Switch (Printer Door 2) of Paper Supply Unit turns off and Interlock Switch (Printer
Top Cover) of Exposure engine section turns off.
J/P1541 Inputs the power supply • In Printer Information on Status Display, Laser temperature control status does not
(+24 V) from laser power change from Temperature control started for five minutes or more.
supply.
J/P1543 Connects to the G-AOM No.06236-00012 Synchronization detection error occurs.
driver.
J/P1551 Connects laser unit cooling Laser unit cooling fans 1 and 2, laser control box cooling fan, and the laser unit heater do not
fans 1 and 2, laser control operate.
4. Troubleshooting
box cooling fan 1 and the No malfunctions in the operations will occur on this condition.
laser unit heater.
*1. If Printer Information of Status Display is confirmed, an error occurs when Laser temperature control status changes from Temperature
control started to Temperature control completed.
Closing the error message changes Laser temperature control status from Temperature control completed to Temperature control started.
! G laser driver (37 series/LP7500/LP7600LP7700/LP7900)

J/P1664 Connects to the laser control No.06075-00007 G Laser control error. occurs.
PCB.
J/P1665 Inputs the power supply (+5 No.06106-00001 G Laser light source status error. occurs.
supply 5.
! G Laser driver (37HD series)

J/P1663*1 Connects to the laser unit. No.06236-00012 Synchronization detection error occurs.
J/P1664 Connects to the laser control No.06179-00005 B/G Laser Output Unit error. occurs.
PCB.
J/P1665*1 Inputs the power supply (+5 No.06106-00001 G Laser light source status error. occurs.
supply 5.
! G-AOM driver (37 series/LP7500/LP7600LP7700/LP7900)

J/P1636 Connects to the laser control No.06073-00002 Synchronous Sensor error. occurs when printing is started.
PCB.
J/P1637 Connects to the laser unit.
4202 5/11
4202

J/P1638 Connects to the laser control No.06073-00002 Synchronous Sensor error. occurs when printing is started.
J/P1639 PCB. The following symptom occurs when printing is started.
• No.06073-00002 Synchronous Sensor error. occurs.
! G-AOM driver (37HD series)

J/P1636*1 Connects to the laser control No.06236-00012 Synchronization detection error occurs.
PCB.
J/P1637 Connects to the laser unit.
J/P1638 Connects to the laser control
J/P1639*1 PCB.
4. Troubleshooting
! Printer I/O PCB 1
J/P232 Connects to the counter. The counter stops operation.
J/P233 Connects to paper advance No malfunctions in the operations will occur on this condition.
section cooling fan 1 and the
quad magazine PCB
(option).
J/P234 Connects to printer I/O PCB Control box cooling fan 2 does not rotate.
3.
J/P235 Power supply (+24V) from No malfunctions in the operations will occur on this condition.
printer power supply 3
(without the optional
magazine)
Power supply (+24V) from
printer power supply 3 (with
the triple magazine installed)
Power supply (+24V) from No.06200-00001 Width Change Motor A2 operation error. occurs when printing is started
printer power supply 3 (with using magazine A2.
the quad magazine installed)
J/P237 Printer power supply 1, No.06136-00001 Exposure Advance Pressure Change Motor 1 operation error. occurs.
printer power supply 2,
printer power supply 3,
printer power supply 4
(when the quad magazine is
installed)
J/P238 Inputs the AC power supply No.06136-00001 Exposure Advance Pressure Change Motor 1 operation error. occurs.
from the Processor relay
PCB.
J/P239 Connects to the interlock • When confirmed by input check, the interlock switch (printer door 2) turns off.
switch (printer door 2).
J/P240 Connects to the interlock • When confirmed by input check, the interlock switch (printer door 1) and interlock
switch (printer door 1), switch (printer door 1 and 4) turn off.
interlock switch (printer
doors 1 and 4) (when the
quad magazine is installed).
J/P241 Connects to the laser control • When confirmed by input check, the interlock switch (for printer doors 1 and 2) and
PCB. interlock switch (printer top cover) turns off.
4202 6/11
4202

J/P242 Connects to the printer I/O No.06016-00004 Paper Cutter operation error. occurs.
PCB 2 and paper end sensor
B.
J/P243 Printer control PCB No.06137-00001 Exposure Advance Pressure Change Motor 2 operation error. or
No.06186-00001 Exposure Advance Pressure Change Motor 3 operation error. is
shown.
J/P244 Exposure advance pressure No.06186-00001 Exposure Advance Pressure Change Motor 3 operation error. occurs.
change motor 3
J/P245 Connects to the printer Printing is not started.
control PCB. On the Input Check display, Interlock Switch 1 (Printer Top Cover)Interlock Switch
(Printer Door 1, 2) shows OFF.
J/P246 Connects to the triple No.06210-00001 Paper remains in the Paper Supply Unit. occurs.
magazine PCB (option).
Connects to the quad No.06210-00001 Paper remains in the Paper Supply Unit. occurs.
from printer power supply 5
(+5V)
4. Troubleshooting
J/P248 Connects to exposure No.06137-00001 Exposure Advance Pressure Change Motor 2 operation error. occurs.
advance pressure change
motors 1 and 2.
J/P249 Connects to exposure No.06208-00001 Paper has jammed in the Paper Supply Unit. occurs.
advance motors 1 and 2.
J/P250 Connects to paper magazine No.06112-00001 Could not load the paper. Paper Magazine C or No.06112-00001 Could
motors B and C. not load the paper. Paper Magazine C occurs when printing is started.
(IL24 V-2) from printer
power supply 1.
J/P252 Connects to printer I/O PCB No.06101-00001 Paper Hold Motor operation error. occurs.
2.
J/P253 Connects to the triple No.06012-00001 Paper did not load. Paper Magazine A occurs when printing is started.
magazine unit PCB (option).
Connects to the quad No malfunctions in the operations will occur on this condition.
J/P254 Inputs the power supply No.06013-00001 Paper did not load. Paper Magazine B occurs when printing is started
from printer power supply 2 using magazine B.
(+36V)
J/P255 Connects to the CVP PCB. The CVP unit does not operate.
J/P256 Connects to paper advance No.06049-00001 Pressure Guide operation error. occurs.
motor 2.
J/P257 Connects to control box Control box cooling fan 1 does not rotate.
cooling fan 1.
! Printer I/O PCB 2

J/P258 Connects to the paper cut No.06016-00004 Paper Cutter operation error. occurs when printing is started.
motor.
J/P259 Connects to the paper hold No.06101-00002 Paper Hold Motor operation error. occurs.
motor and paper hold sensor.
J/P260 Connects to the paper supply No.06134-00002 Paper Supply Pressure Change Motor operation error. occurs.
pressure change sensor and
paper supply pressure
change motor.
J/P261 Connects to the cut home No.06016-00004 Paper Cutter operation error. occurs.
sensor and cut end sensor
4202 7/11
4202

J/P262 Connects to the printer No.06016-00004 Paper Cutter operation error. occurs.
control PCB.
J/P263 Power supply (IL5V) from No.06016-00004 Paper Cutter operation error. occurs.
the printer I/O PCB 1
J/P264 Power supply (IL36 V, No.06012-00001 Paper did not load. Paper Magazine A occurs when printing is started.
IL24V) from printer I/O
PCB 1
J/P265 Connects to paper advance No.06135-00001 Arm Unit 1 operation error. occurs when printing is started.
motor 1.
J/P266 Connects to the paper supply No.06135-00001 Arm Unit 1 operation error. occurs.
motor B/C and paper supply
arm motor (right).
J/P267 Paper supply motor A (when No.06012-00002 Paper did not load. Paper Magazine A occurs when printing is started.
the triple magazine/quad
magazine is connected)
J/P268 Paper supply motor (left) No.06135-00001 Arm Unit 1 operation error. occurs.
! Printer I/O PCB 3
4. Troubleshooting
J/P271 Connects to the lane select No.06140-00002 Lane Select Motor (Left) operation error. occurs.
motor (left).
J/P272 Connects to the lane select No.06141-00002 Lane Select Motor (Right) operation error. occurs.
motor (right).
J/P273 Connects to the paper The following error message is shown.?
advance arm motor (left) and • No.06138-00002 Paper Advance Arm Motor (Left) operation error. occurs.
paper advance arm motor
• No.06139-00002 Paper Advance Arm Motor (Right) operation error. occurs.
(right).
J/P274 Connects the paper advance No.06221-00003 Paper has jammed in the Paper Advance Unit. occurs.
motor 3.
J/P275 Input from printer power No.06141-00002 Lane Select Motor (Right) operation error. occurs.
supply 1 (LI24 V-3, LI24 V-
4)
J/P276 Control box cooling fan 2, Control box cooling fan 2 and inner cooling fan stop operations.
inner cooling fan
J/P277 Power supply (+24V) from Control box cooling fan 2 does not rotate.
the printer I/O PCB 1
J/P278 Connects to the paper Paper magazine lamp B/C does not turn on.
magazine lamp B/C.
J/P279 Connects to the printer No.06224-00003 Paper remains in the Processor loading unit. occurs.
control PCB.
J/P280 Connects to the printer No.06224-00003 Paper remains in the Processor loading unit. occurs.
control PCB.
J/P281 Connects to the paper end • No.06015-00002 Paper did not rewind. Paper Magazine B occurs.
sensors B and C. • No.06210-00003 Paper remains in the Paper Supply Unit. occurs.
J/P282 Connects to paper sensor 2 No.06224-00003 Paper remains in the Processor loading unit. occurs.
(left), paper sensor 2 (center)
and paper sensor 2 (right).
J/P283 Connects to the paper sensor No.06223-00001 Paper remains in the Paper Advance Unit. occurs.
1 and pressure guide sensor.
4202 8/11
4202

J/P284 Connects to zigzagging No.06211-00001 Paper remains in the Exposure Advance Unit. occurs.
correction sensor (left),
zigzagging correction sensor
(right), and exposure start
sensor, and exposure
advance pressure change
sensor 1.
J/P285 Inputs the power supply No.06224-00003 Paper remains in the Processor loading unit. occurs.
from printer power supply 5
(Vcc5)
J/P286 Connects to arm sensor (left) No.06138-00002 Paper Advance Arm Motor (Left) operation error. occurs.
and arm sensor (right). No.06139-00002 Paper Advance Arm Motor (Right) operation error. occurs.
J/P287 Lane select sensor (left) and No.06140-00002 Lane Select Motor (Left) operation error. occurs.
paper advance pressure
change sensor (left)
J/P288 Lane select sensor (right) No.06141-00002 Lane Select Motor (Right) operation error. occurs.
and paper advance pressure
change sensor (right)
4. Troubleshooting
! Triple magazine PCB
J/P295 Connects to the paper No.06012-00001 Paper did not load. Paper Magazine A occurs while printing.
magazine motor A.
J/P296 Connects to the paper Paper magazine lamp A does not turn on.
magazine lamp A.
J/P297 Connects to the printer door No.01047-00002 Close printer door. occurs when printing is started.
3 sensor.
J/P298 Connects to the paper All the magazine code sensors A turn dark.
magazine code sensor A.
J/P299 Connects to the paper end No.06210-00001 Paper remains in the printer section. occurs.
sensor A.
J/P300 Power supply from the No.06210-00001 Paper remains in the printer section. occurs.
printer I/O PCB 1
(VCC5, IL36 V-1)
J/P301 Connects to the printer No.01047-00002 Close printer door. occurs when printing is started.
control PCB.
J/P302 Unused -
! Quad magazine PCB

J/P295 Connects to the paper No.06201-00001 Paper did not load. Paper Magazine A occurs while printing.
magazine motor A.
J/P296 Connects to the paper Paper magazine lamp A does not turn on.
magazine lamp A.
J/P297 Connects to the printer door No.01047-00002 Close printer door. occurs when printing is started.
3 sensor.
J/P298 Connects to the paper All the magazine code sensors A turn dark.
magazine code sensor A.
J/P299 Connects to the paper end No.06210-00001 Paper remains in the printer section. occurs.
sensor A.
J/P300 Power supply (VCC5V) No.06210-00001 Paper remains in the printer section. occurs.
from the printer I/O PCB 1
J/P301 Connects to the printer No.01047-00002 Close printer door. occurs when printing is started.
control PCB.
4202 9/11
4202

J/P1700 Connects to the printer • No.06196-00002 Paper did not rewind. Paper Magazine A2 occurs.
control PCB. • No.06210-00004 Paper remains in the Paper Supply Unit. occurs.
J/P1701 Connects to the paper end • No.06196-00002 Paper did not rewind. Paper Magazine A2 occurs.
sensor A2. • No.06210-00004 Paper remains in the Paper Supply Unit. occurs.
J/P1702 Connects to the paper All the magazine code sensors A2 turn DARK.
magazine code sensor A2.
J/P1703 Connects to the paper No.06195-00001 Paper did not load. Paper Magazine A2 occurs when printing is started
magazine motor A2. using magazine A2.
J/P1704 Connects to the paper supply • No error message is shown even if printing with magazine A2.
motor A2. • When confirmed by input check, paper supply motor A2 does not operate.
J/P1705 Connects to the width No.06199-00002 Pressure Release Motor A2 operation error. occurs.
change motor A2 and
pressure release motor A2.
J/P1707 Connects to the pressure No.06199-00002 Pressure Release Motor A2 operation error. occurs.
change sensor A2 and width
change sensor A2.
J/P1708 Inputs the power supply • No.06196-00002 Paper did not rewind. Paper Magazine A2 occurs.
4. Troubleshooting
from printer power supply 1 • No.06210-00004 Paper remains in the Paper Supply Unit. occurs.
(+IL24V)
J/P1709 Supplies the power (+24V) No malfunctions in the operations will occur on this condition.
to printer I/O PCB 1.
J/P1710 Unused -
! CVP PCB
J/P500 Connects to the printer The CVP unit does not operate.
control PCB.
J/P501 Inputs power supply (+24 V) The CVP unit does not operate.
from printer power supply 3.
J/P502 Connects the dot head and The CVP unit does not operate.
ribbon advance motor.
! Printer power supply 1 (PS1)

J/P428 Power supply (AC200-240 No.06136-00001 Exposure Advance Pressure Change Motor 1 operation error. occurs.
V) from printer I/O PCB 1.
J/P422 Supplies the power to the
printer I/O PCBs 1 and 3
(+24 V).

J/P420 Supplies power (IL 36 V) to No.06013-00001 Paper did not load. Paper Magazine B occurs when printing is started
J/P421 printer I/O PCB 1. using magazine B.
J/P430 Power supply (AC200-240
4202 10/11
4202

J/P424 Supplies the power (+24V) Without the optional No malfunctions in the operations will occur on this condition.
to printer I/O PCB 1. magazine
J/P431 Power supply (AC200-240 When the triple magazine is
V) from printer I/O PCB 1. connected
When the quad magazine is No.06200-00001 Width Change Motor A2 operation error.
connected occurs when printing is started using magazine A2.

J/P1711 Power supply (AC200-240 No malfunctions in the operations will occur on this condition.
J/P1712 Supplies the power to the
quad magazine PCB (IL36
V-3)
4. Troubleshooting
J/P432 Inputs the AC power supply • When Printer Information of Status Display is confirmed, the messages such as
from the Processor relay Printer Operation Status and Laser Temperature Status are shown in gray.
PCB.
J/P418 Printer IF main PCB, printer
I/O PCB 1, printer I/O PCB
3, G laser driver, laser
control PCB and printer
control PCB
! Laser power supply (PS5)

J/P433 Inputs the AC power supply • In Printer Information on Status Display, Laser temperature control status does not
from the Processor relay change from Temperature control started for five minutes or more.
PCB. • Via input check, Interlock Switch (Printer Door 1, 2)/Interlock switch (printer top
J/P1615 Supplies power to the laser cover) is OFF.
control PCB and G laser • Via input check, Inner Temperature and Laser temperature unit sensor is 0.0.
driver PCB (GND)
J/P1614 Supplies power to the laser
control PCB and G laser
driver PCB (+24 V)
! Checking condition of wiring connection failure

This section explains the errors and symptoms seen when the power supply of this system is turned on with the connector of each PCB
unplugged (for example, the monitor is not turned on, the lamp does not light, the fan does not rotate).
IMPORTANT
• Symptoms that appear when the connectors of each PCB are disconnected are explained.
• For the optional PCBs, some of them are explained.
• If the system condition does not change even if the power supply is turned on with each connector removed from each
PCB, No malfunctions in the operations will occur on this condition. is shown in the tables.
• Several errors may occur at the same time with a single connector.
• The suffix number (description of PCB) of No. 6901 ARCNET communication error. may be different from the
explained one depending on the ARCNET communication feature.
4202 11/11
4203
Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring (processor)
Reference
☞ Processor control PCB ☞ Processor I/O PCB 1 ☞ Processor I/O PCB 2
☞ Processor relay PCB ☞ Processor power supply 1 (PS1) ☞ Processor power supply 2 (PS2)
☞ Drive motor driver PCB*1 ☞ Circuit breaker (NFB1) ☞ Earth leakage circuit breaker (NFB2)
☞ Earth leakage circuit breaker (NFB3) ☞ Earth leakage circuit breaker (NFB4) ☞ Checking condition of wiring connection
failure
! Processor control PCB

J/P510 Connects to the processor I/O The following attention message is shown.
PCB 1. • No.00500-00000 Add water to the Refilling Water Tank. occurs.
• No.00502-00000 Add replenishment solution to the replenishment tank. occurs.
• No.00503-00000 Empty the Effluent Tank. occurs.
• No.00515-00000 Set the Rack Stopper. occurs.
The following error message is shown.
4. Troubleshooting
• No.05508-00000 The processing solution level is too low. occurs.
• No.05532-00000 The Processing Solution Safety Thermostat has activated. occurs.
• No.05533-00000 The Dryer Safety Thermostat has activated. occurs.
J/P511 Connects to the processor The following attention message is shown.
relay PCB. • No.00506-00000 Close the Dryer Cover. occurs.
• No.00507-00000 Close the Processor Top Cover. occurs.
J/P512 Unused -
J/P513 Connects to the print sensors When prints are processed, No.05535-00000 Paper has jammed in the processor section. is
(left, center, and right) and shown.
dryer lane select sensor
J/P514 Power supply input from No.06901-00008 ARCNET communication error. Processor occurs.
processor power supply 1
(VCC5V) and processor
power supply 2 (+24V)
J/P515 Connects to the drive motor. No.05550-00000 Drive Motor has stopped. occurs.
(QSS-
3701/3702/3703/LP7500/LP
7600)
Connects to the drive motor No.05550-00000 Drive Motor has stopped. occurs.
driver PCB.
(QSS-
3704/3705/LP7700/LP7900)
J/P516 Connects to the temperature The following error message is shown.
sensor (CD, BF, STB) and • No.05519-00000 Thermosensor error. CD occurs.
dryer thermosensor
• No.05520-00000 Thermosensor error. BF occurs.
• No.05521-00000 Thermosensor error.STB occurs.
• No.05522-00000 Dryer Thermosensor error. occurs.
J/P517 Connects to the printer No.06901-00521 ARCNET communication error. Printer Processor LASER occurs.
control PCB (ARCNET)
J/P518 Connects to the printer No.06901-00008 ARCNET communication error. Processor occurs.
control PCB (ARCNET)
4203 1/7
4203

J/P519 Connects to the control strip When connecting the control strip auto loading unit, the control strip feed motor does not
connection PCB (option). operate.
J/P520 Unused -
J/P521 Unused -
J/P522 Connects to the processor I/O No malfunctions in the operations will occur on this condition.
PCB 2.
J/P523 Connects to the colorimeter When processing the setup prints, No.01556-00000 The Colorimeter Unit is not set. occurs.
Then, No.06555-00000 Set the Colorimeter Unit. is shown. Setup prints are output to the
print receiving tray (large).
J/P524 Connects to the order LED does not blink.
specifying LED PCB.
J/P525 Connects to paper sensor 1 Abnormal sound occurs in the colorimeter when the printer is started. When processing the
and paper sensor 2. setup prints, No.06554-00003 Calibration Plate advance error. occurs. Setup prints are
output to the print receiving tray (large).
J/P526 Unused -
J/P527 Unused -
J/P528 Unused -
4. Troubleshooting
J/P529 Unused -
J/P530 Unused -
J/P531 Unused -
JP1 Unused -
JP2 Unused -
! Processor I/O PCB 1

J/P670 Connects to the rack stopper No.00515-00000 Set the Rack Stopper. occurs.
sensor.
J/P671 Unused -
J/P672 Unused -
J/P673 Connects to the minute meter The minute meter does not operate.
(option).
J/P674 Connects to the processor The following error message is shown.
relay PCB and processor I/O • No.05508-00000 The processing solution level is too low. occurs.
PCB 2.
J/P675 Unused -
J/P676 Unused -
J/P677 Connects to the CD No.05511-00000 The circulation pump has stopped. CD occurs.
circulation pump (F, N and J
specifications only)
J/P678 BF circulation pump No.05513-00000 The circulation pump has stopped. BF occurs.
J/P679 STB1 circulation pump No.05515-00000 The circulation pump has stopped. STB1 occurs.
J/P683 Replenisher pump CD, BF, The replenisher pumps CD, BF and STB do not operate.
STB (N and J specifications
only)
J/P684 Unused -
4203 2/7
4203

J/P685 Connects to the refilling The refilling water pumps (CD-W, BF-W, STB1-W, STB2-W, STB3-W, STB4-W) and
water pump (CD-W, BF-W, cleaning pump 1 do not operate.
STB1-W, STB2-W, STB3-
W, STB4-W) and cleaning
pump 1 (N specification)
J/P686 Drive motor cooling fan, The drive motor cooling fan, exhaust fan, tank cooling fan 1, tank cooling fan 2, and tank
exhaust fan, tank cooling fan cooling fan 3 do not operate.
1, tank cooling fan 2, and
tank cooling fan 3
J/P687 Connects to the effluent float No.00503-00000 Empty the Effluent Tank. occurs.
switch.
J/P688 Replenishment level sensor The following attention message is shown.
(CD, BF, STB), Refilling • No.00500-00000 Add water to the Refilling Water Tank. occurs.
water tank level sensor
J/P689 Power supply from the The replenisher pump does not operate.
processor relay PCB
(AC24V)
J/P690 Power supply from processor The following attention message is shown.
4. Troubleshooting
power supply 2 (+24V) • No.00500-00000 Add water to the Refilling Water Tank. occurs.
J/P691 Unused -
J/P692 Unused -
J/P694 Connects to the processor The processor status lamp does not light.
status lamp.
J/P695 Connects to the conveyer The conveyor unit does not operate.
unit.
J/P696 Connects to dryer lane The following symptom appears when printing is started.
selection solenoid 1. • No.05535-00000 Paper has jammed in the processor section. occurs when normal
printing is performed. (If Paper Leading Edge Advance is valid)
• When performing the dairy setup, No.05552-00004 Dryer Lane Select Guide operation
error. occurs.
J/P697 Connects to the sorter motor, The following symptom appears when normal printing is started.
sorter home sensor, print full • The conveyer motor does not operate even though prints are output on the conveyer unit.
sensor, manual sorter switch,
• No.05534-00001 Print Sorter Unit operation error. occurs when prints are output on the
and manual sorter switch
conveyer unit.
lamp.
J/P698 Power supply from processor The following attention message is shown.
power supply 1 (VCC5V) • No.00500-00000 Add water to the Refilling Water Tank. occurs.
J/P699 Connects to the processor The following attention message is shown.
control PCB. • No.00500-00000 Add water to the Refilling Water Tank. occurs.
• No.00515-00000 Set the Rack Stopper. occurs.
4203 3/7
4203

J/P700 Unused -
J/P701 Connects to the signal lamp. The signal lamp does not light even if an error occurs.
J/P702 Unused -
J/P703 Unused -
J/P704 Connects to the paper guide No.05551-00005 Paper Guide operation error. occurs.
motor, paper guide open
sensor and paper guide close
sensor.

J/P903 Connects to the processor I/O • When performing the dairy setup, No.06554-00001 Calibration Plate advance error.
PCB 1 and processor relay occurs.
PCB. • When performing the output checks, the calibration plate advance motor, paper advance
J/P904 Connects to the calibration motor, pressure solenoid, and colorimeter cooling fan do not operate.
plate advance motor, paper
advance motor, pressure
4. Troubleshooting
solenoid, and colorimeter
cooling fan.
J/P905 Connects to dryer lane • When performing the dairy setup, No.05552-00005 Dryer Lane Select Guide operation
selection solenoid 2. error. occurs.
• When performing Output Check, dryer selection solenoid 2 does not operate.
J/P906 Connects to the processor • When performing the dairy setup, No.06554-00001 Calibration Plate advance error.
control PCB. occurs.
• When performing the output checks, the calibration plate advance motor, paper advance
motor, pressure solenoid, and colorimeter cooling fan do not operate.
! Processor relay PCB

J/P641 Power supply to the processor The replenisher pump does not operate.
relay PCB → TR1 →
processor I/O PCB 1.
J/P642 Input power supply jumper. Unconfirmed
J/P643 Connects to processor power All the systems do not start.
supply 1.
J/P644 Connects to the dryer fan. No.05533-00000 The Dryer Safety Thermostat has activated. occurs.
J/P645 AC power supply jumper Unconfirmed
(dryer fan)
J/P646 Printer I/O PCB 1, printer • No error occurs. The processor drive turns on, but the printer does not start.
power supply 5, laser power • Output device is not available. occurs when accessing Output device is not available..
supply and AC outlet.
J/P647 Unused Starter jumper
J/P648 Connects to the processor The following error message is shown.
control PCB. • No.05508-00000 The processing solution level is too low. occurs.
The following attention message is shown.
• No.00506-00000 Close the Dryer Cover. occurs.
• No.00507-00000 Close the Processor Top Cover. occurs.
J/P649 Connects to power supply Power supply cooling fans 1 and 2 do not rotate.
cooling fans 1 and 2.
4203 4/7
4203

J/P650 Connects to the processing The following error message is shown.
solution float switches CD, • No.05508-00000 The processing solution level is too low. occurs.
BF, STB1, STB2, STB3, and
STB4
J/P651 Connects to the interlock No.00506-00000 Close the Dryer Cover. occurs.
switch (dryer cover).
J/P652 Connects to the interlock No.00507-00000 Close the Processor Top Cover. occurs.
switch (processor top cover).
J/P653 Connects to the dryer safety No.05533-00000 The Dryer Safety Thermostat has activated. occurs.
thermostat.
J/P654 Connects to processor I/O The following error message is shown.
PCB 1 and processor I/O • No.05508-00000 The processing solution level is too low. occurs.
PCB 2.
J/P655 Connects to the drive motor. No.05550-00000 Drive Motor has stopped. occurs.
(QSS-
3701/3702/3703/LP7500/LP7
600)
4. Troubleshooting
Connects to the drive motor No.05550-00000 Drive Motor has stopped. occurs.
driver PCB.
(QSS-
3704/3705/LP7700/LP7900)
J/P656 Connects to processor power Power supply cooling fan 1 rotates, but both the printer and processor do not start.
supply 1.
J/P657 Connects to the dryer heater. The dryer heater does not turn on.
J/P658 AC power supply jumper
(dryer heater)
J/P659 Connects to the dryer heater.
J/P660 Connects to the dryer heater.
J/P661 AC power supply jumper
(dryer heater)
J/P662 Connects to the processing The processing solution heaters CD, BF and STB do not turn on.
solution heaters CD, BF and
STB
J/P663 Connects to the ground wire Unconfirmed
! Processor power supply 1 (PS1)

J/P791 Supplied power from the Power supply cooling fan 1 rotates, but both the printer and processor do not start.
processor relay PCB.
J/P792 Power supply (+5 V) to the
processor control PCB and
the processor I/O PCB 1.
Supplies power to the
processor relay PCB (+24 V).
4203 5/7
4203
! Processor power supply 2 (PS2)

J/P793 Supplied power from the The following error message is shown.
processor relay PCB. • No.05508-00000 The processing solution level is too low. occurs.
• No.05510-00000 Processor A/D conversion error. occurs.
• No.05519-00000 Thermosensor error. CD occurs.
• No.05520-00000 Thermosensor error. BF occurs.
• No.05521-00000 Thermosensor error. STB occurs.
• No.05522-00000 Dryer Thermosensor error. occurs.
J/P794 Power supply (+24 V) to the The following error message is shown.
processor control PCB and • No.06903-00002 Serial communication error. occurs.
• No.05510-00000 Processor A/D conversion error. occurs.
Supplies power to the
4. Troubleshooting
processor relay PCB (+24 V). • No.05508-00000 The processing solution level is too low. occurs.
• No.00500-00000 Add water to the Refilling Water Tank. occurs.
J/P795 Power supply (GND) to the The following error message is shown.
processor control PCB and • No.06903-00002 Serial communication error. occurs.
Supplies the power to the
processor relay PCB (GND) • No.00503-00000 Empty the Effluent Tank. occurs.
! Drive motor driver PCB*1

CN1 Supplied power from the No.05550-00000 Drive Motor has stopped. occurs.
(J/P770) processor relay PCB.
CN2 Power supply from the
(J/P771) processor control PCB.
CN3 Power supply to the drive The following symptom occurs.
(J/P780) motor. • No.05550-00000 Drive Motor has stopped. occurs.
CN4 • LED1 of the drive motor driver PCB blinks three times.
(J/P767)
*1. The drive motor driver PCB is installed only in the QSS-3704, QSS-3705, LP7700 and LP7900.
! Circuit breaker (NFB1)

Power supply from TA2 to TA3 All the systems do not start.
! Earth leakage circuit breaker (NFB2)

Power supply from TA2 to TA3 No error occurs under this condition. (The power supply to the dry heater turns to off.)
4203 6/7
4203

Power supply from TA2 to TA3 No error occurs under this condition. (The power supply to the dry heater turns to off.)

Power supply from TA2 to TA3 All the systems do not start.
! Checking condition of wiring connection failure

This section explains the errors and symptoms seen when the power supply of this system is turned on with the connector of each PCB
unplugged (for example, the monitor is not turned on, the lamp does not light, the fan does not rotate).
IMPORTANT
• Symptoms that appear when the connectors of each PCB are disconnected are explained.
• For the PCBs of the processor, the PCBs only for normal specifications are mentioned.
4. Troubleshooting
• If the system condition does not change even if the power supply is turned on with each connector removed from each
PCB, No problem occurs in this condition. is shown in the tables.
• Several errors may occur at the same time with a single connector.
• The suffix number (description of PCB) of No. 6901 ARCNET communication error. may be different from the
explained one depending on the equipped options, cable connecting position and/or ARCNET communication feature.
4203 7/7
4252
Diagnosis appendix: Symptoms result from blowout of fuse
Symptoms result from blowout of fuse (printer section/processor section)
Reference
☞ Laser control PCB (37 ☞ Laser control PCB (37HD series) ☞ Printer I/O PCB 1
☞ Printer I/O PCB 3 ☞ Quad magazine PCB ☞ CVP PCB
☞ Processor I/O PCB 1 ☞ Processor I/O PCB 2 ☞ Processor relay PCB
☞ Power supply ☞ Condition of checking for the blowout of
fuse
! Laser control PCB (37 series/LP7500/LP7600/LP7700/LP7900)

Fuse No. Symptom
F1 T3.15 A/125 V (protection of • No.06076-00001 Polygon Mirror control error. occurs when starting printing.
+24 V-1 input power supply • By Input Check, it is observed that Polygon Mirror Synchronous is Asynchronous in the
from laser power supply) exposure engine section. In addition, Polygon Mirror Frequency turns 0.
F2 T3.15 A/125 V (protection of • In Printer Information on Status Display, Laser temperature control status does not
+24 V-3 input power supply change from Temperature control started for five minutes or more.
from laser power supply)
4. Troubleshooting
• The laser control box cooling fan, laser unit cooling fans 1 and 2 are not rotating.
• By Output Check, turning the laser unit heater on in the exposure engine section does not
raise the temperature.
from laser power supply) • By Input Check, the following status is confirmed.
The display of Polygon Mirror Synchronous is Asynchronous in the exposure engine
section.
The display of Polygon Mirror Frequency is 0 in the exposure engine section.
The display of Laser Unit Thermosensor is 0 degree in the exposure engine section.
! Laser control PCB (37HD series)

Fuse No. Symptom
F1 T3.15 A/125 V (protection of • When the power supply is turned on, No.06076-00001 Polygon Mirror control error.
+24 V-1 input power supply occurs.
from laser power supply) • When confirmed by Input Checks, Polygon Mirror Synchronous and Laser
Synchronous Sensor of Exposure Engine Section turns Asynchronous. In addition,
Polygon Mirror Frequency turns 0.
F2 T3.15 A/125 V (protection of • When the power supply is turned on, No.06237-00004 LD light source status error
+24 V-2 input power supply occurs.
from laser power supply)
from laser power supply) • By Input Check, the following status is confirmed.
Polygon Mirror Synchronous and Laser Synchronous Sensor of Exposure Engine
Section turns Asynchronous.
Polygon Mirror Frequency of Exposure Engine Section turns Asynchronous.
Interlock Switch (Printer Top Cover) of Interlock Switch (Printer Top Cover) turns
OFF.
! Printer I/O PCB 1

Fuse No. Symptom
F32 T6.3 A/125 V (protection of • No.06136-00001 Exposure Advance Pressure Change Motor 1 operation error.
IL24 V-1 input power supply occurs.
from printer power supply 1)
4252 1/4
4252
Fuse No. Symptom

F33 T6.3 A/125 V (protection of The following symptom appears when the power supply is turned on.
IL24 V-1 input power supply • No.06137-00001 Exposure Advance Pressure Change Motor 2 operation error.
from printer power supply 1) occurs.
• No.06186-00001 Exposure Advance Pressure Change Motor 3 operation error.
occurs.
• No.06049-00001 Pressure Guide operation error. occurs.
F34 T3.15 A/125 V (protection of No malfunctions in the operations will occur on this condition.
+24 V input power supply
F35 T6.3 A/125 V (protection of No.06013-00001 Paper did not load. Paper Magazine B occurs when printing is started
IL36 V input power supply using magazine B.
! Printer I/O PCB 3

Fuse No. Symptom
F37 T6.3 A/125 V (protection of No.06138-00001 Paper Advance Arm Motor (Left) operation error. occurs.
IL24 V-3 input power supply
4. Troubleshooting
F38 T6.3 A/125 V (protection of No.06141-00002 Lane Select Motor (Right) operation error. occurs.
! Quad magazine PCB

Fuse No. Symptom
F1 T6.3 A/125 V (protection of No.06195-00001 Paper did not load. Paper Magazine A2 occurs when printing is started
IL36 V-3 input power supply using magazine A2.
F2 T2.0 A/125 V (protection of No.06199-00002 Pressure Release Motor A2 operation error. occurs.
! CVP PCB
Fuse No. Symptom
F25 T3.15 A/125 V (protection of The CVP unit does not operate.
+36 V input power supply

Fuse No. Symptom
F14 T6.3 A/125 V (protection of The following error message is shown.
24 V-2 input power supply • No.05532-00000 The Processing Solution Safety Thermostat has activated. occurs.
from processor power supply
2)
• No.00500-00000 Add water to the Refilling Water Tank. occurs.
F15 T6.3 A/125 V (protection of The following error message is shown.
24 V-3 input power supply • No.05508-00000 The processing solution level is too low. occurs.
2)
4252 2/4
4252
Fuse No. Symptom

F16 T3.15 A/125 V (protection of The replenisher pumps CD, BF and STB do not operate.
24 V-4 input power supply
2)

Fuse No. Symptom
F70 T5 A/127 V (protection of • When performing the dairy setup, No.06552-00005 Dryer Lane Select Guide operation
+24 V input power supply error. occurs.
from processor relay PCB 2) • When performing Output Check, dryer selection solenoid 2 does not operate.
! Processor relay PCB

Fuse No. Symptom
FL1, FL2, FL3, FL4 (T15A/250 V: This fuse has not been checked because it cannot be removed.
power supply surge protecting circuit)
F1 T15 A/250 V (protection of The dryer heater does not operate.
4. Troubleshooting
power supply for dryer
heater)
F2 T15 A/250 V (protection of All the processing solution heaters do not operate.
power supply for processing
solution heater)
power supply for BF heater)
power supply for STB heater)
F5 T5 A/250 V (protection of The CD heater does not operate.
power supply for CD heater)
F6 T5 A/250 V (protection of The BF heater does not operate.
power supply for BF heater)
F7 T6.3 A/250 V (protection of The STB heater does not operate.
F8 T8 A/250 V (dryer heater) The dryer heater does not operate.
F12 T6.3 A/250 V (dryer fan) The dryer fan does not operate.
F13 T6.3 A/125 V (DC +24 V The following error message is shown.
power supply protection) • No.05511 -00000 The circulation pump has stopped. CD occurs.
• No.05513-00000 The circulation pump has stopped. BF occurs.
• No.05515-00000 The circulation pump has stopped. STB2 occurs.
F14 T6.3 A/125 V (DC +24 V All the systems do not start.
power supply protection) The processor condition light blinks red.
The processor control box cooling fan rotates.
F15 T8 A/250 V (protection of The dryer fan does not operate.
! Power supply
For each power supply PCB, the fuse has not been confirmed because it is irremovable.
4252 3/4
4252
! Condition of checking for the blowout of fuse

This section explains the errors and symptoms seen when the power supply of this system is turned on with the fuse of each PCB
removed (for example, the monitor does not turn on, the light does not turn on, the fun does not rotate).
IMPORTANT
• Symptoms that appear only when the fuse of each PCB is blow out are explained.
• If the system condition does not change even if the power supply is turned on with each fuse removed from each
PCB, No problem occurs in this condition. is shown in the above table.
• Several errors may occur at the same time with a single fuse.
4. Troubleshooting
4252 4/4
4260
Diagnosis appendix: Checking the connection between the PC and printer
Checking the connection between the PC and printer
Check the connection from the PC side.
1. Start Command Prompt of Windows.

Start → Programs or All Programs → Accessories → Click Command Prompt in this order.
Example: The desktop display
4. Troubleshooting
G085185
The Command Prompt display is shown.
2. Enter ping command and the configured IP address.

Enter the printer IP address on the PC.
Enter ping + en quad + IP address.
Example: ping 192.168.100.200
Example: Command Prompt display
S063776
3. Press the Enter key on the keyboard.

Confirm that the printer of which IP address has been configured exists on the network.
4. Check the information on the display.

If the communication is normal, the following display is shown.
NOTE
• The value displayed on the screen varies depending on the environment.
4260 1/2
4260
Example: Command Prompt display
S063777
4. Troubleshooting
Example: If "Destination host unreachable." is shown
The communication is not normal. Check the following items.
(1) Confirm that the Ethernet interface cable has been correctly connected.
(2) Confirm that the settings of the IP address and Subnet Mask are correct.
(3) If the HUB (line concentrator) is used, confirm that the power supply of the HUB is turned on.
After checking these items, go to Step 1 to repeat the procedure.
4260 2/2
4302
Diagnosis appendix: Diagnosis flowchart
Laser temperature control status of Status Display does not change from
Temperature control started to Temperature control completed. [LASER]
• It takes about 5 to 8 minutes for changing the status from Temperature control started to Temperature control started even if the
laser unit is normal.
• For details about Laser temperature control status of Status Display, see ☞ 31100.
1. Confirm that the system is used in the environment of room temperature 15°C to 30°C.
2. Restart the system.
3. Check if the displayed temperature on Laser Unit Thermosensor goes up when turning on the laser
unit heater via Output Check.
Check if laser unit cooling fan 1/2 operate when turning on laser unit cooling fan 1/2 via Output Check.
☞ 35310
4. Check if the displayed temperatures of the B laser temperature sensor, R laser temperature sensor
and laser unit temperature sensor change via Output Check.
4. Troubleshooting
☞ 35210
NOTE
• Temperature of the laser unit heater, B laser heater and R laser heater is adjusted at the same time.
5. If there is a change in the displayed temperature, wait for a while. If the temperature does not change,
check the unit for faults.
Symptom Cause
☞ If temperature of the laser unit thermosensor is not within the range from The temperatures are not within the processable range of
15.0°C to 42.0°C the laser unit (15.0°C to 42.0°C).
☞ If the temperature of B laser thermosensor is not within the range from Temperature is not in the processable range of B laser
46.7°C to 47.3°C. (46.7°C to 47.3°C).
☞ If the temperature of R laser thermosensor is not within the range from Temperature is not in the processable range of R laser
46.7°C to 47.3°C. (46.7°C to 47.3°C).
! If temperature of the laser unit thermosensor is not within the range from 15.0°C to
42.0°C
1. Check if there is a wiring connection failure.

Wiring connection failure
Laser control PCB (J/P1522) ↔ laser unit Laser control PCB (J/P1541) ↔ laser power supply (+24 V)
2. Make a diagnosis referring to the displayed temperature on the laser unit temperature sensor.
Checking point Checking content How to check Failure part
Laser unit heater Laser unit heater resistance value Remove P1525 (connecting) and measure Laser unit (laser unit heater)
the resistance value between Pin 1 and 2. It
is normal if the resistance value is 15 ± 1.5
Ω.
Laser Unit Laser unit thermosensor resistance Remove P1526 (connecting) and measure Laser unit (laser unit
Thermosensor *1 value the resistance value between Pin 1 and 3. It thermosensor)
is normal if the resistance value is the same
as that in the list below.*1
4302 1/3
4302

Laser control PCB Laser unit thermosensor standard It is normal if the voltage between Pin 3 (+) Laser control PCB
voltage of P1522 and the ground is 1.0 V.
Power supply to the laser unit It is normal if the voltage between Pin 7 (+)
heater*2 and Pin 8 of P1551 is the following.
• When the heater is turned on: 24 V
• When the heater is turned off: 0 V
*1. The list below shows laser unit thermosensor resistance values by temperature.
TEMPER Resistance TEMPER Resistance TEMPER Resistance TEMPER Resistance

ATURE ATURE ATURE ATURE
5 23 kΩ to 25 kΩ 10 18 kΩ to 20 kΩ 15 14 kΩ to 16 kΩ 20 11 kΩ to 12 kΩ
25 9.2 kΩ to 9.8 kΩ 30 7.4 kΩ to 7.9 kΩ 35 6.0 kΩ to 6.4 kΩ 40 4.9 kΩ to 5.2 kΩ
*2. Check the status by turning on the Laser unit heater on Output Check.
☞ 35310
! If the temperature of B laser thermosensor is not within the range from 46.7°C to
4. Troubleshooting
47.3°C.

Laser control PCB (J/P1504) ↔ laser unit Laser control PCB (J/P1532) ↔ laser unit
2. Make a diagnosis referring the displayed temperature on the B laser unit temperature sensor.
B laser temperature Heater control voltage • If the voltage between pin 6 of J1532 Laser unit (B laser
control section and laser control PCB (GND) is less temperature control section)
than 24 V
• If the voltage between pin 5 of J1532
and laser control PCB (GND) is more
than 0 V and less than 0.8 V
• When heated: more than 0 V and
less than 0.8 V
• When it is off: 0 V
B Laser B laser thermosensor resistance Remove J1504 and measure the resistance Laser unit (B laser unit
Thermosensor*1 value value between Pin 8 (+) and 9 (−). It is thermosensor)
normal if the resistance value is the same as
the value in the list below.*1
Laser control PCB B laser thermosensor standard It is normal if the standard voltage between Laser control PCB
voltage Pin 8 (+) and 10 (−) of J1504 is 1 V.
B laser thermosensor measuring It is normal if the voltage between Pin 9 (+)
voltage and 10 (−) of J1504 is around 350 mV
under 28°C temperature.
*1. The list below shows B laser thermosensor resistance values by temperature.
TEMPE Resistance TEMPE Resistance TEMPE Resistance TEMPER Resistance

RATUR RATUR RATUR ATURE
E E E
4302 2/3
4302
! If the temperature of R laser thermosensor is not within the range from 46.7°C to
47.3°C.

Laser control PCB (J/P1504) ↔ laser unit Laser control PCB (J/P1532) ↔ laser unit
2. Make a diagnosis referring to the displayed temperature on the R laser unit temperature sensor.
R laser temperature Heater control voltage • If the voltage between Pin 3 of J1532 Laser unit (R laser
control section and laser control PCB (GND) is less temperature control section)
than 24 V
• If the voltage between Pin 2 of J1532
and laser control PCB (GND) is more
than 0 V and less than 0.8 V
• When heated: more than 0 V and
less than 0.8 V
4. Troubleshooting
• When it is off: 0 V
R Laser R laser thermosensor resistance Remove J1504 and measure the resistance Laser unit (R laser unit
Thermosensor*1 value value between Pin 1 (+) and 2 (−). It is thermosensor)
normal if the resistance value is the same as
the value in the list below.*1
Laser control PCB R laser unit thermosensor standard It is normal if the standard voltage between Laser control PCB
voltage Pin 1 (+) and 3 (−) of J1504 is 1 V.
R laser thermosensor measuring It is normal if the voltage between Pin 2 (+)
voltage and 3 (−) of J1504 is around 350 mV under
28°C temperature.
*1. The list below shows R laser thermosensor resistance values by temperature.
TEMPE Resistance TEMPE Resistance TEMPE Resistance TEMPER Resistance

RATUR RATUR RATUR ATURE
E E E
4302 3/3
4600
Diagnosis appendix: [F]
Replenishment cartridge installation section troubleshooting flow
The replenisher section door is open. Check the setting of the Interlock Switch (Replenisher Section
Door).
YES
NO
Remove the processor rear cover or open the replenisher section door.
NOTE
• If the replenisher section door does not open, unlock the door by inserting the driver through the door space.
See ☞ How to open/close the replenisher section door.
4. Troubleshooting
Remove the replenisher cartridge.
If the replenishment cartridge is in the lower position, move the replenishment cartridge setting section to the upper position in the Output Check, and
remove the replenishment cartridge.
Confirm that there is no foreign objects in the replenishment cartridge setting section.
See ☞ Replenishment cartridge setting section.
Confirm that the Light Lock Door Motor operates

normally in the Output Check.
Confirm that the replenishment cartridge position sensor is
normal.
Operating
Not operating
The operation sound of opening motor is heard. Confirm that the drive systems such as gear operate normally.
Yes
No
The replenishment cartridge opening motor or F replenishment I/O PCB is failed.
Perform recovery procedure 1 from the replenishment error.

☞ 4610
4600 1/2
4600
! How to open/close the replenisher section door

If the replenishment cartridge setting section is lowered and the replenisher section door is locked, insert the flathead driver into the
slits beside the replenisher section door, lift the lever, unlock it, then open/close the replenisher section door.
QSS-3701/3702/3703/LP7500/LP7600 QSS-3704/3705/LP7700/LP7900
Slit Slit
Lever
4. Troubleshooting
Replenisher section door
Replenisher section door

G085386
! Replenishment cartridge setting section

Confirm that there is no foreign objects in the replenishment cartridge setting section.
Replenishment cartridge setting section
P2RB
P2RA
P1R
G085933
4600 2/2
4610
Recovery procedure 1 from the replenishment error
YES Replenishment solution is left in the replenisher cartridge.

The replenisher cartridge is open.
Replenishment solution leaks in the solution tank.
NO
YES NO
1. Discharge all replenishment solution in the replenishment tank.

If the replenish cartridge is not open, perform Mixing ☞ 27550
Replenisher in F: Functions of Pump Output Amount Setting.
2. Attach the new replenish cartridge. After the problems are solved,
☞ 33003 perform Mixing Replenisher in F: Functions of Pump Output
Amount Setting.
☞ 33003
P1R (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor, P2RA
4. Troubleshooting
(Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor and P2RB
(Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor are all ON.
NO YES
• Add water until all the replenishment solution level sensors turn ON while checking the status of P1R (Upper) Replenishment Solution
Level Sensor, P2RA (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor and P2RB (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor at Input
Check.
The maximum additional water (ml)

P1R P2RA P2RB
3695 642.5 642.5
• Add water from the replenisher cartridge setting part to each replenishment tank.
See 4600 ☞ Replenishment cartridge setting section.
IMPORTANT
• When the replenishment solution level sensor turns ON, immediately stop adding water.
Adding too much water may cause the following errors.
• ☞ No. 05905[F]−0001P1R replenishment solution output amount/replenishment solution level management is abnormal.
• ☞ No. 05906[F]−0001P2RA replenishment solution output amount/replenishment solution level management is abnormal.
• ☞ No. 05907[F]−0001P2RB replenishment solution output amount/replenishment solution level management is abnormal.
After the problems are solved, perform Mixing Replenisher in F: Functions of Pump Output Amount Setting and initialize the
replenishment data.
☞ 33003
The printing process can be continued.
4610 1/1
4620
The solution levels (P1R/P2RA/P2RB) are even at the ### YES P1R (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor, P2RA
(upper) replenishment solution level sensor. (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor and P2RB
(Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor are all ON.
NO YES
NO
Add a small amount of water to turn ON all of the P1R (Upper)

Perform recovery procedure 3 from the replenishment error. Replenishment Solution Level Sensor, P2RA (Upper)
☞ 4621 Replenishment Solution Level Sensor and P2RB (Upper)
Replenishment Solution Level Sensor.
4. Troubleshooting
After the problems are solved, perform Mixing Replenisher in F: Functions of Pump Output Amount Setting.
☞ 33003
4620 1/1
4621
• To close errors such as ☞ No. 05912[F]Predetermined process amount was exceeded., drain all replenishment solutions using the
procedure below, then perform Mixing Replenisher. Otherwise, the error cannot be closed.
Procedure
1. Access the Input Check mode, and confirm that all replenishment solution level sensors detect OFF.
Maintenance → Extension → Maintenance → Input Check → Processor
All replenishment solution level sensors detect OFF.
4. Troubleshooting
M5476-00
2. If any of the P1R/P2RA/P2RB replenishment solution level sensors detects ON, drain all the
replenishment solutions from the P1R/P2RA/P2RB replenisher tanks.
QSS-3701/3702/3703/LP7500/LP7600 QSS-3704/3705/LP7700/LP7900
Hoses to drain replenishment solutions Hoses to drain replenishment solutions
To each hose, a sticker P1R/P2RA/P2RB or PSR is attached. To each hose, a sticker P1R/P2RA/P2RB or PSR is attached.
Hoses to drain working solutions Hoses to drain working solutions
3. Attach the new replenisher cartridge.
4. Perform Mixing Replenisher with all replenisher tanks empty.
• Although error messages such as ☞ No. 05912[F]Predetermined process amount was exceeded. are shown, ignore them.

Maintenance → Extension → Processor Settings → Pump Output Amount Setting → F: Functions → Mixing Replenisher
4621 1/2
4621
M5467-00
5. Completion
4. Troubleshooting
4621 2/2
4630
Taking countermeasures after the errors No.05916 to No.05921 occur
1. Errors No. 05916 to No. 05921 occur.
2. Remove the filter pipe of each processing tank, then push and sink the float of the processing solution float
switch with a stick to confirm the processing solution float switch moves smoothly.
Floats
4. Troubleshooting
Sticks
G069042
If the processing solution float switch does not move smoothly

• Check that each processing solution float switch is not soiled.
3. If the processing solution in a tank is found to be below the cutout of the sub-tank or the solution level
indicator, add the processing solution from the sub-tank.
Solution level check positions
Cutout Solution level indicator
G085934
4. Check if the errors recur.
Error recurs Manual No. No error Manual No.

Processing solution float switch ☞ 63280 Confirm each replenishment pump output ☞ 33003
amount again.
Processor relay PCB ☞ 66220 Confirm the output amounts of auto cleaning ☞ 33004
pump + each automated cleaning valve again.
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200 Replenisher pump ☞ 63280
Processor I/O PCB ☞ 66210 P1, P2 and PS automated cleaning valves
Processor power supply 2 ☞ 67400 Replenisher cartridge cleaning pump
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
4630 1/1
40500
Attention message: Processor
No. 00500[N]
Add water to the Refilling Water Tank.
Attention message release

YES
Condition
00000 The refilling water tank level sensor turns off.
Diagnosis
Failed part Manual No.
Refilling water tank level sensor ☞ 63290
Processor I/O PCB 1 ☞ 66210
Processor power supply 2 ☞ 67400
4. Troubleshooting
$ Symptoms due to wiring connection failure/symptoms resulting from blowout of fuse
Symptoms due to the wiring connection failure Symptoms of fuse blowout
− ☞ 4203 ☞ 4252
NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.
40500 1/12
40500
No. 00501[N]
The replenisher switch is turned on.

YES or automatic release
• The replenisher switch turns on by pressing the YES key.
Condition
00000 After the replenisher switch was turned off, a specified seconds of replenishment lack time has passed.
After the replenisher switch was turned off, a specified time has passed with the replenishment solution sensor
on.
After the replenisher switch was turned off, manual replenishment or output amount measurement was
performed.
4. Troubleshooting
40500 2/12
40500
No. 00502[N]
Add replenishment solution to the replenishment tank.

YES
Condition
00001 The CD replenishment solution level sensor turns off.
00002 The BF replenishment solution level sensor turns off.
00004 The STB replenishment solution level sensor turns off.
Diagnosis
Replenishment solution level sensor ☞ 63290
☞ 66210
4. Troubleshooting
Processor I/O PCB 1

− ☞ 4203 ☞ 4252
NOTE
40500 3/12
40500
No. 00503[N] [SM]

Empty the Effluent Tank.

• This attention message will be automatically closed when the effluent tank is emptied.
Condition
00001 The CD effluent float switch turns on.
00002 The BF effluent float switch turns on.
00004 The STB effluent float switch turns on.
00008 P2 + PS Effluent Float Switch turns on.
Check Point
1 Confirm the solution level of the effluent tank.
4. Troubleshooting
2 Check if the float of the effluent float switch moves up and down smoothly.
Diagnosis
Effluent float switch ☞ 63290

− ☞ 4203 −
NOTE
40500 4/12
40500
No. 00505
Remove the prints from the Print Sorter Unit.

• This attention message will be automatically closed when prints are removed.
NOTE
• While this message is shown, the sorter is not activated.
Condition
00000 The print full sensor of the print sorter unit turns DARK.
Check Point
1 Check that the print receiving tray and the print full sensor are not soiled.
Diagnosis
4. Troubleshooting
Print full sensor ☞ 63271
NOTE
40500 5/12
40500
No. 00506
Close the Dryer Cover.

• This message will be automatically closed when the dryer cover is closed.
Condition
00000 While prints are not being made, the interlock switch (dryer cover) turns off.
NOTE
• When the interlock switch (dryer cover) turns off, the drive motor, the dryer heater and the dryer fan will stop.
Check Point
1 Check if the dryer top cover and the dryer door are securely closed.
4. Troubleshooting
Diagnosis
Adjustment failure point Manual No.
Interlock switch (dryer cover) ☞ 63260

Processor relay PCB ☞ 66220

− ☞ 4203 −
NOTE
40500 6/12
40500
No. 00507
Close the Processor Top Cover.

• The attention message will be automatically closed when the processor top cover is closed.
Condition
00000 While prints are not being made, the interlock switch (processor top cover) turns off.
When auto cleaning is to be performed, the interlock switch (processor top cover) turns off.
When refilling with water is to be performed, the interlock switch (processor top cover) turns off.
NOTE
• The drive motor, the refilling water pump, the cleaning pump, and the exhaust fan will stop when the interlock switch (processor top
cover) turns off.
Check Point
4. Troubleshooting
1 Confirm that the processor top cover is securely closed.
Diagnosis
Interlock switch (Processor top cover) ☞ 63290


− ☞ 4203 −
NOTE
40500 7/12
40500
No. 00508
Paper remains in the processor. Are you sure you want to turn the drive off?

YES or NO
• Select YES to turn off the drive.
• Select NO to finish the print mode with the drive on.
Condition
00000 Although paper still remains in the processing rack or dryer rack, an attempt is made to turn off the drive.
NOTE
• Processing time of the processor varies depending on the specification.
Check Point
1 Check if all pieces of paper come out.
4. Troubleshooting
40500 8/12
40500
No. 00510
Attach the Print Conveyor Unit.

• This attention message will be automatically closed when the print conveyor unit is set.
Condition
00000 The conveyor unit sensor turns LIGHT in the standby status after the drive has stopped.
Check Point
1 Check if the conveyor unit sensor is soiled.
Diagnosis
4. Troubleshooting
Conveyor unit sensor ☞ 63271
NOTE
40500 9/12
40500
No. 00515
Set the Rack Stopper.

• This attention message will be automatically closed when the rack stopper is fixed.
Condition
00000 While prints are not being made, the rack stopper sensor turns off.
Check Point
1 Confirm that the rack stopper is securely placed.
Diagnosis
4. Troubleshooting
Failure in the attaching position adjustment of the rack stopper sensor ☞ 63290

Rack stopper sensor ☞ 63290

− ☞ 4203 −
NOTE
40500 10/12
40500
No. 00520
Sensors may be dirty.

YES
Condition
- The light source level is 255 when the sensor status changes from DARK to LIGHT during Print Sensor LED
Light Intensity Adjustment.

00001 Print Sensor (Left)
00002 Print Sensor (Right)
00008 Print Sensor (Center)
00016 Dryer Lane Select Sensor
4. Troubleshooting
Check Point
1 Clean each sensor using a blower brush.
2 Perform Print Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment in Functions of Print Sensor Adjustment.
See ☞ 33001.
Diagnosis
Print Sensor (Left) Print Sensor (Center) Print Sensor (Right) ☞ 63260
Dryer Lane Select Sensor
NOTE
40500 11/12
40500
No. 00521
Remove the prints from the sorter tray (large)

YES
Condition
00000 A print whose advance length is from 457.3 mm to 914.4 mm is output to the print receiving tray (large).*1
*1. This message is not shown if Long Length Print Ejection (36inch) is set to OFF in the Processor 1 tab on the Operator Selections display.
4. Troubleshooting
40500 12/12
40600
Attention message: Tablet Replenishment
No. 00600[J]
The Tablet Cartridge is empty. CD
No. 00601[J]
The Tablet Cartridge is empty.BF
No. 00602[J]
The Tablet Cartridge is empty. STB

• The message will be automatically closed when the cartridge is replaced.
Condition
Error message No. Condition
No. 00600-00000 CD Tablet Sensor 1 or 2 did not detect tablet even though the CD Drum motor was started.
No. 00601-00000 BF Tablet Sensor 1 or 2 did not detect tablet even though the BF Drum motor was started.
No. 00602-00000 STB Tablet Sensor 1 or 2 did not detect tablet even though the STB Drum motor was started.
4. Troubleshooting
NOTE
• Printing can be performed until the Reservoir Count reaches Drop Limit if Order Display→Processor Status→Change→Tablet
Drop Reservoir is set to ON. (Tablet Drop is not performed but water supply.)
Diagnosis
Tablet Sensor ☞ 63310
Tablet replenishment driver PCB ☞ 66500
NOTE
40600 1/7
40600
No. 00603[J]
Add water to the Water Supply Tank.

YES
Condition
00000 The SW tank level sensor turns off.
Diagnosis
SW Tank Level Sensor ☞ 63310
NOTE
4. Troubleshooting
40600 2/7
40600
No. 00604[J]
Add water to the SW/DW Tank.

YES
Condition
00000 The SW/DW tank level sensor turns off.
Diagnosis
SW/DW Tank Level Sensor ☞ 63310
4. Troubleshooting
NOTE
40600 3/7
40600
No. 00605[J]
Attach the Tablet Cartridge. CD
No. 00606[J]
Attach the Tablet Cartridge.BF
No. 00607[J]
Attach the Tablet Cartridge. STB

• This attention message will be automatically closed when you attach the tablet cartridge.
Condition
No. 00605-00000 The CD Cartridge Sensor turned LIGHT when you attempted to operate a drum or elevator.
No. 00606-00000 The BF Cartridge Sensor turned LIGHT when you attempted to operate a drum or elevator.
No. 00607-00000 The STB Cartridge Sensor turned LIGHT when you attempted to operate a drum or elevator.
4. Troubleshooting
NOTE
• Printing can be performed until the Reservoir Count reaches Drop Limit if Order Display→Processor Status→Change→Tablet
Drop Reservoir is set to ON. (Tablet Drop is not performed but water supply.)
Diagnosis
Cartridge Sensor ☞ 63310
NOTE
40600 4/7
40600
No. 00608[J]
Attach the Tablet Replenishment Unit.

• This attention message will be automatically closed when the tablet replenishment unit is set.
Condition
00000 Tablet replenishment unit interlock switch turns off.
Diagnosis
Blown fuses Manual No.
F25 Tablet replenishment driver PCB ☞ 66500

Tablet replenishment unit interlock switch ☞ 63310
4. Troubleshooting
NOTE
40600 5/7
40600
No. 00609[J]
The Tablet kit is empty.

YES
Condition
00000 All tablets of CD in a kit are dropped.
NOTE
• If all tablets of CD in a kit are dropped, Tablet Operation is to be carried out and tablets of BF and STB are to be dropped up to Drop
Limit/without Replenishment Limit.
4. Troubleshooting
40600 6/7
40600
No. 00610[J]
Empty the Effluent Tank.###

NOTE
• CD, BF or STB
The name of processing solution causing this attention message will be displayed in the second line of the message.
NOTE
• If the Effluent Float Switch turns on, all water supply pumps and cleaning pumps stops physically.
Condition
00001 The CD effluent float switch turns on.
00002 The BF effluent float switch turns on.
4. Troubleshooting
00004 The STB effluent float switch turns on.
Check Point
1 Check if the float of the effluent float switch moves up and down smoothly.
Diagnosis
Effluent float switch ☞ 63310
NOTE
40600 7/7
40700
Attention message: SM replenishment
No. 00700[SM]
Replace the Replenishment Package with a new one.P-#

YES
This attention message will be closed only when the replenishment package is removed. (You have to turn off the replenishment package
sensor once.)
Condition
00001 While replenishment solution sensor CD-A turns DARK, the remaining replenishment tanks are not refilled
forcibly.
00002 While replenishment solution sensor CD-B turns DARK, the remaining replenishment tanks are not refilled
forcibly.
00004 While replenishment solution sensor CD-C turns DARK, the remaining replenishment tanks are not refilled
forcibly.
00008 While replenishment solution sensor STB turns DARK, the remaining replenishment tanks are not refilled
forcibly.
4. Troubleshooting
00016 While replenishment solution sensor BF-A turns DARK, the remaining replenishment tanks are not refilled
forcibly.
00032 While replenishment solution sensor BF-B turns DARK, the remaining replenishment tanks are not refilled
forcibly.
NOTE
• When the tank is not refilled forcibly regardless of the SM Replenishment Setting in Machine Specification, these messages is shown.
When the following conditions, the tanks are not refilled forcibly.
SM Replenishment Setting Detecting condition of the replenishment solution sensor
ON The replenishment solution is not detected when the power is on.
The replenishment solution is not detected when the replenishment package is replaced.
The replenishment solution is not detected during output checks.
The replenishment solution is not detected while measuring the output amount.
The replenishment solution is not detected while initial replenishing.
Each replenishment solution in the replenishment package is not detected at the same time.
OFF Forced replenishment is not performed.
• A suffix number is indicated by the decimal number.
Check Point
1 Check that the replenishment solution sensor is not soiled.
Diagnosis
Sensitivity of the replenishment solution sensor ☞ 27830

Replenishment solution sensor ☞ 63300
SM I/O PCB ☞ 66600
NOTE
40700 1/6
40700
No. 00701[SM]
Attach the Replenishment Package.P-#

• When the replenishment package is set, this attention message will be automatically closed and attention message No. 703 Would you
like to initialize the remaining amount of the Replenishment Package? appears.
Condition
00001 Replenishment package sensor P-1 turns off.
00002 Replenishment package sensor P-2 turns off.
Diagnosis
Failure in the replenishment package sensor attaching position adjustment ☞ 63300
4. Troubleshooting
Replenishment package sensor ☞ 63300
SM I/O PCB ☞ 66600
NOTE
40700 2/6
40700
No. 00702[SM]
Add water to the Water Supply Tank.

YES
Condition
00000 The water supply tank level sensor turns off.
Diagnosis
Water supply tank level sensor ☞ 63300
SM I/O PCB ☞ 66600
NOTE
4. Troubleshooting
40700 3/6
40700
No. 00703[SM]
Would you like to initialize the remaining amount of the Replenishment Package?

YES or NO
• Select YES to bring up the message No. 0704: Press the [YES: Execute] to initialize the remaining amount of the Replenishment
Package.
• Select NO to return to the regular print display.
IMPORTANT
• If the replenishment package is replaced before it becomes completely empty, be sure to initialize the remaining amount
of the replenishment package.
• If the replenishment package is not replaced but attached again, the process will be continued without initializing the
remaining amount of the replenishment package.
Condition
00000 Before the replenishment package is completely empty, replenishment package sensor 1 or 2 turns off.
4. Troubleshooting
Diagnosis

SM I/O PCB ☞ 66600
NOTE
40700 4/6
40700
No. 00704[SM]
Press the [YES: Execute] to initialize the remaining amount of the Replenishment
Package.

YES or NO
• Select YES to initialize the remaining amount of the replenishment package.
• Select NO to return to the regular print display.
IMPORTANT
• If the replenishment package is replaced before it becomes completely empty, be sure to initialize the remaining amount
of the replenishment package.
• If the replenishment package is not replaced but attached again, the process will be continued without initializing the
remaining amount of the replenishment package.
Condition
00000 Before the replenishment package is completely empty, replenishment package sensor 1 or 2 turns off.
4. Troubleshooting
Diagnosis

SM I/O PCB ☞ 66600
NOTE
40700 5/6
40700
No. 00705[SM]
Replace the Replenishment Package with a new one.P-#

YES
This attention message will be closed only when the replenishment package is removed. (You have to turn off the replenishment package
sensor once.)
Condition
00001 While replenishment solution sensor CD-A turns DARK, the remaining replenishment tanks are refilled forcibly.
00002 While replenishment solution sensor CD-B turns DARK, the remaining replenishment tanks are refilled forcibly.
00004 While replenishment solution sensor CD-C turns DARK, the remaining replenishment tanks are refilled forcibly.
00008 While replenishment solution sensor STB turns DARK, the remaining replenishment tanks are refilled forcibly.
00016 While replenishment solution sensor BF-A turns DARK, the remaining replenishment tanks are refilled forcibly.
00032 While replenishment solution sensor BF-B turns DARK, the remaining replenishment tanks are refilled forcibly.
4. Troubleshooting
NOTE
• If the tank is refilled forcibly after SM Replenishment has been set via Machine Specification, these messages are shown.
• A suffix number is indicated by the decimal number.
Check Point
1 Check that the replenishment solution sensor is not soiled.
Diagnosis
Sensitivity of the replenishment solution sensor ☞ 63300

Replenishment solution sensor ☞ 63300
SM I/O PCB ☞ 66600
NOTE
40700 6/6
40900
Attention message: F replenishment
No. 00902[F]
Install the replenisher cartridge.

YES
IMPORTANT
• If the above attention message is shown, do not click YES to close it and continue the printing process without performing
the diagnosis below.
After a set number of prints are output, ☞ No. 05912[F] Predetermined process amount was exceeded. will be shown.
Then, printing cannot be performed.
• For FRONTIER-Printer Ver. 2.10 or later, and QSS-PRINTER Ver. 6.00 or later, if you close ☞ No. 00902[F] and continue making
prints (127 mm x 89 mm), the system operates as shown in the table below.
Condition If the message is closed
• 1 to 507 prints (QSS- ☞ No. 00902[F] will be shown again ten seconds later.
3701/3702/3703/LP7500/LP7600)
• 1 to 545 prints (QSS-
3704/3705/LP7700/LP7900)
• 507 or more prints (QSS- ☞ No. 00902[F] cannot be closed.
4. Troubleshooting
3701/3702/3703/LP7500/LP7600)
• 545 or more prints (QSS-
3704/3705/LP7700/LP7900)
Condition
00000 When performing the cartridge opening process, the Replenisher Cartridge Set Sensor is off.
For details of operation specification, see ☞ 57010.
Check Point
Check that replenisher cartridge is correctly set. -
Confirm the Replenisher Cartridge Set Sensor status via Input Check. ☞ 35220
Diagnosis
Replenisher Cartridge Set Sensor ☞ 63280
F replenishment I/O PCB ☞ 66800
NOTE
40900 1/13
40900
No. 00903[F]
Close the replenisher section door.

This attention message will be closed when the replenisher section door is close.
Condition
00000 When performing the cartridge opening process, the replenisher section cover is opened.
Check Point
Confirm that the replenisher section door is securely closed. -
Confirm the Interlock Switch (Replenisher Section Door) status via Input Check. ☞ 35220
Diagnosis
4. Troubleshooting
Interlock Switch (Replenisher Section Door) ☞ 63280
NOTE
40900 2/13
40900
No. 00905[F]
Install the new replenisher cartridge.

YES
IMPORTANT
3701/3702/3703/LP7500/LP7600)
3704/3705/LP7700/LP7900)
4. Troubleshooting
3701/3702/3703/LP7500/LP7600)
3704/3705/LP7700/LP7900)
Condition
00000 If all the sensors below detect OFF although 40 seconds has passed after the replenishment cartridge opened.
• P1R (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor
• P2RA (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor
• P2RB (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor
NOTE
• The cartridge installation section is raised, and the attention message appears.
Check Point
Check that an empty replenisher cartridge is not set. -
Confirm the Replenisher Cartridge Set Sensor status via Input Check. ☞ 35220
Diagnosis
• P1R (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor ☞ 63280
NOTE
40900 3/13
40900
No. 00906[F]
It is ready to replace the replenisher cartridge.

YES
Condition
00000 If this system is closed down and started with the Replenisher mixed by a cartridge open
NOTE
• If creating the replenishment solution is completed, this attention message is shown only once when the system starts up.
• When creating replenishment solution on the previous day, this message is shown while Start Up Checks are performed.
Replace an empty replenishment cartridge with a new cartridge in advance. When the solution runs out, replenishment solution will be
automatically created which will save you from stopping printing.
It is recommended that cartridges be replaced at the start up of the day.
Check Point
4. Troubleshooting
1 Set a new cartridge.
40900 4/13
40900
No. 00907[F]
Collect the waste solution.

Condition
00001 P1 Effluent Float Switch turns on.
Check Point
Confirm the solution level of the effluent tank. -
Confirm the effluent float switch status via Input Check. ☞ 35220
Diagnosis
4. Troubleshooting
• P1 Effluent Float Switch ☞ 63280
• P2 + PS Effluent Float Switch
NOTE
40900 5/13
40900
No. 00908[F]
Open operation was not completed correctly. Replenishment solution preparation will
resume.

YES
Condition
00000 The system is shut down with opening operation remaining incomplete, and the system is started again.
Check Point
1 Wait until the replenishment solution is created (opening operation) completely.
4. Troubleshooting
40900 6/13
40900
No. 00909[F]
Replenishment tank is empty. Cannot start the operation.

YES
Condition
Condition
When trying to measure the output amount or perform the initial replenishment if the replenishment solution level sensor for
replenishment tank is under the conditions below.

00001 P1R (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor: OFF
00002 P2RA (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor: OFF
00004 P2RB (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor: OFF
00008 PSR (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor: OFF
4. Troubleshooting
Check Point
Create the replenishment solution. -
Check each replenishment solution level sensors status via Input Check. ☞ 35220
Diagnosis
• P1R (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor ☞ 63280
• PSR (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor
NOTE
40900 7/13
40900
No. 00910[F]
Preparing the replenishment solution. One moment please . . .

YES
Condition
Model Condition
QSS-3701/3702/3703/LP7500/LP7600 While preparing the replenishment solution, the system has printed up to the maximum
number of printed sheets (approx. 507 sheets for 127 mm × 89 mm).
QSS-3704/3705/LP7700/LP7900 While preparing the replenishment solution, the system has printed up to the maximum
number of printed sheets (approx. 545 sheets for 127 mm × 89 mm).
Check Point
1 Wait until the replenishment solution is created (opening operation) completely.
4. Troubleshooting
40900 8/13
40900
No. 00912[F]
Replenishment solution was created. Initialize replenishment data and restart
replenishment.

YES or NO
• Select YES to initialize the replenishment data.
• When Mixing Replenisher is performed by mistake while the replenishment solution is created normally, select NO.
Maintain the status without initializing the replenishment data.
Condition
Condition
If all the upper and lower replenishment solution level sensors of P1R, P2RA and P2RB are turned on when starting the Mixing
Replenisher operation.
• When restarting the process without draining the replenishment solution from P1R/P2RA/P2RB after taking countermeasures against
replenisher section errors, attention No. 912 is shown if adding water to the replenishment tank and performing Mixing Replenisher
with turning on all the upper and lower replenishment solution level sensors (ON: the state of solution filled).
4. Troubleshooting
40900 9/13
40900
No. 00913[F]
Mixing Replenisher cannot be started.

YES
Condition
Condition
If the lower replenishment solution level sensors of P1R/P2RA/P2RB are on when the Mixing Replenisher is clicked

00001 P1R
00002 P2RA
00004 P2RB
4. Troubleshooting
NOTE
• If any one of the lower replenishment solution level sensors of P1R/P2RA/P2RB is on after clicking Mixing Replenisher and a
specified time has passed, ☞ No. 05923[F] occurs.
Countermeasure
1. Completely drain replenishment solution from the replenishment tanks of P1R, P2RA and P2RB. ☞ 27550
2. Perform Mixing Replenisher with each replenishment tank empty.☞ 33003
Check Point
Confirm the condition of # # # lower replenishment solution level sensors of each processing solution ☞ 35220
with Input Check.
Diagnosis
P1R (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor ☞ 63280
P2RA (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor
P2RB (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor
NOTE
40900 10/13
40900
No. 00914[F]
PSR is running out.
Countermeasure message
Add 12 liters PSR to the PSR replenishment tank.
YES
• There are two methods to make solution with PSR tablets. Although the ratio of water to tablets is slightly different between these
methods, it does not affect solution quality.
1. Dissolve three tablets in 12 liters of water, then replenish this solution into the replenishment tank.
2. Dissolve three tablets in 15 liters of water, then replenish 8 liters of this solution into the replenishment tank.
NOTE
• Even if the above attention message is shown, printing can be continued until the message ☞ No. 00916[F] PSR is empty. is shown.
• The above attention message starts condition check after Start Up Check is performed.
Condition
4. Troubleshooting
00000 • PSR (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor turns off.
• The power supply is turned on when PSR (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor is off.
NOTE
• Attention message No. 00914 is not shown while the automatic Daily Setup is performed.
Check Point
Add PSR. -
Confirm the PSR (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor status via Input Check. ☞ 35220
Diagnosis
PSR (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor ☞ 63280
NOTE
40900 11/13
40900
No. 00916[F]
PSR is empty.
YES
• There are two methods to make solution with PSR tablets. Although the ratio of water to tablets is slightly different between these
methods, it does not affect solution quality.
1. Dissolve five tablets in 20 liters of water, then replenish this solution into the replenishment tank.
2. Dissolve five tablets in 25 liters of water, then replenish 20 liters of this solution into the replenishment tank.
NOTE
• When the above attention message appears, printing process stops.
Condition
4. Troubleshooting
00000 • PSR (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor turns off.
• The power supply is turned on when PSR (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor is off.
NOTE
• Attention message No. 00916 is not shown while the automatic Daily Setup is performed.
Check Point
Add PSR. -
Confirm the PSR (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor status via Input Check. ☞ 35220
Diagnosis
PSR (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor ☞ 63280
NOTE
40900 12/13
40900
No. 00918[F]
Replenish PSR.
YES
IMPORTANT
3701/3702/3703/LP7500/LP7600)
4. Troubleshooting
3704/3705/LP7700/LP7900)
3701/3702/3703/LP7500/LP7600)
3704/3705/LP7700/LP7900)
Condition
00000 When performing the cartridge opening process, the PSR (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor is off.
Check Point
Add PSR. -
Confirm the PSR (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor status via Input Check. ☞ 35220
Diagnosis
PSR (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor ☞ 63280
NOTE
40900 13/13
41000
Attention message: Printer
No. 01026
Close the Printer Top Cover.

YES or automatic release.
• The message will be automatically closed when the printer top cover is closed.
Condition
00000 Interlock switch (printer top cover) turns off.
Check Point
1 Check that the printer top cover is securely closed.
Diagnosis
Interlock switch (printer top cover) ☞ 63050
4. Troubleshooting
Printer I/O PCB 1 ☞ 66020
Laser control PCB ☞ 66010
Printer control PCB ☞ 66000
NOTE
41000 1/7
41000
No. 01029
The measurement failed. Measure it again.

YES
If the message is shown during the auto setup or during the setup using the display module
1. If this error recurs, clean the advance rollers of the colorimeter using the enclosed cleaning sheet, and perform the setup again.
When the message is shown during the setup from the maintenance application
1. Confirm the message shown on the screen, and measure the test print again.
2. If this error recurs, clean the advance rollers of the colorimeter using the enclosed cleaning sheet, and perform the setup again.
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
− The test print paper type for measurement was not correct.
When measuring the daily setup test print, the density between steps did not rise consecutively.
− The Dmax of the measured daily setup print was lower than 0.9, and the daily setup Dmax data for 15 days were not ready.
4. Troubleshooting
− The Dmax of the measured daily setup print was lower than 0.9, and the daily setup Dmax data for 15 days changed
suddenly, not consecutively day by day.
− Even though the range of the Dmax is between 0.9 and 3.8, the correction value density was over 10 times as high as the
previous value when calculating the daily setup correction value,
− When calculating the daily setup correction value, the correction value density was 3 keys or more. In addition, minus
correction (print density has been risen) has been performed.
− When calculating the daily setup correction value, the total correction value (density), which started as soon as the initial
setup or paper specification registration setup was completed, is beyond the limit value. In addition, minus correction (print
density has been risen) has been performed.
IMPORTANT
• If any of the conditions above is met during Auto Setup at the startup checks or when performing setups using the display
module, the message ☞ No. 01029 is shown.
• If the setup is performed from the maintenance application, following message is shown instead of the attention
☞ No. 01029. (QSS-Printer: Ver. 6.01 or earlier, FRONTIER-Printer: Ver. 2.10 or earlier)
• The occurrence condition and failure diagnosis of The measurement failed. Measure it again. are the same as
☞ No. 01029. (QSS-Printer: Ver. 6.01 or earlier, FRONTIER-Printer: Ver. 2.10 or earlier)
QSS-Printer: Ver. 6.01 or earlier, FRONTIER-Printer: Ver. QSS-Printer (Ver. 7.00 or later), FRONTIER-Printer (Ver.
2.10 or earlier 2.20 or later)
The measurement failed. Measure it again. No. 01029 − 00000

The measurement failed. Measure it again.
HELP YES
NOTE
• See the setup print judgment flow at the daily setup. ☞ 56620
Check Point
1 Check that the test print is correctly placed in the colorimeter.
2 Check that the test print is correctly made.
41000 2/7
41000
3 Wipe the measurement area using a firmly squeezed damp soft cloth with a neutral detergent diluted with water. Then, dry it
using a dry soft cloth.
Measurement part
4 Check that the calibration plate is correctly inserted.
Between steps
G083195
Diagnosis
4. Troubleshooting
If the test print color density is normal
Countermeasure and location of problem Manual No.
Adjust the height of the colorimeter unit. ☞ 27470
Clean the advance rollers of the colorimeter with a cleaning sheet.
Adjust the colorimeter unit. ☞ 35100
Clean the calibration plate.
Replace the calibration plate if it is scratched. ☞ 27470
Colorimeter unit ☞ 27470
Problems may occur if the process of performing daily setup in the morning, then performing Emulsion Number
Change on the main paper when the air temperature has risen, is repeated for several days.
In that case, perform the paper specification registration setup, then perform the paper magazine registration setup
of other magazines.*1
*1. Counter measure for the system FRONTIER-Printer (Ver. 2.01 or earlier) and QSS-Printer (Ver. 6.00 or earlier).
If the test print color density is abnormal

Countermeasure and location of problem Manual No.
Laser unit ☞ 63080
Problems may occur when the processing solution (CD) has been replaced.
In that case, perform the paper specification registration setup, then perform the paper magazine registration
setup of other magazines.
NOTE
41000 3/7
41000
No. 01047
Close printer door.

• This attention message will be automatically closed when the printer door is closed.
Condition
00001 The interlock switch (printer door 1, 2 or 4) turns off.
00002 Printer door 3 sensor turns off.
IMPORTANT
• If any of printer doors 1, 2, 3, or 4 is open when processing a test print from the printer maintenance application or when
performing each adjustment in the Maintenance mode, the following message is shown instead of the message
☞ No. 01047.
• Close printer doors 1, 2, 3, and 4, and click OK to close the attention message.
4. Troubleshooting
• The occurrence condition and failure diagnosis of Close printer door. are the same as ☞ No. 01047.
Close printer door.
G085538
NOTE
• Some electrical parts stop operations when the interlock switch (printer door 1, 2 or 4) or printer door 3 sensor turns off.
Check Point
1 Check that printer doors 1, 2, 3, and 4 are securely closed.
Diagnosis
Interlock switch (printer door 1, 2, 4) ☞ 63050
Printer door 3 sensor ☞ 63050
Triple magazine PCB ☞ 66050
Quad magazine PCB ☞ 66055
Printer power supply 5 ☞ 66100

☞ 4202 − −
NOTE
41000 4/7
41000
No. 01074
Sensors may be dirty.

YES
Condition
Condition
When performing Paper Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment via Functions in Paper Sensor Adjustment, the light source level
of when the sensor status changes from DARK to LIGHT is 170 or more.
Suffix number (bit) Condition

00001 Paper end sensor A (SE6)
00002 Paper end sensor B (SE4)
00004 Paper end sensor C (SE5)
00064 Exposure start sensor (SE14)
00128 Paper sensor 1 (SE18)
4. Troubleshooting
00256 Paper sensor 2 (left) (SE25)
00512 Paper sensor 2 (center) (SE26)
01024 Paper sensor 2 (right) (SE27)
02048 Paper end sensor A2 (SE29)
Check Point
2 Carry out Paper Sensor Adjustment. ☞ 36000
NOTE
• In service mode, the LED light intensity value is shown on the Paper Sensor Adjustment display.
• After cleaning each sensor, perform Paper Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment again and check that the sensor LED light
intensity changes.
Diagnosis
Paper end sensor A (SE6) ☞ 63051
Paper end sensor B (SE4)
Paper end sensor C (SE5)
Paper end sensor A2 (SE29)
Exposure start sensor (SE14) ☞ 63070
Paper sensor 1 (SE18) ☞ 63090
Paper sensor 2 (left) (SE25) ☞ 63110
Paper sensor 2 (center) (SE26)
Paper sensor 2 (right) (SE27)
Quad magazine PCB ☞ 66055
NOTE
41000 5/7
41000
No. 01000−01132
Attention messages not explained in the Service Manual
Condition
IMPORTANT
• Attention messages not explained in this Service Manual are listed in the table.
For corrective actions, see the Troubleshooting Manual, EZ Controller Troubleshooting Manual and EZ Controller
Service Manual.
See the EZ Controller Troubleshooting Manual.
Attention message table
No. 01012 The print channel is not set. Confirm the print channel.
No. 01018 Would you like to stop processing?
No. 01032 One moment please. . .
No. 01040 Press the [ORDER] key.
No. 01048 Press the [ORDER] key. Wait until output has completed.
4. Troubleshooting
No. 01050 Additional Picture CD's cannot be made in this order. Press the [ORDER] key.
No. 01079 If you would like to make a Picture CD, using the current data, press the [ORDER] key.
No. 01080 Unable to accept additional processing at this time. Press the [ORDER] key.
No. 01095 Unable to accept additional processing at this time.
For details, see the Troubleshooting Manual.

No. 01000 The Paper Magazine is out of paper. Paper Magazine A
No. 01001 The Paper Magazine is out of paper. Paper Magazine B
No. 01002 Would you like to feed the leading edge of paper? Paper Magazine A
No. 01003 Would you like to feed the leading edge of paper? Paper Magazine B
No. 01004 Attach the Paper Magazine. Paper Magazine A
No. 01005 Attach the Paper Magazine. Paper Magazine B
No. 01047 Close printer door.
No. 01052 The Paper Magazine is out of paper. Paper Magazine C
No. 01053 Would you like to feed the leading edge of paper? Paper Magazine C
No. 01067 Attach the Paper Magazine. Paper Magazine C
No. 01083 The Paper Magazine is out of paper. Paper Magazine A2
No. 01084 Would you like to feed the leading edge of paper? Paper Magazine A2
No. 01086 Would you like to feed the leading edge of paper? Paper Magazine A
No. 01088 Attach the Paper Magazine. Paper Magazine A2
No. 01096 Change the Paper Magazine.
No. 01104 The Paper Magazine is out of paper. Paper Magazine B
No. 01105 The Paper Magazine is out of paper. Paper Magazine C
No. 01106 The Paper Magazine is out of paper. Paper Magazine A2
No. 01110 The Paper Magazine is out of paper.
No. 01112 Attach the Paper Magazine. Paper Magazine B
No. 01113 Attach the Paper Magazine. Paper Magazine C
41000 6/7
41000

No. 01114 Attach the Paper Magazine. Paper Magazine A2
No. 01118 Change the Paper Magazine.
No. 01121 Which paper magazine would you like to print with?
No. 01124 Would you like to execute the Emulsion Number Change Setup? Paper Magazine A
No. 01125 Would you like to execute the Emulsion Number Change Setup? Paper Magazine B
No. 01126 Would you like to execute the Emulsion Number Change Setup? Paper Magazine C
No. 01127 Would you like to execute the Emulsion Number Change Setup? Paper Magazine A2
No. 01128 Would you like to execute the Emulsion Number Change Setup? Paper Magazine A
No. 01131 Printing is paused to switch the paper developing time.
No. 01132 The Paper Magazine is out of paper.
NOTE
• In the Attention message table, attention message numbers that are not currently used may be listed.
4. Troubleshooting
41000 7/7
41300
Attention message: Scanner/ Film Carrier
No. 01302−01454
Condition
IMPORTANT
For corrective actions, see the EZ Controller Service Manual, Scanner Service Manual, Connection Unit Service
Manual and Troubleshooting Manual (scanner).
See the EZ Controller Service Manual.
No. 01302 Would you like to stop scanning?
No. 01456 Could not start the scanner.
No. 01457 The scanner has canceled processing. Processing will quit.
See the Scanner Service Manual.
4. Troubleshooting
No. 01305 Photometry Section may be dirty.
No. 01306 Update the light source. If film remains in the Film Carrier, remove it.
No. 01313 The Focus Adjustment was not completed yet.
No. 01314 Light source evenness is out of allowable range.
No. 01315 LED Light Source temperature is being adjusted. process cannot be continued.
No. 01316 Focus Adjustment failed.
No. 01317 Failed to perform the Scan Position Auto Correction.
No. 01318 Close the Scanner Unit Cover.
No. 01319 Scanner type was changed. The system will be restarted.
No. 01320 There may be dust on the AFC opening.
NOTE
No. 01400 Lock the Film Carrier.
No. 01401 Attach the Film Carrier.
No. 01402 Attach the 135/240 AFC.
No. 01303 Undeveloped cartridge. Cannot process.
No. 01404 The IX frame data is incomplete.
No. 01405 Remove the 135 film from the Film Carrier.
No. 01409 Set the lane for the Film Carrier.
No. 01410 Confirm the film stop position in the Film Carrier.
No. 01412 The film is upside down. Would you like to continue processing?
No. 01413 Input the frame number
No. 01414 The FID number was not detected.
No. 01416 Select the 240 lane.
No. 01417 Close the Mount Insertion Cover.
No. 01421 Confirm the stop position of all the frames to be processed.
41300 1/2
41300

No. 01422 Select the 135 lane.
No. 01423 Execute Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment. Remove the film from the Film Carrier.
No. 01424 Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment is being executed.
No. 01425 Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment is complete.
No. 01426 Attach the 110 AFC.
No. 01427 Execute Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment. If film remains in the Film Carrier, remove it.
No. 01428 Remove the mount from the Film Carrier.
No. 01429 Make sure that the mount is placed correctly.
No. 01433 Attach the AMC.
No. 01435 Insertion direction of film is different. Insert the film from the rear end (end with largest frame number).
No. 01438 Set the attachment.
No. 01439 Light Source was not updated. Would you like to scan?
NOTE
See the Connection Unit Service Manual.
4. Troubleshooting
No. 01450 Attach the Connecting Unit.
No. 01451 Remove the film from the Connecting Unit.
No. 01452 Film Processor was not detected.
No. 01454 Close Film Advance Guides 1 and 2.
No. 01455 Remove the film from the Negative Stocker.
NOTE
No. 01458 Attach the MFC.
No. 01459 Set the Adjustment Attachment.
No. 01460 The film advance section may be soiled. At the end of the daily operation (on the Close Down Checks display),clean the
film advance section using the cleaning leader.
For details, see the Troubleshooting Manual (scanner).
NOTE
41300 2/2
41500
Attention message: Disk/Media
Attention message: Disk/Media
No. 01501−01549
See the EZ Controller Troubleshooting Manual for Corrective action of Attention
message.
Condition
IMPORTANT
See the EZ Controller Troubleshooting Manual for Corrective action of Attention message.
Attention message (Storage Media)
No. 01501 The media is write protected.
No. 01502 Replace the media.
No. 01503 The appropriate file was not found.
No. 01508 There are some files that could not get written to the media. Would you like to stop processing?
No. 01510 Read the data. Set the media.
4. Troubleshooting
No. 01511 Write the data. Set the media.
No. 01512 Data was not read from the media.
No. 01513 Data was not written to the media. Format the media?
No. 01515 Data is too large to write.
No. 01516 Data is too large to read.
No. 01517 Invalid image format. Failed to read.
No. 01519 Data has been written to this media. Would you like to delete all the written files?
No. 01520 Select the template.
No. 01521 Template information does not match to make the Album Print.
No. 01522 Are you sure to print the previous frame except selected one?
No. 01523 It was not registered as an option.
No. 01528 Registered Print Type of Print Channel is not for normal printing.
No. 01529 Failed to read the bar code.
No. 01530 The data was not written to the Network Folder. Make sure a Network Folder exists.
No. 01531 The data was not written to the Network Folder. Make sure the Network is connected.
No. 01533 Data was saved to the storage media.
No. 01534 Data was not written to the Hard Disk. Would you like to delete the image file(s)?
No. 01536 The data has already been written to this media. Format this media?
No. 01539 The data has already been written to this media. Set a new media.
No. 01540 Data could not be written to the media. Confirm the media drive setting.
No. 01542 The same order number data already exists. Would you like to overwrite?
No. 01543 This file is CMYK data. Color cannot be converted correctly. Would you like to read the data?
No. 01545 The image size aspect ratio is not correct. Data was not written.
No. 01546 Data could not be written to the media. Confirm that the media capacity matches the Media Capacity Setting.
No. 01547 Data was saved to the storage media. Remove the media.
No. 01548 Hard disk is full. Would you like to delete the image file(s)?
No. 01549 Data is too small to read.
NOTE
41500 1/1
41550
Attention message: Colorimeter
No. 01552
The paper in the Colorimeter is too short. It cannot be measured.

YES
Condition
00001 While feeding test print in the colorimeter unit, paper sensor 1 turned DARK. After that, paper sensor 1 turned
LIGHT before advancing a specified amount of paper.
00002 While feeding test print in the colorimeter unit, paper sensors 1 and 2 turned DARK. After that, paper sensor 1
turned LIGHT before advancing a specified amount of paper.
NOTE
• See the setup print color measuring operation flow. ☞ 56610
Check Point
1 Check that a short test print has not been inserted.
4. Troubleshooting
2 Carry out each correction via Colorimeter Unit Adjustment.
Diagnosis
Paper sensor 1 or 2 ☞ 63318
Paper advance motor
NOTE
41550 1/3
41550
No. 01555
The calibration plate data is out of range.

YES
Condition
00000 When calibrating the colorimeter, the difference between the two photometry values obtained by the calibration
plate measurements at the 9 mm point (black position) and 18 mm point (white position) from the leading end is
100 or less.
NOTE
• See the setup print judgment operation flow. ☞ 56620
Check Point
1 Wipe the measurement area using a firmly squeezed damp soft cloth with a neutral detergent diluted with water. Then, dry it
using a dry soft cloth.
4. Troubleshooting
Measurement part
2 Check that the calibration plate is correctly inserted.

3 Carry out each correction via Colorimeter Unit Adjustment.
IMPORTANT
• Check if there is no dirt on the calibration plate, insert it properly, then calibrate the colorimeter unit again.
If the same attention message appears again, perform Updating the Calibration Plate Data.
☞ 27460
• If the same attention message appears after Updating the Calibration Plate Data, follow the diagnosis below.
Diagnosis
Adjustment failure
Adjust the height of the colorimeter unit. ☞ 27470
Adjust the colorimeter unit. ☞ 35100
For defective parts
Replace the calibration plate if it is scratched. ☞ 27460
Replace the colorimeter unit in the case of the colorimeter unit failure.

NOTE
41550 2/3
41550
No. 01556
The Colorimeter Unit is not set.

YES
Condition
00000 The colorimeter unit is not detected while it does not operate or communicate.
Check Point
1 Confirm that the colorimeter unit is correctly attached.
Diagnosis
4. Troubleshooting

− ☞ 4203 −
NOTE
41550 3/3
41620
Attention message: NMC/Printers in common
No. 01750
Communication with the printer failed. The printer may not be active, or the LAN cable
may not be connected.

Retry or Continue
• If Retry is selected, the system starts connecting maintenance application and printer I/F main PCB again.
If the communication fails, the same attention is shown.
• Select Continue to stop the process.
Condition
00000 The communication between the printer maintenance application and printer I/F main PCB failed.
Check Point
1 Restart the computer and printer. -
2 Confirm the connection of the LAN cable. ☞ 35955
4. Troubleshooting
☞ 4260
Diagnosis
Countermeasure Manual No.
• Confirm the connection of the LAN cable. -
☞ 35955☞ 4260
• Confirm that the settings of the IP address and the Subnet Mask are correct.
☞ 66005
• This attention message may occur if the ARCNET communication status is abnormal.
• Confirm the ARCNET communication status on the Version Check display.
☞ 35500
• Confirm the ARCNET communication path.
☞ 50520
• For details about the diagnosis of ARCNET communication error, see ☞ 35940.

Printer I/F main PCB ☞ 66005
PC -

☞ 4202 − −
NOTE
41620 1/12
41620
No. 01751
There was a time difference of more than 2 minutes between the clocks of printer and
PC. The printer clock was adjusted to match the PC clock.

YES
The attention message is closed.
Condition
00000 If time difference between the printer timer and operation computer was two minutes or more, and the timer
setting of the printer was changed to that of the operation computer.
NOTE
• The error above appears for the FRONTIER-Printer only.
4. Troubleshooting
41620 2/12
41620
No. 01753
Printer is not ready. Start the printer.

• While the close down checks is performed
1. Click YES.
2. The close down checks is canceled.
• After the close down checks is performed
1. Click YES.
2. Start this system.
Condition
00000 This attention message is shown when the operation computer inquires whether the printer is ready to process or
not while the close down checks is performed or after it is finished.
4. Troubleshooting
41620 3/12
41620
No. 01754
Profile data registered to the printer is not compatible with that of the application.

YES
Condition
00000 If the profile data has no compatibility when connecting the NKC maintenance application to the OEM printer.
Check Point
1 Confirm the profile data. -
4. Troubleshooting
41620 4/12
41620
No. 01756
Printer profile versions are inconsistent.

YES
Condition
00000 When the power supply is turned on, the profile version is different between the printer I/F main PCB and
operation computer.
Check Point
Countermeasure
• Condition 1
If the latest profile CD was installed, and the profile version is different between the operation PC and printer:
Upgrade the profile version of the printer processor to Ver. 2.
Pattern 1
4. Troubleshooting
Example 1 Operation PC Printer
(Ver. 2) (Ver. 1.5)
Corrective action for condition 1 and pattern 1

1. Perform the Daily Setup from the Maintenance Application.
• Condition 2
If the profile version of newly added printer 2 is higher than those of the operation PC and already connected printer 1:
Upgrade to the later Ver. 2.
Pattern 2
Example 2 Operation PC Printer 1
(Ver. 1.5) (Ver. 1.5)
Printer 2
Newly added printer
(Ver. 2)

1. Install the profile CD of Ver. 2 to the operation PC.*1
2. Perform the Daily Setup of printer 1 from the Maintenance Application.
• Condition 3
If the profile version of newly added printer 2 is lower than those of the operation PC and already connected printer 1:
Upgrade to the Ver. 1.5.
Pattern 3
(Ver. 1.5) (Ver. 1.5)
Printer 2
Newly added printer
Ver. 1

1. Perform the Daily Setup of printer 2 from the Maintenance Application.
*1. For the LP7500/LP7600/LP7700/LP7900, install the CD (SYSTEM PROGRAM KIT) supplied with each printer.
Diagnosis
41620 5/12
41620
NOTE
4. Troubleshooting
41620 6/12
41620
No. 01757
Execute the startup checks.

1. Click YES.
2. Perform the start up checks.
Condition
00000 This attention message is shown when the operation computer inquiries something even though the start up
checks has not been finished.
4. Troubleshooting
41620 7/12
41620
No. 01758
Maintenance is proceeding. Close the Maintenance screen.

1. Click YES.
Condition
00000 This attention message is shown when the operation PC inquires whether the printer is ready to process while the
maintenance display is used.
IMPORTANT
• The attention is shown only for the FRONTIER-Printer.
4. Troubleshooting
41620 8/12
41620
No. 01759
Adjusting the temperature. One moment please.

1. Click YES.
Condition
00000 This message is shown when the operation PC inquires whether the printer is ready to process while the
temperature of the laser or processor is adjusted.
IMPORTANT
4. Troubleshooting
41620 9/12
41620
No. 01760
Installation is proceeding. One moment please.

1. Click YES.
Condition
00000 This attention message is shown when the operation PC inquires whether the printer is ready to process or not
while the printer is being upgraded.
IMPORTANT
4. Troubleshooting
41620 10/12
41620
No. 01761
Printer is offline. Confirm that the circuit breaker of the printer is ON and that the
printer is connected correctly.

1. Click YES.
Condition
00000 This attention message is shown when the operation PC inquires whether the printer is ready to process or not in
the condition that the operation PC and printer cannot communicate.
IMPORTANT
Check Point
4. Troubleshooting
1 Restart the computer and printer.
Diagnosis
Countermeasure Manual No.
• Confirm the connection of the LAN cable. -
☞ 35955☞ 4260

Hard disk -
NOTE
41620 11/12
41620
No. 01621−01722
message.
Condition
IMPORTANT
Attention message (NMC)
No. 01637 Print Channel was not set. The order was not accepted.
No. 01638 Print Type in the Print Channel Setting is not Normal Print. The order was not accepted.
No. 01639 Failed to read the DPOF file. The order was not accepted.
4. Troubleshooting
No. 01644 Exif Information was not read.
No. 01645 Data is too large to read.
No. 01646 Invalid image format. Failed to read.
No. 01649 The Aspect Ratio of image size is incorrect. Failed to write.
No. 01650 Data is too small to read.
No. 01658 The Picture CD could not be created because there are more frames than can be saved.
No. 01702 Meida is being written. One moment please. . .
No. 01719 New software has been received. Would you like to upgrade the software?
No. 01720 E-mail has received.
No. 01723 Uploading the setting data. One moment please. . .
No. 01724 %s is running.
No. 01725 Failed to download the backup data.
NOTE
41620 12/12
41800
Attention message: Software upgrade
No. 01801
Execute software upgrade.

YES
Condition
- Although the version of each control PCB is checked when the power supply is turned on, it is not correct.
Suffix number PCB

(bit)
00001 Printer control PCB
00008 Processor control PCB
00512 Laser control PCB
NOTE
• The name of PCB for which the attention occurred is shown in the second line of the message.
4. Troubleshooting
• Perform diagnosis following the reference of each PCB below.
Check Point
1 Upgrade the software. ☞ 35600
Diagnosis
NOTE
41800 1/5
41800
No. 01804
The printer version is incorrect. Upgrade the printer software.

YES
Condition
00000 When the power supply is turned on, the versions of the printer control PCB, processor control PCB and laser
control PCB are different from those saved on the computer.
Check Point
Countermeasure
• Condition 1
The printer processor version is lower than the printer version data on the operation PC:
Upgrade the printer processor version to Ver. 2.
Pattern 1
4. Troubleshooting
Example 1 Operation PC Printer
(Ver. 2) (Ver. 1.5)

1. Upgrade the printer processor.☞ 35600*2
• Condition 2
If the version of newly added printer 2 is higher than those of the operation PC and already connected printer 1:
Upgrade to the later Ver. 2.
Pattern 2
(Ver. 1.5) (Ver. 1.5)
Printer 2
Newly added printer
(Ver. 2)

1. Install the CD of Ver. 2 to the operation PC.*1
2. Upgrade the printer processor of printer 1.☞ 35600*2
• Condition 3
If the version of newly added printer 2 is lower than those of the operation PC and already connected printer 1:
Upgrade to the Ver. 1.5.
Pattern 3
(Ver. 1.5) (Ver. 1.5)
Printer 2
Newly added printer
Ver. 1

1. Upgrade the printer processor of printer 2.☞ 35600*2
*1. For the LP7500/LP7600/LP7700/LP7900, install the CD (SYSTEM PROGRAM KIT) supplied with each printer.
*2. If the EZ Controller is installed, the printer processor is automatically performed. (QSS-37)
Diagnosis
41800 2/5
41800

NOTE
4. Troubleshooting
41800 3/5
41800
No. 01805
The printer program is corrupted. Run the recovery software.

YES
Condition
00000 When the power supply is turned on, software of the printer I/F main PCB corrupts and cannot function.
IMPORTANT
• The attention message above is shown if the power supply is reset during upgrading the printer.
Check Point
1 Restart the computer and printer.
2 Start the recovery software to recover it.
IMPORTANT
4. Troubleshooting
• If starting the recovery software, set the IP address of the printer I/F main PCB to 192.168.1.11.
If the same address is used for other printer, connect the PC and the printer I/F main PCB directly.
• The recovery software does not operate correctly when starting it while the error above is not shown.
Procedure
1. Click Start of Windows → Programs or All Programs → NPIPLVUP.
2. The DOS display is shown for a moment and the recovery software starts, then upgrading is performed.
IMPORTANT
• It will take about one minute to upgrade. Do not turn off the power supply during upgrading.
3. Restart the printer/processor section.
41800 4/5
41800
3 Procedure (If the recovery software does not start normally)

Start the recovery software in the following conditions.
If changing the settings, be sure to write down the current settings, and restore the settings after the operation.
1. Directly connecting the operation PC and printer
• If connecting them with a LAN cable (cross cable), set Link Speed & Duplex of the operation PC to Auto Detect.
Right-click the My Computer icon. → Manage (G) → Device Manager → Double-click Network adapter. → Right-
click the adapter to use. → Click Properties. → Click the Advanced tab.
• If connecting them with a LAN cable (straight cable), use a HUB to connect them.
2. Set the IP address of the operation PC to 192.168.1.12, and subnet mask to 255. 255. 255. 224.
Start → Control Panel → Network Connections → Right-click Local Area Connection. → Click Properties.
3. If the OS of the operation PC is Windows XP, set Firewall to OFF.
Start → Control Panel → Security Center → Firewall
4. Press the Windows key on the keyboard.
5. Run the recovery software, NPIPLVUP.
4. Troubleshooting
Start → Programs → NPIPLVUP
The recovery software display is shown, and recovery process automatically starts.
When the recovery process finishes, the display is closed.
IMPORTANT
• It takes about one minute to complete the recovery process. Do not turn off the PC power supply during the
process.
6. If you changed the IP address, subnet mask and firewall settings, restore them.
7. Restart the printer/processor section.
Diagnosis
NOTE
41800 5/5
41821
Attention message: External system
No. 1821
For corrective action of the attention message, see the d-Storage/ CD-R external writing
system Service Manual.
Condition
IMPORTANT
For corrective action of the attention message, see the d-Storage/ CD-R external writing system Service Manual.
Attention message (External system)
No. 1821 The data cannot be output to the External System. Confirm the power supply of External System.
NOTE
• In the Attention message table, attention message numbers that are not used currently may be listed.
4. Troubleshooting
41821 1/1
41900
Attention message: Main
No. 01920
Capacity Booster Key was not detected. Confirm the connection status.

YES
• If YES is selected, the processing capacity of the system becomes that of the low capacity model (QSS-3701).
Condition
00032 When the system starts up, it cannot detect capacity booster F.
00064 When the system starts up, it cannot detect capacity booster G.
00096 When the system starts up, it cannot detect capacity booster PCB F and capacity booster PCB G.
00128 When the system starts up, it cannot detect capacity booster PCB H.
00256 When the system starts up, it cannot detect capacity booster PCB I.
01024 If the option CD for capacity booster F is not installed
02048 If the option CD for capacity booster G is not installed
03072 If the option CD for capacity booster F and G is not installed
4. Troubleshooting
04096 If the option CD for capacity booster H is not installed
08192 If the option CD for capacity booster I is not installed
Check Point
1 Confirm that the capacity booster PCB is recognized correctly.
☞ 35500
IMPORTANT
• If version such as #.# # # F, #.# # # FG or #.# # # H is shown for Printer I/F Main on the System Version
Check display, the printer maintenance software recognizes the capacity booster PCB.
2 Check whether the capacity booster PCB is correctly installed.
3 Confirm that Capacity Booster Software has been installed normally.
IMPORTANT
• After installing Capacity Booster Software, click Enter on the Machine Specification display. Otherwise,
attention message No. 01920 with any suffix number from 01024 to 08192 will occur.
4 If the Serial Number (Printer/Processor) registered for Machine Type Registration and the serial number registered
when Capacity Booster Software is installed differ, attention message No. 01920 with any suffix number from 01024 to
08192 will occur.
5 Confirm the connection between the printer I/F main PCB (J/P1211) and capacity booster PCB (J/P860).
Diagnosis
Capacity booster PCB ☞ 66008

☞ 4202 − −
NOTE
41900 1/4
41900
No. 01850−01997
Condition
IMPORTANT
See the EZ Controller Troubleshooting Manual and Connecting Unit Service Manual for Corrective action of Attention
message.
Attention message (Software)
No. 01850 The data was not written to the Network Folder. Would you like to output the data to a local folder?
No. 01851 This Order ID data already exists. Would you like to output the data to a local folder?
No. 01852 The data was not written to the Network Folder. Stop the process.
No. 01853 This Order ID data already exists. Stop the process.
No. 01854 Scanning data does not exist in the Controller database. Data in the EZLab database will be used instead.
4. Troubleshooting
No. 01861 Accessing the media. The writing will be canceled.
No. 01862 The size specified in the DPOF information is not correct. Would you like to read the file?
No. 01863 Auto Correction was not processed.
No. 01864 The output media service information was updated.
See the Connection Unit Service Manual.

No. 01957 Reserve the order.
(See the T15/LS Connecting Unit Operator's Manual.)
No. 01982 Reserved orders remain. Delete all the reserved orders.
Attention message (Main)

No. 01901 Selected optional function is not available. If you need to use, Install it.
No. 01903 Proceeding. One moment please. . .
No. 01908 A Picture CD could not be made. Confirm the settings.
No. 01922 Viewer Software was not found. Confirm the settings.
No. 01926 Set the Media Print Paper Fitting in Frame Print to "Cut", "Overall" or "Real Size".
No. 01939 The String is too long to register.
No. 01940 Invalid format. Failed to read.
No. 01941 Would you like to delete the selected Print Menu?
No. 01943 The setting has changed. Would you like to register?
No. 01944 Appropriate Print Menu was not found. Stop the process.
No. 01945 A tab where the Print Menu has not been set exists. Would you like to continue?
No. 01947 The selected Print Channel is used as a Print Menu Icon. Would you like to delete?
No. 01967 Input the Order ID.
No. 01973 EZLab is not set.
No. 01974 EZLab was not found.
No. 01975 The order was not found.
No. 01976 Failed to read the database.
No. 01977 There is insufficient space left on the disk. Stop the process.
No. 01980 Failed to import the file. Confirm the file is correctly selected.
No. 01981 Short Cut Key is selected overlapped.
41900 2/4
41900

No. 01995 Processing an order. Cannot change this setting.
No. 01996 Processing the order. . . The setting data was not updated.
No. 01997 Setting data will be updated.
NOTE
4. Troubleshooting
41900 3/4
41900
No. 01998
Capacity Booster Key was not detected. Confirm the connection status.

YES
• If YES is selected, the processing capacity of the system becomes that of the low capacity model (QSS-3701).
NOTE
• Attention message No. 01998 is shown only for the QSS models.
• PRO specification models are sold outside Japan.
Condition
00001 When the system starts up, it cannot detect capacity booster PCB J.
Check Point
1 Confirm that the capacity booster PCB is recognized correctly.
☞ 35500
4. Troubleshooting
IMPORTANT
• If version such as #.# # # J, #.# # # FJ or #.# # # JG is shown for Printer I/F Main on the System Version
Check display, the printer maintenance software recognizes the capacity booster PCB.
2 Check whether the capacity booster PCB is correctly installed.
3 Confirm the connection between the printer I/F main PCB (J/P1211) and capacity booster PCB (J/P860).
Diagnosis
Capacity booster PCB J ☞ 66008
NOTE
41900 4/4
43370
Attention message: Edit
No. 04001−04054
message.
Condition
IMPORTANT
Attention message (Edit)
No. 04001 Are you sure about deleting?
No. 04002 Red Eye Correction cannot be executed no more.
No. 04003 Image cannot be inserted into the specified position.
No. 04004 Graphics are too large to insert.
No. 04006 Prints cannot be made with this Print Channel. Select a Print Channel using a larger paper width.
4. Troubleshooting
No. 04010 Specify the image area.
No. 04015 Selected file already exists.
No. 04017 The head and jaw position is opposite, or the selected area is too small.
No. 04018 Would you like to quit the Edit Mode?
No. 04019 If you Import, all customer information will be deleted. Are you sure you want to Import?
No. 04020 Failed to write the file.
No. 04021 Failed to read the file.
No. 04023 Image magnification ratio or reduction ratio is out of range.
No. 04024 Select the layer.
No. 04025 This template has more than 16 layers. This template cannot be used.
No. 04026 The image size is too large to insert.
No. 04027 The same data already exists. Would you like to overwrite?
No. 04028 Failed to export the Image Save File.
No. 04029 The drive is empty.
No. 04030 Failed to delete the Exported Image Save Data.
No. 04031 There is insufficient space left on the disk.
No. 04032 Template size is too large to read.
No. 04033 Vertical templates cannot be used to make frame prints. Select a horizontal template.
No. 04034 A pupil could not be detected in the specified area.
No. 04035 Additional phrases could not be saved.
No. 04036 The image size is too small to insert.
No. 04037 The same file name already exists. Would you like to overwrite?
No. 04040 The database was not changed. Confirm the property of each field.
No. 04041 A form larger than the print size cannot be used.
No. 04042 Single Form is not positioned.
No. 04043 A Single Form protrudes from the Print Area.
No. 04044 Single Form is overlapped.
No. 04045 No more than three Single Form types can be positioned.
No. 04046 When the Paper Setting is changed, the current position information is canceled.
No. 04047 The selected font was not found.
No. 04048 The image size is too small to make a Test Print.
No. 04049 No more items can be added.
43370 1/2
43370

No. 04053 Image Save Data was not found.
No. 04054 Image Save Data was not found.
NOTE
4. Troubleshooting
43370 2/2
44200
No. 4200−4231
For corrective action of the attention message, see the d-Storage/ CD-R external writing
system Service Manual.
Condition
IMPORTANT
Attention message (External PCs)
No.4200 The ink comes to an end.
No.4201 The CD is filled to capacity when writing the Viewer Software. This order will be canceled.
No.4202 The background data was not found.
No.4203 The logo data was not found.
No.4204 There is insufficient space left on the hard disk.
4. Troubleshooting
No.4205 An error has occurred in the Rimage.
No.4206 The Viewer Software folder was not found.
No.4207 The Shop Data folder was not found.
Attention message (External system)

No.4208 Image size is too large.
No.4210 Confirm the CD-R external writing system.
No.4211 The data cannot be output to the CD-R external writing system. Confirm the power supply of CD-R external writing
system.
No.4213 The output media size is too large. The data cannot be output to the External System.
No.4215 Confirm the d-Storage.
No.4216 The data cannot be output to the d-Storage. Confirm the power supply of d-Storage.
No.4217 Confirm the LAN connection with the d-Storage.
No.4230 Previous order information remains. Would you like to continue?
No.4231 Too many files. Could not read.
NOTE
• In the Attention message table, attention message numbers that are not used currently may be listed.
44200 1/1
44350
Attention message: Bravo II
Attention message: Bravo II
No. 4350−4358
See the Bravo II Service Manual for Corrective action of Attention message.
Condition
IMPORTANT
See the Bravo II Service Manual for Corrective action of Attention message.
Attention message (Bravo II)
No.4350 The input bin is empty. Set the media and press the Ink Cartridge button on the Bravo.
No.4351 The quantity of ink in the color ink cartridge ran short. Open the cover of the Bravo and press the Ink
Cartridge button, then install the new cartridge. When continuing processing without replacing the cartridge,
press the Ink Cartridge button.
No.4352 The quantity of ink in the black ink cartridge ran short. Open the cover of the Bravo and press the Ink
Cartridge button, then install the new cartridge. When continuing processing without replacing the cartridge,
press the Ink Cartridge button.
4. Troubleshooting
No.4353 The quantity of ink in both ink cartridges ran short. Open the cover of the Bravo and press the Ink Cartridge
button, then install the new cartridges. When continuing processing without replacing the cartridges, press
the Ink Cartridge button.
No.4354 The Bravo Top Cover is open. Close the cover.
No.4355 The shared folder of PTBurn is full. Wait until the writing of CD is completed.
No.4356 The power supply of Bravo is not ON. Turn ON the Bravo.
No.4357 The data has already been written to this media. Set a new media.
No.4358 Write the data. Set the media.
IMPORTANT
CD-R external writing system
No. 4360 The shared folder of Rimage CD/DVD Publishing Systems is full. Wait until the writing of CD is completed.
44350 1/1
45500
Error message: Processor 1
No. 05500
The processing solution temperature is above the safety range. P1
No. 05501
The processing solution temperature is above the safety range. P2
No. 05502
The processing solution temperature is above the safety range. PS
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
YES
Condition
No. 05500-00000 The P1 processing solution temperature exceeds the safety range (setting temperature + 1°C) after the
temperature adjustment is finished. (P1 thermosensor)
No. 05501-00000 The P2 processing solution temperature exceeds the safety range (setting temperature + 3°C) after the
4. Troubleshooting
temperature adjustment is finished. (P2 thermosensor)
No. 05502-00000 The PS processing solution temperature exceeds the safety range (setting temperature + 3°C) after the
temperature adjustment is finished. (PS thermosensor)
NOTE
• There is a specific process specification whose safe range of PS is the setting temperature + 7°.
Check Point
1 Confirm that the value measured via Thermosensor Calibration is correctly entered.
2 Check whether the tank cooling fans (FAN 1 to 3) operate normally.
Diagnosis
For cooling failure Manual No.
Cooling fan ☞ 63290
When temperature is incorrectly detected Manual No.

Thermosensor ☞ 63290
NOTE
45500 1/14
45500
No. 05503
The dryer temperature is above the safety range.
Alarm release
NO
NO
Condition
00000 The dryer temperature exceeds the safety range (setting temperature + 10°C) after the temperature adjustment is
completed. (dryer thermosensor)
Diagnosis
When temperature is incorrectly adjusted Manual No.
4. Troubleshooting
Dryer thermosensor ☞ 63290
NOTE
45500 2/14
45500
No. 05504
The processing solution temperature is below the processing range. P1
No. 05505
No. 05506
Alarm release
NO
NO
NOTE
• The processing solution temperature will be adjusted when the error display is closed.
Condition
4. Troubleshooting
No. 05504-0000 The P1 processing solution temperature falls below the processing range (setting temperature − 1°C) after
the temperature adjustment is finished. (P1 temperature sensor)
No. 05505-00000 The P2 processing solution temperature falls below the processing range (setting temperature − 3°C) after
the temperature adjustment is finished. (P2 temperature sensor)
No. 05506-00000 The PS processing solution temperature falls below the processing range (setting temperature − 5°C) after
the temperature adjustment is finished. (PS temperature sensor)
Check Point
1 Confirm that the value measured via Thermosensor Calibration is correctly entered.
Diagnosis
Processing solution heater ☞ 63290

NOTE
45500 3/14
45500
No. 05507
The dryer temperature is below the processing range.
Alarm release
NO
NO
The dryer temperature will be adjusted when the error display is closed.
Condition
00000 The dryer temperature falls below the processing range (setting temperature − 10°C) during paper processing.
(dryer thermosensor)
Diagnosis
Dryer heater ☞ 63290
4. Troubleshooting

NOTE
45500 4/14
45500
No. 05508
The processing solution level is too low.
Alarm release
NO
YES
Condition
00000 The processing solution level detectors of the processing solution float switches (P1, P2 and PS) turned off.
NOTE
• If the processing solution level detector of the processing solution float switch turns off, all the processing solution heaters and
circulation pumps turn off.
Check Point
Common to all specifications
4. Troubleshooting
1 Confirm that the processing solution is not leaking from the tank.
2 Clean the replenishment pump, strainer units of water supply pump or a hose. Check the output amounts.
3 Confirm that the float of the processing solution float switch moves up and down smoothly.
Diagnosis
Common
When the level is incorrectly detected Manual No.
Processing solution float switch ☞ 63290
[F]
When the solution is insufficiently added Manual No.
P1R Replenisher Pump ☞ 63290
P2RA Replenisher Pump
P2RB Replenisher Pump
[N]
Replenisher pump ☞ 63290
Refilling water pump ☞ 63290
[SM]
Water Supply Pump ☞ 63290
45500 5/14
45500

SM I/O PCB ☞ 66600
[J]

− ☞ 4203 ☞ 4252
NOTE
4. Troubleshooting
45500 6/14
45500
No. 05509
The circulation amount has decreased.
Alarm release
NO
YES
NOTE
• This error message will be shown only when the system is equipped with the optional digital flowmeter.
Condition
00000 The circulation amount of the P1 processing solution measured by the digital flowmeter falls below 3L/min.
Although the system is not equipped with a digital flowmeter, the digital flowmeter is set to ON via Option
Registration.
NOTE
• This error will not be shown when the digital flowmeter is set to OFF via Option Registration.
4. Troubleshooting
Check Point
1 Confirm that the filter cartridge is clean.
2 Confirm that the circulation pump and the hose connected to the pump are not clogged.
Diagnosis
Digital flowmeter ☞ 63290
NOTE
45500 7/14
45500
No. 05510
Processor A/D conversion error.
Alarm release
NO
NO
Condition
00000 The analog data detected by each thermosensor cannot be converted to digital data.
IMPORTANT
• The A/D conversion is a process to convert analog data of the temperature measured by the processing solution
thermosensor, the dryer thermosensor and the inner thermosensor into digital data via the processor control PCB.
Diagnosis
4. Troubleshooting

− ☞ 4203 −
NOTE
45500 8/14
45500
No. 05511
The circulation pump has stopped. CD
No. 05512
The circulation pump has stopped. CD2
No. 05513
The circulation pump has stopped. BF
No. 05514
The circulation pump has stopped. BF2
No. 05515
The circulation pump has stopped. STB1
No. 05516
No. 05517
4. Troubleshooting
No. 05518
Alarm release
NO
YES
Condition
No. 05511-00000 The rotation detector built in the P1 circulation pump detects that the pump has stopped rotating.
No. 05512-00000 The rotation detector built in the P1-2 circulation pump detects that the pump has stopped rotating.
No. 05513-00000 The rotation detector built in the P2 circulation pump detects that the pump has stopped rotating.
No. 05514-00000 The rotation detector built in the P2-2 circulation pump detects that the pump has stopped rotating.
No. 05515-00000 The rotation detector built in the PS1 circulation pump detects that the pump has stopped rotating.
Check Point
Diagnosis
Circulation pump ☞ 63290

− ☞ 4203 ☞ 4252
45500 9/14
45500
NOTE
4. Troubleshooting
45500 10/14
45500
No. 05519
Thermosensor error. P1
No. 05520
No. 05521
Alarm release
NO
NO
Condition
No. 05519-00000 The temperature detected by the P1 thermosensor is not within a specified range.
No. 05520-00000 The temperature detected by the P2 thermosensor is not within a specified range.
4. Troubleshooting
No. 05521-00000 The temperature detected by the PS thermosensor is not within a specified range.
Diagnosis

− ☞ 4203 −
NOTE
45500 11/14
45500
No. 05522
Dryer Thermosensor error.
Alarm release
NO
NO
Condition
00000 The temperature detected by the dryer thermosensor is not within a specified range.
Diagnosis
4. Troubleshooting
− ☞ 4203 −
NOTE
45500 12/14
45500
No. 05524
Refilling water operation error. CD-W
No. 05525
Refilling water operation error. BF-W
No. 05526
Refilling water operation error. STB1-W
No. 05527
No. 05528
No. 05529
Alarm release
4. Troubleshooting
NO
YES
Condition
No. 05524-00000 The refilling water level detector of the CD processing solution float switch does not turn on even though a
specified time has passed since refilling water operation started.
No. 05525-00000 The refilling water level detector of the BF processing solution float switch does not turn on even though a
No. 05526-00000 The refilling water level detector of the STB1 processing solution float switch does not turn on even though a
NOTE
• The CD, BF and STB4 processing solution float switches have a processing solution level detector, a refilling water level detector and
a safety thermostat for each.
The STB3, 5 and 6 processing solution float switches have a refilling water level detector for each.
Check Point
3 Check that the hoses from the refilling water pumps CD-W, BF-W, STB1-W, STB2-W, STB3-W, and STB4-W
to the sub-tank are not clogged.
Diagnosis
When water is incorrectly added Manual No.
45500 13/14
45500
When refilling water is incorrectly detected Manual No.

NOTE
4. Troubleshooting
45500 14/14
45530
Error: Processor 2
Error: Processor 2
No. 05530
The Processor Top Cover is open.
No. 05531
The dryer cover is open.

YES
Condition
No. 5530-00000 The interlock switch (processor top cover) turns off during printing.
No. 5531-00000 The interlock switch (dryer cover) turns off during printing.
NOTE
• The drive motor, the refilling water pump, the cleaning pump, and the exhaust fan will stop when the interlock switch (processor top
cover) turns off.
• When the interlock switch (dryer cover) turns off, the drive motor, the dryer heater and the dryer fan will stop.
4. Troubleshooting
Check Point
1 Confirm that the processor top cover is securely closed.
2 Check that the dryer top cover and the dryer front cover are securely closed.
Diagnosis
NOTE
45530 1/14
45530
Error: Processor 2
No. 05532
The Processing Solution Safety Thermostat has activated.

YES
Condition
00000 The safety thermostat of the processing solution float switches CD, BF or STB turns off.
NOTE
• The processing solution safety thermostat is activated at the following temperatures.
Standard processing Time reduction processing

Status Temperature (°C) Status Temperature (°C)
OFF 46±3 OFF 51±3
ON 36±3 ON 41±3
4. Troubleshooting
• If the safety thermostat of the processing solution float switch turns OFF, all the processing solution heaters and circulation pumps will
stop.
Check Point
2 Confirm that the hose connected to the circulation pump are not clogged.
Diagnosis
When the safety thermostat is defective Manual No.


Circulation failure Manual No.

Circulation pump ☞ 63290

− ☞ 4203 ☞ 4252
NOTE
45530 2/14
45530
Error: Processor 2
No. 05533
The Dryer Safety Thermostat has activated.

YES
Condition
00000 The dryer safety thermostat turns off.
NOTE
• The dryer safety thermostat is activated at the following temperatures.
Status Temperature (°C)

OPEN(OFF) 90±2.8
CLOSE(ON) 70±4.4
• When the dryer safety thermostat turns OFF, the dryer heater and dryer fan turn OFF.
4. Troubleshooting
Check Point
1 Check if the dryer fan is rotating.
Diagnosis
When the dryer fan rotates incorrectly Manual No.
Dryer fan ☞ 63260

When the safety thermostat is defective Manual No.

Dryer safety thermostat ☞ 63260


− ☞ 4203 ☞ 4252
NOTE
45530 3/14
45530
Error: Processor 2
No. 05534
Print Sorter Unit operation error.

NO
Condition
00001 Although a specified time has passed since the print sorter unit started operating, the sorter home sensor does not
turn LIGHT.
00002 Although a specified time has passed since the sorter home sensor turned LIGHT, it does not turn DARK.
Check Point
1 Clean the sorter home sensor using a blower brush.
Diagnosis
4. Troubleshooting
Operation failure Manual No.
Sorter motor ☞ 63271
Detection failure Manual No.

Sorter home sensor ☞ 63271

− ☞ 4203 −
NOTE
45530 4/14
45530
Error: Processor 2
No. 05535
Paper has jammed in the processor section.

YES
Condition
Suffix number Status Condition
00000 Normal • After the printer feeds out the paper to the processor, Print Sensor (Left), Print Sensor
process*1 (Center) or Print Sensor (Right) in the dryer section do not turn DARK within a specified
time.
• For details, see ☞ 56100 Paper advance operation of the processor (normal prints).
Normal • After the printer feeds out the paper to the processor, Dryer Lane Select Sensor in the dryer
process*2 section do not turn DARK within a specified time.
• For details, see ☞ 56100 Paper advance operation of the processor (normal prints).
Automatic color • Colorimeter unit paper sensor 1 is not shown as DARK on the display within a specified time
measurement*3 when performing the automated color measurement of setup print.
• For details, see ☞ 56110 Paper advance operation of the processor (setup prints).
4. Troubleshooting
• After a setup print is fed to the processor, the Dryer Lane Select Sensor does not detect
DARK within a specified time.
• For details, see ☞ 56610Automatic color measurement operation for setup prints.
*1. If prints are output to the print conveyor unit

*2. If prints are output to the print receiving tray (large)
*3. If prints are fed to the colorimeter unit
IMPORTANT
• The error above may occur when the ARCNET communication status is not normal.
If the error occurs, check the following items.
• Confirm the ARCNET communication status on the Version Check display.
☞ 35500
• Confirm the ARCNET communication path.
☞ 50520
• For details about the diagnosis of ARCNET communication error, see ☞ 35940.
Check Point
1 Confirm that the upper guides and the squeegee unit are securely attached.
2 Confirm that the gears and the rollers rotate smoothly after removing the paper processing rack from the processing solution
tank.
3 • Check if the paper advance power is not decreased by dirt on the processing rack in PSR (STB) or on the roller of the
upper turn rack.
• Confirm that the lower turn belt of the paper processing rack is not damaged.
4 Confirm that paper remains on each sensor.☞ 35220
5 Confirm that the paper guide of the dryer rack is correctly attached.
6 Confirm that the print sensor is not dirty.
7 There is a possibility that the message ☞ No. 05535 had been shown before ☞ No. 05535 was shown, and print process was
continued without removing paper jammed in the processor insertion unit and upper guide No.1.
45530 5/14
45530
Error: Processor 2
8 Perform Paper Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment of Paper Sensor Adjustment in Functions.
☞ 36000
Diagnosis
Adjustment failure Manual No.
If paper jam occurs during automatic colorimetry ☞ 33505
Check the setting of Dryer Section Setting (Auto Setup).
If paper jam occurs during normal process ☞ 33001
Perform paper sensor adjustment.
If paper jam occurs during normal process

Print Sensor (Left)/Print Sensor (Center)/Print Sensor (Right) ☞ 63260
Dryer Lane Select Sensor
If paper jam occurs during automatic colorimetry
4. Troubleshooting
Paper Sensor 1 ☞ 63318
Operation failure Manual No.

Dryer selection solenoid 1/Dryer selection solenoid 2 ☞ 63260
Drive motor ☞ 63290
Dryer fan ☞ 63260

☞ 4202 ☞ 4203 −
NOTE
45530 6/14
45530
Error: Processor 2
No. 05537
The Rack Stopper is not set.

YES
Condition
00000 While prints are being made, the rack stopper sensor turns off.
Check Point
1 Confirm that the rack stopper is securely placed.
Diagnosis
4. Troubleshooting
NOTE
45530 7/14
45530
Error: Processor 2
No. 05538
Backup data error. Processor

NO
Condition
0### The backup data of the processor control PCB is corrupted.
1### The backup data of the printer I/F main PCB and processor control PCB are corrupted.
NOTE
• The value informed from CPU is shown in the last three digits of the suffix number.
• If approximately 5 days have passed with the power supply being off or if the processor control PCB has been replaced with a new
one, this error message is shown.
IMPORTANT
• If the error message above is shown, the backup data for the processor control PCB saved in the printer I/F main PCB is
4. Troubleshooting
sent to the processor control PCB within approx. 5 to 10 minutes while the error cannot be closed.
If the backup data is sent normally, the error above can be closed.
However, the backup data saved in the printer I/F main PCB may have a problem. If the error above occurs, we
recommend you to load the backup data on the media saved at the close down check.
Diagnosis
If the data was deleted Manual No.
Carry out Reading data. ☞ 35400
Only for F specification, the error message ☞ No. 05905[F], ☞ No. 05906[F], or ☞ No. 05907[F] may appear in ☞ 57020
specific condition.

NOTE
45530 8/14
45530
Error: Processor 2
No. 05539
Print Conveyor Unit was removed.

YES
Condition
00000 The conveyor unit sensor turns LIGHT while the drive motor is operating.
Check Point
1 Check if the conveyor unit sensor is soiled.
Diagnosis
Conveyor unit sensor ☞ 63271
4. Troubleshooting
NOTE
45530 9/14
45530
Error: Processor 2
No. 05545
Print Sensor (Left) error.
No. 05547
Print Sensor (Right) error.
No. 05548
Dryer Lane Select Sensor error.
No. 05553
Print sensor (center) error

YES
Condition
- When Print Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment was performed, the system could not adjust it normally.
4. Troubleshooting
00001 When the standard voltage was set to 7.5 V and the light source level was set to 0, the print sensor did not change to
LIGHT.
00002 When the standard voltage was set to 7.5 V and the light source level was set to 255, the print sensor did not detect
LIGHT.
In addition, although the standard voltage was set to 4.0 V, the print sensor did not detect light.
00003 Even if the standard voltage was changed from 7.5 V to 4.0 V for the light source level, the print sensor did not detect
LIGHT.
Check Point
2 Perform Print Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment of Functions via Print Sensor Adjustment.
See ☞ 33001.
NOTE
• In the service mode, LED light intensity value is displayed in the Print Sensor Adjustment Display.
• After cleaning each sensor, carry out Print Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment again and check that the sensor LED light
intensity changes.
Diagnosis
Print sensor (Right) (Center) (Left) ☞ 63260
Dryer lane select sensor
NOTE
45530 10/14
45530
Error: Processor 2
No. 05549
Drive Motor Revolution Count Auto Adjustment error.

YES
Condition
- When Drive Motor Revolution Count Auto Adjustment was performed in Functions of Drive Motor
Revolution Count Setting, the system could not adjust it normally.
NOTE
• The suffix number differs depending on the operation which is currently processed.

00001 Even though the drive motor revolution count is set to 255, it was smaller than the required count.
00002 Even though the drive motor revolution count is set to 0, it was more than the required count.
4. Troubleshooting
Diagnosis
NOTE
45530 11/14
45530
Error: Processor 2
No. 05550
Drive Motor has stopped.

YES
Condition
00000 The drive motor has stopped due to the protected operation.
Diagnosis
Drive motor driver PCB (QSS-3704, QSS-3705, LP7700 and LP7900 only) ☞ 66870
4. Troubleshooting
− ☞ 4203 −
NOTE
45530 12/14
45530
Error: Processor 2
No. 05551
Paper Guide operation error.

NO
Condition
1 Although the paper guide motor was operated in the direction which closes the paper guide, even after a specified
time has passed, the paper guide open sensor does not turn LIGHT.
2 After the paper guide open sensor turns LIGHT, the paper guide close sensor does not turn DARK even though a
specified time has passed.
3 Although the paper guide motor was operated in the direction which raises the paper guide, even after a specified
time has passed, the paper guide close sensor does not turn LIGHT.
4 After the paper guide close sensor turns LIGHT, the paper guide open sensor does not turn DARK even though a
specified time has passed.
5 Both the paper guide close sensor and paper guide open sensor turns DARK.
4. Troubleshooting
Check Point
1 Clean the paper guide open sensor and paper guide close sensor using a blower brush.
Diagnosis
Paper guide open sensor ☞ 63271
Paper guide close sensor
Paper guide motor
NOTE
45530 13/14
45530
Error: Processor 2
No. 05552
Dryer Lane Select Guide operation error.

NO
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
00004 When Dryer selection solenoid 1 is moved to the colorimeter side for automatic colorimetry, the test print is not fed to the
colorimeter but output to the print conveyor unit (Print Sensor (Left), Print Sensor (Center) and Print Sensor (Right) of
the dryer rack detect DARK.)
00005 When Dryer selection solenoid 1 is moved to the colorimeter side for automatic colorimetry, the test print is not fed to the
colorimeter but output to the print receiving tray (large).
Check Point
1 • Check if the paper advance power is not decreased by dirt on the processing rack in PSR (STB) or on the roller of the
4. Troubleshooting
upper turn rack.
• Confirm that the lower turn belt of the paper processing rack is not damaged.
2 Check whether Dryer selection solenoid 1 and Dryer selection solenoid 2 normally operate.☞ 35320
3 Confirm that the paper guide of the dryer rack is correctly attached.
4 Clean the dryer lane select sensor with the blower brush, etc.
5 Perform Print Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment in Functions of Print Sensor Adjustment.
See ☞ 33001.
Diagnosis
Dryer lane select sensor ☞ 63260
Dryer selection solenoid 1/Dryer selection solenoid 2 ☞ 63260

− ☞ 4203 ☞ 4252
NOTE
45530 14/14
45600
Error message: Tablet replenishment
No. 05600[J]
Tablet Drum operation error. CD
No. 05601[J]
Tablet Drum operation error. BF
No. 05602[J]
Tablet Drum operation error. STB

YES
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
00000 Even though the drum was moved for a specified time to return it to the home position, the home position was not detected.
Even though the drum was moved for a specified time to exit the home position, the drum remained at that position.
Even though the drum is reversed, tablet sensor 1 does not turn DARK after a specified time.
4. Troubleshooting
Even though a specified time has passed since tablet sensor 1 passed the home position and turned DARK, tablet sensor 1
does not turn LIGHT.
NOTE
• The home position is the position when tablet sensors 1 and 2 are LIGHT.
Check Point
1 Check if the chute is not dirty.
2 Confirm that the bucket platform is clean.
3 Confirm that the tablet is not stuck between the cartridge and drum.
Diagnosis
Uncleaned places Manual No.
Clean the module drum. ☞ 27690

Upper, middle and lower elevator sensors attaching position adjustment failure ☞ 63310

Confirm that the elevator does not tilt. -
Confirm that tablet sensor is not dirty. ☞ 63310
Tablet sensors 1 and 2 ☞ 63310
Drum Motor CD, BF, STB ☞ 63310
• If the drum motor is not activated when 24 V DC is output between PINs 15 and 16 of the drum motor connectors, the motor is
defective.
NOTE
45600 1/5
45600
No. 05603[J]
A tablet has jammed.
No. 05604[J]
A tablet has jammed. BF
No. 05605[J]
A tablet has jammed.

YES
Condition
00000 Even though a specified time has passed since the drum was moved from the home position and tablet sensor 1 turned
DARK, tablet sensor 1 does not turn LIGHT.
Even though a specified time has passed since the drum was moved from the home position, tablet sensor 1 does not
turn DARK.
4. Troubleshooting
Even though a specified time has passed since tablet sensor 1 passed the home position, it does not turn DARK.
Even though a specified time has passed since the drum is reversed, the home position is not detected.
NOTE
• The home position is the position when tablet sensors 1 and 2 are LIGHT.
Check Point
1 Check if the chute is not dirty.
2 Confirm that the bucket platform is clean.
3 Confirm that the elevator does not tilt.
4 Confirm that the tablet is not stuck between the cartridge and drum.
Diagnosis
Uncleaned places Manual No.
Clean the module drum. ☞ 27690

Upper, middle and lower elevator sensors attaching position adjustment failure ☞ 63310

Confirm that the elevator does not tilt. -
Confirm that tablet sensor is not dirty. ☞ 63310
Tablet sensors 1 and 2 ☞ 63310
Drum Motor CD, BF, STB ☞ 63310
NOTE
45600 2/5
45600
No. 05609[J]
Printing cannot continue without replenishment. CD
No. 05610[J]
Printing cannot continue without replenishment. BF
No. 05611[J]
Printing cannot continue without replenishment. STB

YES
Condition
No. 05609-00000 The Reservoir Count exceeds the drop limit in Basic Kit Setting when Order Display→Processor
No. 05610-00000 Status→Change→Tablet Drop Reservoir is set to ON.
No. 05611-00000
4. Troubleshooting
NOTE
• To reset the reservoir count, set the reservoir count of Counter to 0. See ☞ 33070.
• To reset the Water Supply Reservoir Amount, reset it via Functions in Counter.
See ☞ 33070.
45600 3/5
45600
No. 05612[J]
Tablet Replenishment Elevator operation error.

NO
Condition
00001 Even though a specified time has passed after the elevator moves up, the elevator lower sensor does not turn
LIGHT.
00002 When the elevator was raised, the elevator middle sensor did not turn DARK even though the elevator lower
sensor turned LIGHT and a specified time passed.
00003 When the elevator was raised, the elevator upper sensor did not turn DARK even though the elevator middle
sensor turned DARK and a specified time passed.
00004 Even though the elevator was lowered for a specified time, the elevator upper sensor did not turn LIGHT.
00005 When the elevator was lowered, the elevator middle sensor did not detect LIGHT even though it turned DARK
and the specified time has passed.
4. Troubleshooting
00006 When the elevator was lowered, the elevator lower sensor did not detect DARK even though the specified time
has passed since the elevator middle sensor detected LIGHT.
Diagnosis
Elevator sensor attached to inappropriate position ☞ 63310
Position adjustment failure of elevator lower sensor ☞ 27680
Position adjustment failure of elevator middle sensor ☞ 27670
Position adjustment failure of elevator upper sensor ☞ 27660

Confirm that the upper sensor for elevator is dirty. ☞ 63310
Upper sensor for elevator ☞ 63310
Elevator motor ☞ 63310
NOTE
45600 4/5
45600
No. 05613[J]
The processing solution level is too low. STB1

YES
Condition
00000 When the processing solution level detector of the STB1 processing solution float switch turns off and water
supply is carried out for a given amount of time, the processing solution level detector keeps off.
Check Point
2 Confirm that the valve of the strainer unit is not closed.
3 Clean the strainer.
4 Confirm that the replenisher hose are not clogged.
5 Check the output amount.
4. Troubleshooting
Diagnosis
STB1 processing solution float switch ☞ 63310
STB water supply pump ☞ 63310
NOTE
45600 5/5
45700
Error message: SM replenishment
No. 05700[SM]
Replenishment pump operation error. CD-A
No. 05701[SM]
Replenishment pump operation error. CD-B
No. 05702[SM]
Replenishment pump operation error. CD-C
No. 05703[SM]
Replenishment pump operation error. CD-W
No. 05704[SM]
Replenishment pump operation error. BF-A
No. 05705[SM]
Replenishment pump operation error. BF-B
No. 05706[SM]
Replenishment pump operation error. STB
4. Troubleshooting
NO
Condition
00001 The replenisher pump sensor or water supply pump sensor stays DARK even though a specified time has passed
since the replenisher pump or the water supply pump started operating.
00002 The replenisher pump sensor or water supply pump sensor stays LIGHT even though a specified time has passed
since the replenisher pump or the water supply pump started operating.
Check Point
3 Confirm that the replenisher hose and water supply hose are not clogged.
Diagnosis
Replenisher pump and water supply pump ☞ 63300
Replenisher pump sensor and water supply pump sensor ☞ 63300
SM I/O PCB ☞ 66600
NOTE
45700 1/4
45700
No. 05708[SM]
Replenishment Package solution remaining error.
No. 05709[SM]
Replenishment Package solution remaining error.

YES
Condition
The message No. 0700 Replace the Replenishment Package with a new one. is shown when the replenishment alarm value is set to -5%
(initial value) in Package Capacity Setting and either replenishment package becomes empty. In this case, the message Nos. 5708 and
5709 Replenishment Package solution remaining error. is not shown.
00000 The percentage of the replenishment remaining amount (internal calculated value) to the replenishment package
capacity became smaller than the replenishment alarm value. (Replenishment remaining amount < Package
capacity × Replenishment remaining amount / 100) But the replenishment solution sensor does not turn DARK.
4. Troubleshooting
Check Point
1 Confirm that the actual package capacity is same as the one set in the Package Capacity Setting.
2 Confirm that the replenishment alarm value is sufficient.
5 Confirm that the replenisher hose and water supply hose are not clogged.
Diagnosis
Sensitivity adjustment failure of the replenishment solution sensor ☞ 27830

Replenishment solution sensor CD-A, CD-B, CD-C, BF-A, BF-B, or STB ☞ 63300
SM I/O PCB ☞ 66600
NOTE
45700 2/4
45700
No. 05710[SM]
Refilling water operation error. CD-W
No. 05711[SM]
Refilling water operation error. BF-W
No. 05712[SM]
No. 05713[SM]
No. 05714[SM]
No. 05715[SM]
4. Troubleshooting
YES
Condition
No. 05710-00000 The refilling water level detector of the CD processing solution float switch does not turn ON even
though a specified time has passed since refilling water operation started.
No. 05711-00000 The refilling water level detector of the BF processing solution float switch does not turn ON even
No. 05712-00000 The refilling water level detector of the STB1 processing solution float switch does not turn ON even
Check Point
2 Confirm that the hoses from the water supply pump and refilling water pump are not clogged.
3 Confirm that the processing float switch moves smoothly.
Diagnosis
When water is incorrectly added Manual No.
SM I/O PCB ☞ 66600
When refilling water is incorrectly detected Manual No.

45700 3/4
45700
NOTE
4. Troubleshooting
45700 4/4
45900
Error message: F replenishment
No. 05900[F]
Replenisher cartridge open motor operation error.

NO
IMPORTANT
• If the above error message is shown, do not click YES to close it and continue the printing process without performing the
diagnosis below.
NOTE
• If printing process is continued after the above error is shown, the time is counted as Replenishment Lack Time and the P1R, P2RA
and P2RB replenishers will not be replenished.
Condition
Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Upper) does not turn LIGHT even after a specified time has passed.
4. Troubleshooting
Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Lower) does not turn to DARK even after a specified time has passed.
00003 When the replenisher cartridge setting part is moved to lower position to open the replenisher cartridge, Replenisher
Cartridge Position Sensor (Lower) detects the error.
Although the replenisher cartridge setting part has been moved upwards then, Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor
(Lower) does not turn to LIGHT even after a specified time has passed.
(When restarting after operation stop such as instant-off)
00004 When the replenisher cartridge setting part is moved to the upper position after the replenisher cartridge was failed to
be opened, the Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Lower) does not turn to LIGHT even after a specified time has
passed.
00005 When the replenisher cartridge setting part is moved to the upper position after the replenisher cartridge was failed to
be opened, the Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Upper) does not turn to DARK even after a specified time has
passed.
00006 When the replenisher cartridge setting part is moved to upper position after the replenisher cartridge was failed to be
opened, Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Upper) detects the error.
Although the replenisher cartridge setting part has been moved downwards then, Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor
(Upper) does not turn to LIGHT even after a specified time has passed.
00007 When the replenisher cartridge setting part is moved to the cap cleaning position for cleaning the cap, the Replenisher
Cartridge Position Sensor (Lower) does not turn to LIGHT even after a specified time has passed.
00008 When the replenisher cartridge setting part is moved to the cap cleaning position for cleaning the cap, the Replenisher
Cartridge Position Sensor (Upper) does not turn to DARK even after a specified time has passed.
00009 When the replenisher cartridge setting part is moved to the cap cleaning position to clean the cap, Replenisher Cartridge
Position Sensor (Upper) detects the error.
00010 When the replenisher cartridge setting part is moved to the lower position for draining the water after cleaning the cap,
the Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Upper) does not turn to LIGHT even after a specified time has passed.
the Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Lower) does not turn to DARK even after a specified time has passed.
Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Lower) detects the error.
Although the replenisher cartridge setting part has been moved upwards then, Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor
(Lower) does not turn to LIGHT even after a specified time has passed.
00013 When the replenisher cartridge setting part is moved to the upper position after the replenisher cartridge is opened or
cap is cleaned, the Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Lower) does not turn to LIGHT even after a specified time
has passed.
45900 1/16
45900

00014 When the replenisher cartridge setting part is moved to the upper position after the replenisher cartridge is opened or
cap is cleaned, the Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Upper) does not turn to DARK even after a specified time
has passed.
00015 Opening or cleaning the replenisher cartridge is completed and Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Upper) detects
the error.
• For the QSS-3701/3702/3703/LP7500/LP7600, about 507 prints whose size is 127 mm × 89 mm can be processed after the error
whose suffix number is from 00001 to 00006 occurs.
• For the QSS-3704/3705/LP7700/LP7900, about 545 prints whose size is 127 mm × 89 mm can be processed after the error whose
suffix number is from 00001 to 00006 occurs.
• Regarding the suffix numbers 00007 to 00015, print proceeds if an error message is closed by pressing YES.
Countermeasure
4. Troubleshooting
1. Check whether the replenisher cartridge setting part malfunctions or not.
☞ 4600
2. Perform recovery procedure 1 from the replenishment error.
☞ 4610
Check Point
Confirm that the replenisher cartridge setting part operates normally. ☞ 35320
Diagnosis
Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Upper) ☞ 63280
Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Lower)
Replenisher Cartridge Open Motor
Interlock Switch (Replenisher Section Door)
NOTE
45900 2/16
45900
No. 05901[F]
Replenishment solution level sensor error. P1R
No. 05902[F]
Replenishment solution level sensor error. P2RA
No. 05903[F]
Replenishment solution level sensor error. P2RB
No. 05904[F]
Replenishment solution level sensor error. PSR

YES
Condition
00000 When # # # (upper) replenishment solution level sensors of each processing solution are ON and when # # #
4. Troubleshooting
(lower) replenishment solution level sensors are OFF
Countermeasure
1. Confirm the condition of the replenishment solution level sensors of each processing solution with Input Check.
☞ 35220
2. Perform recovery procedure 2 from the replenishment error.☞ 4620
Diagnosis
Each replenishment solution level sensor ☞ 63280
NOTE
45900 3/16
45900
No. 05905[F]
P1R replenishment solution output amount/replenishment solution level management
is abnormal.
No. 05906[F]
P2RA replenishment solution output amount/replenishment solution level management
is abnormal.
No. 05907[F]
P2RB replenishment solution output amount/replenishment solution level management
is abnormal.

YES
IMPORTANT
diagnosis below.
4. Troubleshooting
NOTE
Condition
00001 When opening process is complete, # # # (upper) replenishment solution level sensors of each processing
solution do not turn off even a specified amount of processing solution is added.
00002 When # # # (upper) replenishment solution level sensors of each processing solution turned off, the processing
solution less than the specified amount was added and # # # (lower) replenishment solution level sensors of each
processing solution also turned off.
00003 After # # # (upper) replenishment solution level sensors turned off, # # # (lower) replenishment solution level
sensors of each processing solution do not turn off even though the processing solution exceeding the specified
amount has been added.
occurs.
• For the QSS-3704/3705/LP7700/LP7900, about 545 prints whose size is 127 mm × 89 mm can be processed after the error occurs.
• If Pump Output Amount Measurement of Pump Output Amount Setting is not performed at system installation, the above
errors may occur.
• The causes are shown below.
1. Even if each replenishment pump operates for a specified time, lower amounts of solution than the specified range is
replenished, and # # # (lower) replenishment solution level sensor of each solution is off.
2. If each replenishment pump operates for a specified time, larger amount of solution than the specified range is replenished,
and # # # (lower) replenishment solution level sensor of each solution does not turn off.
• If the processor control PCB is replaced, data (all data, or only the processor data) is initialized
or ☞ No. 05538 Backup data error. Processor occurs, suffix number 00002 of the error shown above may occur. ☞ 57020
Countermeasure
1. Check the status of the replenishment solution level sensors of each processing solution with Input Check.☞ 35220
2. Perform recovery procedure 2 from the replenishment error.☞ 4620
45900 4/16
45900
Check Point
Confirm that the hoses from each replenishment pump are not jammed. -
Confirm each replenishment pump output amount again. ☞ 33003
Diagnosis
Each replenishment solution level sensor ☞ 63280
P1R Replenisher Pump P2RA Replenisher Pump P2RB Replenisher Pump
NOTE
4. Troubleshooting
45900 5/16
45900
No. 05908[F]
Failed to open the replenisher cartridge.

YES
IMPORTANT
diagnosis below.
NOTE
Condition
- After it was opened and 40 seconds has passed, # # # (lower) replenisher solution level sensor for each
4. Troubleshooting
processing solution does not turn on.

00001 P1R
00002 P2RA
00004 P2RB
occurs.
Countermeasure
☞ 4610
Check Point
Confirm the condition of the replenishment solution level sensors of each processing solution with Input Check. ☞ 35220
Diagnosis
P1R (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor ☞ 63280
P2RA (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor
P2RB (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor
NOTE
45900 6/16
45900
No. 05909[F]
Cartridge cleaning valve/Agitation solenoid valve is abnormal. P1R
No. 05910[F]
Cartridge cleaning valve is abnormal. P2RA
No. 05911[F]
Cartridge cleaning valve is abnormal. P2RB

YES
IMPORTANT
diagnosis below.
NOTE
4. Troubleshooting
Condition
ERROR No. Condition
05909-00000 When the replenisher cartridge is cleaned, P1R cartridge flushing valve and P1R agitation solenoid valve are
opened and the auto cleaning pump is turned on for a specified time. However, P1R (Upper) Replenishment
Solution Level Sensor does not turn on.
05910-00000 When the replenisher cartridge is cleaned, P2RA cartridge flushing valve is opened and the auto cleaning pump
is turned on for a specified time. However, P2RA (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor does not turn
on.
05911-00000 When the replenisher cartridge is cleaned, P2RB cartridge flushing valve is opened and the auto cleaning pump is
turned on for a specified time. However, P2RB (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor does not turn on.
occurs.
• If Initial Replenisher Operation (Auto Cleaning Pump)→Mixing Replenisher→Initial Replenisher Operation (Replenisher
Pump) in Processor Set Up Mode are not performed in order at system installation, the above errors may occur.
• If normal opening operation is performed at system installation, replenishment solution is created with the replenishment
tank empty. Then, the replenishment solution does not reach the position where P2RA (Upper) Replenishment Solution
Level Sensor and P2RB (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor turn on, and the above errors occur.
• If opening operation is performed in the Processor Set Up Mode at system installation, the above errors do not occur even
if P2RA (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor and P2RB (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor are off.
Countermeasure
☞ 4610
Check Point
Confirm that the hoses are straight (Hoses connected to each of the cartridge cleaning valves and the auto cleaning
pump).
Confirm the output amounts of auto cleaning pump + each automated cleaning valve again. ☞ 33004
Confirm the condition of the replenishment solution level sensors of each processing solution with Input Check. ☞ 35220
45900 7/16
45900
Confirm that each cartridge valve and the auto cleaning pump work with Output Check. ☞ 35320
• P1R Cartridge Cleaning Valve + Replenisher Cartridge Cleaning Pump
• P2RA Cartridge Cleaning Valve + Replenisher Cartridge Cleaning Pump
• P2RB Cartridge Cleaning Valve + Replenisher Cartridge Cleaning Pump
• P1R agitation solenoid valve + Replenisher Cartridge Cleaning Pump
Diagnosis
P1R (Upper) Replenishment P2RA (Upper) Replenishment P2RB (Upper) Replenishment ☞ 63280
Solution Level Sensor Solution Level Sensor Solution Level Sensor
Auto cleaning pump Automated cleaning valve
NOTE
4. Troubleshooting
45900 8/16
45900
No. 05912[F]
Predetermined process amount was exceeded.

YES
Condition
Condition
When an error in the following error list occurred and printing was performed before the error was cleared, the integrated value of P1R
replenishment amount exceeded the specified amount.
• Specified amount for the QSS-3701/3702/3703/LP7500/LP7600: about 507 prints (127 mm × 89 mm size)
• Specified amount for the QSS-3704/3705/LP7700/LP7900: about 545 prints (127 mm × 89 mm size)
Take the corrective action in the error list.
Error list Countermeasure

• ☞ No. 00902[F] • Install the replenisher cartridge. Perform recovery procedure 3 from
• ☞ No. 00905[F] • Install the new replenisher cartridge. the replenishment error. ☞ 4621
4. Troubleshooting
• ☞ No. 00918[F] • Replenish PSR.
• ☞ No. 05900[F] • Replenisher cartridge open motor operation error. Recovery procedure from the
error(s) shown in the left
• ☞ No. 05905[F] • P1R replenishment solution output amount/replenishment solution Recovery procedure from the
• ☞ No. 05906[F] level management is abnormal. error(s) shown in the left
• ☞ No. 05907[F] • P2RA replenishment solution output amount/replenishment
solution level management is abnormal.
• P2RB replenishment solution output amount/replenishment
solution level management is abnormal.
• ☞ No. 05908[F] • Failed to open the replenisher cartridge. Recovery procedure from the
• ☞ No. 05909[F] • Cartridge cleaning valve/Agitation solenoid valve is abnormal. Recovery procedure from the
• ☞ No. 05910[F] P1R error(s) shown in the left
• ☞ No. 05911[F] • Cartridge cleaning valve is abnormal. P2RA
• Cartridge cleaning valve is abnormal. P2RB
• ☞ No. 05913[F] • An error occurred in the replenisher section. Recovery procedure from the
• ☞ No. 05923[F] • Solution remains in the replenishment tank. Perform recovery procedure 3 from
the replenishment error. ☞ 4621
• Even if an error is closed, it reoccurs until the replenisher cartridge is opened (replenishment solution is created).
Countermeasure
1. See the Error Record, and check which error occurred.
NOTE
• Attentions such as ☞ No. 00902[F] or ☞ No. 00905[F] are not shown on the Error Record.
If EZ Controller is used
Controller Main Display: 2260 → Click F. → Management Tool → System management → Error Record
2. Perform the recovery procedure from the error.
45900 9/16
45900
No. 05913[F]
An error occurred in the replenisher section.

YES
IMPORTANT
diagnosis below.
NOTE
Condition
Condition
When the following error listed below occurred, the system was restarted or started before the error was closed.
4. Troubleshooting
Error list Countermeasure
• ☞ No. 05900[F] • Replenisher cartridge open motor operation error. Recovery procedure from the
• ☞ No. 05905[F] • P1R replenishment solution output amount/replenishment solution level Recovery procedure from the
• ☞ No. 05906[F] management is abnormal. error(s) shown in the left
• ☞ No. 05907[F] • P2RA replenishment solution output amount/replenishment solution
level management is abnormal.
• P2RB replenishment solution output amount/replenishment solution
level management is abnormal.
• ☞ No. 05908[F] • Failed to open the replenisher cartridge. Recovery procedure from the
• ☞ No. 05909[F] • Cartridge cleaning valve/Agitation solenoid valve is abnormal. P1R Recovery procedure from the
• ☞ No. 05910[F] • Cartridge cleaning valve is abnormal. P2RA error(s) shown in the left
• ☞ No. 05911[F] • Cartridge cleaning valve is abnormal. P2RB
• ☞ No. 05913[F] • An error occurred in the replenisher section.
occurs.
Countermeasure
1. See the Error Record, and check which error occurred.
NOTE
• Attentions such as ☞ No. 00902[F] or ☞ No. 00905[F] are not shown on the Error Record.
If EZ Controller is used
Controller Main Display: 2260 → Click F. → Management Tool → System management → Error Record
2. Perform the recovery procedure from the error.
45900 10/16
45900
No. 05914[F]
Temperature and humidity sensor error.

YES
Condition
ERROR No. Condition
00001 The measured environmental temperature is not within the range between −10°C and +60°C.
00002 The measured environmental humidity is not within the range between 0 % and 100 %.
• An error occurs when Automatic is selected at Operator Selections → Processor → Humidity.

• If errors occur frequently, water is not refilled when evaporated.
In such cases, select one of the Standard , Low or High, except Automatic, in Operator Selections → Processor → Humidity.
Then, water is refilled and the system can be used again.
Check Point
4. Troubleshooting
Confirm that the status of the temperature and humidity sensor via Input Check. ☞ 35220
Confirm that there is no dust on the temperature and humidity sensor. ☞ 63280
Confirm that there is no connection failure in the wiring between the temperature and humidity sensor -
and processor control PCB.
Diagnosis
Temperature and humidity sensor ☞ 63280
NOTE
45900 11/16
45900
No. 05916[F]
Solution level of the processing tank goes below the processable level. P1
No. 05917[F]
Solution level of the processing tank goes below the processable level. P2
No. 05918[F]
Solution level of the processing tank goes below the processable level. PS1
No. 05919[F]
No. 05920[F]
No. 05921[F]
4. Troubleshooting
YES
Condition
00000 • # # #When the processable level decreases and a specific amount of water is added, # # # the processable
level detector keeps off.
• When the system starts up with program timer and filling up the moisture which evaporated is carried out, #
# # the processable level detector keeps off.
• If Pump Output Amount Measurement of Pump Output Amount Setting and Measure Auto Cleaning Water Output
Amount of Auto Cleaning Water Output Amount Setting are not performed at system installation, the above errors may occur.
1. Even if specified amount of water is supplied, # # # processable level does not turn on.
2. Even if each replenishment pump operates for a specified time, specified amount of solution is not replenished.
NOTE
• If the processing solution level detector of the processing solution float switch turns off, all the processing solution heaters and
circulation pumps turn off.
Countermeasure
1. Perform ☞ Taking countermeasures after the errors No.05916 to No.05921 occur.
☞ 4630
Check Point
Confirm that the processing solution is not leaking from the tank. -
Confirm that the float of the processing solution float switch moves up and down smoothly. -
Confirm the status of the float switches of each processing solution via Input Check. ☞ 35220
Confirm each replenishment pump output amount again. ☞ 33003
Confirm the output amounts of auto cleaning pump + each automated cleaning valve again. ☞ 33004
Select Operator Selections→Processor, and change the Evaporation Correction setting from OFF to -
ON.*1
*1. If Evaporation Correction is set to OFF, water is not replenished automatically although # # # processable level decreases.
Diagnosis
45900 12/16
45900


P1, P2 and PS automated cleaning valves
Replenisher cartridge cleaning pump
NOTE
4. Troubleshooting
45900 13/16
45900
No. 05922[F]
Replenisher section door is open.

YES
IMPORTANT
diagnosis below.
NOTE
Condition
Condition
When the replenisher section door is opened while the replenisher cartridge is open (replenishment solution is being created).
4. Troubleshooting
00001 When the replenisher section door is opened before the cap is cleaned.
00002 When the replenisher section door is opened while the cap is being cleaned.
whose suffix number is 00001 occurs.
• For the QSS-3704/3705/LP7700/LP7900, about 545 prints whose size is 127 mm × 89 mm can be processed after the error whose
suffix number is 00001 occurs.
• For the suffix number 00002, print proceeds if an error message is cleared by pressing YES.
Countermeasures for the suffix number 00001

1. Close the replenisher section door.
☞ 4620
Check Point
Confirm that the replenisher section door is securely closed. -
Confirm the Interlock Switch (Replenisher Section Door) status via Input Check. ☞ 35220
Diagnosis
Interlock Switch (Replenisher Section Door) ☞ 63280
NOTE
45900 14/16
45900
No. 05923[F]
Solution remains in the replenishment tank.

YES
IMPORTANT
diagnosis below.
NOTE
Condition
Condition
4. Troubleshooting
1. The replenishment solution cannot be detected by P1R (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor/P2RA (Lower)
Replenishment Solution Level Sensor/P2RB (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor, because the amount of the
replenishment solution decreases.
2. Mixing replenisher is in standby status when starting the mixing replenisher automatically, because the Interlock Switch
(Replenisher Section Door) is opened.
3. When # # # (lower) replenishment solution level sensor detects the replenishment solution while the mixing replenisher is in
standby status.

00001 P1R
00002 P2RA
00004 P2RB
occurs.
NOTE
• When Mixing Replenisher is clicked and the (lower) replenishment solution level sensors of P1R, P2RA or P2RB is on, the following
attention message is shown.
☞ No. 00913[F] Mixing Replenisher cannot be started.
The above-mentioned error can be closed when one of the following conditions are fulfilled.
• Mixing Replenisher is performed without solution in each replenishment tank.
• All the (lower) and (upper) replenishment solution level sensors of each replenishment tank are on.
Countermeasure
1. Perform recovery procedure 3 from the replenishment error. ☞ 4621
Check Point
Confirm the condition of # # # lower replenishment solution level sensors of each processing solution ☞ 35220
with Input Check.
45900 15/16
45900
Diagnosis
P1R (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor ☞ 63280
P2RA (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor
P2RB (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor
NOTE
4. Troubleshooting
45900 16/16
46000
Error message: Printer 1
Error message: Printer 1
No. 06012
Paper did not load. Paper Magazine A
No. 06013
Paper did not load. Paper Magazine B

YES
Condition
No. 06012 Paper cannot be loaded from paper magazine A.
No. 06013 Paper cannot be loaded from paper magazine B.

00001 Even though a specified length of paper is advanced after the paper loading has started, paper end sensor A and
B do not turn DARK during setup or printing of the mechanical adjustment.
00002 Even though a specified length of paper is advanced after the paper end sensors A and B have turned DARK, the
4. Troubleshooting
loading sensor does not turn DARK.
00003 When magazine initial operation is performed, paper is rewound until the paper end sensor stops detection and it
is advanced to the paper loading sensor position. However, the loading sensor does not detect DARK.
NOTE
• For details about magazine initial operation, see 55100 ☞ Performs magazine initial operation.
Check Point
1 Confirm that the paper is correctly inserted into the paper magazine.
2 Clean the advance roller.
3 Perform Paper Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment of Paper Sensor Adjustment in Functions.
☞ 36000
Diagnosis
Advance failure Manual No.
Paper magazine motor A or B ☞ 63051
Paper supply motor A, B or C ☞ 63060
Printer power supply 2 ☞ 66100
Detection failure (paper end sensor) Manual No.

Paper end sensor A or B ☞ 63051
Detection failure (paper loading sensor) Manual No.

Paper loading sensor ☞ 66030
46000 1/18

Manual Noritsu Parte 2

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Manual Noritsu Parte 2

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Manual Noritsu Parte 2

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

33550

Processor Standard Setting

Pump Output Amount Setting [J]

Bringing up the display

! Pump Output Amount Setting (Input range: 0.1 to 200 ml)

! Pump Output Amount Measurement

! Initial Replenishment Operation

Operation Check [J]

Bringing up the display

Manual Kit Change [J]

Bringing up the display

! Manual Kit Change

Dryer Lane Select Operation Setting

Bringing up the display

Dryer selection solenoid 1

Dryer selection solenoid 2

! Dryer selection solenoid 1

! Dryer selection solenoid 2

Bringing up the display

Operator Selections (Printer 1)

Required conditions for selecting TYPE 2 for Setup Type

! Explanation (Processor 1/Processor 2)

Operator Selections (Processor)

*1. Not used for the F specification.

! Necessary operations when changing Setup Type

1. Change the Setup Type.

Example: Setup Type

If several printers are connected

5. Backup the setting data of the system.

Colorimeter Unit Adjustment

Bringing up the display

! Test Paper Advance

! Paper Test Advance

1. Execute Test Paper Advance via Functions.

3. Perform Paper Test Advance in Functions.

First line Second line

7. Click OK to advance the test paper to the second line position.

1. Perform Cleaning operation in Functions.

3. Insert the cleaning sheet into the colorimeter.

Input Check (Printer)

Bringing up the display

No. Display Status

! Magazine Unit A2-1

! Magazine Unit A2-2

! Exposure Advance Unit

! Exposure Engine Section

No. Display Status

! Paper Advance Section 1

! Paper Advance Section 2

No. Display Status

! Operation of the interlock switches

If the quad magazine unit is not installed

Input Check (Processor) [F]

Bringing up the display

! 1 (for each specification)

! 2 (for each specification)

No. Display Status

! 3 (for each specification)

! Dryer Section (common to all specifications)